Muratec MFX2830 Field Engineer Manual (Field Service)

MFX-2830
FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL
U.S. version 2.0

(May 26, 2006)
MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DIV.
Table of Contents
Section 1 General Description ................................................ 1-1
1.1 Product Description.............................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 General specifications.......................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.3 Scanning specifications ....................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.4 Printer specifications............................................................................................................................ 1-6 1.5 Memory specifications ......................................................................................................................... 1-7 1.6 G3 modem section ............................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.7 V.34 HDX modem section.................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.8 Features and Functions ....................................................................................................................... 1-9 1.8.1 Dialer............................................................................................................................................. 1-9 1.8.2 Fax Transmitting ......................................................................................................................... 1-11 1.8.3 Fax Receiving ............................................................................................................................. 1-12 1.8.4 Polling ......................................................................................................................................... 1-12 1.8.5 Copy............................................................................................................................................ 1-13 1.8.6 Other features............................................................................................................................. 1-13 1.8.7 Reports ....................................................................................................................................... 1-14 1.9 Supply Yields ..................................................................................................................................... 1-14 1.10 Option............................................................................................................................................... 1-15
Section2 Machine Composition.............................................. 2-1

2.1 Interconnect Block Diagram................................................................................................................. 2-1 Main-Scanner-CCD ............................................................................................................................... 2-1 Scanner-ADF ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2 Main-Panel............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 Main-NCU/USB/Printer .......................................................................................................................... 2-4 Main-DP/RADF ...................................................................................................................................... 2-5 Main-ExtentionMemory/EFI ................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.2 Interconnect Block Diagram (Printer)................................................................................................... 2-7 Block diagram (Printer_1of2) ................................................................................................................. 2-7 Block diagram (Printer_2of2) ................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.3 Scanning Section ................................................................................................................................. 2-9 2.3.1 ADF section .................................................................................................................................. 2-9 2.3.2 FBS section ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.4 Recording Section.............................................................................................................................. 2-14 2.4.1 Image Processing ....................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.4.2 Operating Sequence................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.4.3 PH Section .................................................................................................................................. 2-17 2.4.4 Imaging unit (IU) ......................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.4.5 Toner Unit ................................................................................................................................... 2-22 2.4.6 Image Transfer Section .............................................................................................................. 2-25 2.4.7 Fusing Section ............................................................................................................................ 2-26 2.4.8 Paper Take-up Section ............................................................................................................... 2-30 2.4.9 OTHER UNITS AND MECHANISMS ......................................................................................... 2-34
Section3 Software adjustment................................................ 3-1

3.1 Field Service Program Modes.............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment........................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters .................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters ................................................................................................ 3-4 3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 3-122 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches ................................................................................................... 3-122 3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches................................................................................................. 3-123 i
3.4 Unique Switch Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 3-141 3.4.1 Setting the Unique Switches..................................................................................................... 3-141 3.4.2 Clearing the Unique Switches .................................................................................................. 3-142 3.5 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes ............................................................................................ 3-167 3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings ......................................................................................... 3-171 3.7 All RAM Clear................................................................................................................................... 3-171 3.8 Monitor speaker ............................................................................................................................... 3-172 3.9 Test Modes ...................................................................................................................................... 3-172 3.9.1 Life Monitor ............................................................................................................................... 3-172 3.9.2 Printer Test ............................................................................................................................... 3-173 3.9.3 Port Status ................................................................................................................................ 3-174 3.9.5 Set Background Level............................................................................................................... 3-175 3.9.5 CIS Roller Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 3-176 3.10 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings ..................................... 3-176 3.11 Factory Functions .......................................................................................................................... 3-177 3.11.1 Function List ........................................................................................................................... 3-177 3.11.2 LED Test ................................................................................................................................. 3-178 3.11.3 LCD Test................................................................................................................................. 3-178 3.11.4 Panel Test............................................................................................................................... 3-178 3.11.5 SRAM Check .......................................................................................................................... 3-179 3.11.6 DRAM Check .......................................................................................................................... 3-180 3.11.7 RTC(real time clock) Test....................................................................................................... 3-181 3.11.8 Page memory check ............................................................................................................... 3-181 3.11.9 ATDC adjustment ................................................................................................................... 3-182 3.11.10 Adjust Touch Panel............................................................................................................... 3-182 3.11.11 Generate Bell Test................................................................................................................ 3-183 3.11.12 Toner supply mode ............................................................................................................... 3-183 3.12 Line Tests....................................................................................................................................... 3-184 3.12.1 Relay Test............................................................................................................................... 3-184 3.12.2 Tonal Signal Test.................................................................................................................... 3-185 3.12.3 DTMF Output Test .................................................................................................................. 3-186 3.13 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ...................................................................................................... 3-187 3.14 Consumable order sheet................................................................................................................ 3-188 3.14.1 Set the consumable order sheet............................................................................................. 3-189 3.14.2 Clear consumable order sheet ............................................................................................... 3-193 3.14.3 Order Sheet List...................................................................................................................... 3-194 3.15 DRAM Clear ................................................................................................................................... 3-194 3.16 Clear Life Monitor........................................................................................................................... 3-195 3.17 Set Service Code ........................................................................................................................... 3-195 3.18 Life Monitor Maintenance............................................................................................................... 3-196 3.19 Internet fax service mode............................................................................................................... 3-198 3.19.1 Display the sum check............................................................................................................ 3-198 3.19.2 Clear the Administrators information ..................................................................................... 3-199 3.19.3.All clear the registered parameters of the Internet fax board ................................................. 3-199 3.20 Multi Line Settings.......................................................................................................................... 3-200 3.21 Flash Rom Sum Check .................................................................................................................. 3-201 3.22 Set Service Report......................................................................................................................... 3-202 3.22.1 Set the service report.............................................................................................................. 3-202 3.22.2 Delete the service report setting............................................................................................. 3-204 3.23 Printer registration adjustment ....................................................................................................... 3-205 3.24 Printer Trouble Reset..................................................................................................................... 3-205 3.25 Cleaning Mode ............................................................................................................................... 3-205 3.26 Voice Test ...................................................................................................................................... 3-206 3.27 Bypass tray width adjustment ........................................................................................................ 3-207 3.28 Key counter mode .......................................................................................................................... 3-207 ii
3.29 Update the software....................................................................................................................... 3-208 Error code .......................................................................................................................................... 3-209 3.30 Quick Initial settings ....................................................................................................................... 3-210
Section4 Troubleshooting Procedures .................................. 4-1

4.1 Troubleshooting Outline....................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Document feeder problems.................................................................................................................. 4-2 4.3 Mirror Carriage Error............................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.5 Transmit Error ...................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.6 Cannot transmit.................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.7 Receive Errors ..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.8 Recording paper misfeed..................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.8.1 Electrical Components Check Procedure..................................................................................... 4-4 4.8.2 Sensor Check List......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.8.3 Initial Checks .............................................................................................................................. 4-14 4.8.4 Misfeed display ........................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.8.5 Misfeed-Detecting Sensor Layout .............................................................................................. 4-15 4.8.6 Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures......................................................................................... 4-17 4.9 Service Call Error ............................................................................................................................... 4-30 4.9.1 Call For Service .......................................................................................................................... 4-30 4.9.2 Please Call Service..................................................................................................................... 4-30 4.10 Power-Supply-Related Malfunctions................................................................................................ 4-66 4.11 Image Failure ................................................................................................................................... 4-67 4.11.1 Image Failure Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 4-67 4.11.2 Initial Checks ............................................................................................................................ 4-67 4.11.3 Troubleshooting Procedures classified by Image Failure ........................................................ 4-68 4.12 Error Codes...................................................................................................................................... 4-78 Dialing errors ....................................................................................................................................... 4-78 Reception errors .................................................................................................................................. 4-78 Transmission errors ............................................................................................................................. 4-79 Communication Error Messages ......................................................................................................... 4-80
Section 5 Maintenance & Adjustment .................................... 5-1

5.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Re/Disassemble ................................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.1 ADF............................................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.2 Panel........................................................................................................................................... 5-52 5.2.3 FBS ............................................................................................................................................. 5-60 5.2.4 PCB............................................................................................................................................. 5-83 5.2.5 Printer section............................................................................................................................. 5-86 5.2.6 PAPER TAKE-UP / TRANSPORT SECTION........................................................................... 5-110 5.2.7 PAPER SUPPLY CABINET...................................................................................................... 5-130 5.2.8 2500 sheet paper supply cabinet.............................................................................................. 5-133 5.3 Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................... 5-140 5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment ................................................................................. 5-140 5.3.2 Printer registration mode .......................................................................................................... 5-140 5.3.3 Printer registration (top) ............................................................................................................ 5-142 5.3.4 Printer registration (side) .......................................................................................................... 5-143 5.3.5 FBS registration (top)................................................................................................................ 5-144 5.3.6 FBS registration (side) .............................................................................................................. 5-145 5.3.7 ADF registration (top) ............................................................................................................... 5-146 5.3.8 ADF registration (bottom) ......................................................................................................... 5-147 5.3.9 ADF registration (side).............................................................................................................. 5-148 5.3.10 FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)............................................................................................. 5-149 5.3.11 FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)......................................................................................... 5-150 5.3.12 ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)............................................................................................. 5-151 iii
5.3.13 ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal) ........................................................................................ 5-152 5.4 Adjusting the image deformation caused by Mirror carriage A and B at the incorrect position....... 5-153 5.4.1 When the copy using the FBS is deformation as shown below, adjust the Mirror carriage position5-153 5.4.2 When the copy using the FBS is deformation as shown below, adjust the Mirror carriage position5-154 5.4.3 Adjusting the position of Mirror carriage A and B ..................................................................... 5-155 5.5 ADF Adjustments ............................................................................................................................. 5-156 5.5.1 Height adjustment..................................................................................................................... 5-156 5.5.2 Squareness adjustment............................................................................................................ 5-157 5.5.3 Platen cover adjustment ........................................................................................................... 5-158 5.5.4 Piece separator pressure adjustment....................................................................................... 5-159
Section6 Options...................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Memory Upgrade ................................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.1.1 Memory Upgrade .......................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Telephone Handset.............................................................................................................................. 6-4 6.2.1 Attaching the optional handset ..................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.2 Adjusting handset ......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3 PAPER FEED UNIT ............................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.3.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL........................................................................................ 6-8 6.3.1.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.3.1.2 PARTS IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 6-8 6.3.1.3 DRIVE SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................ 6-9 6.3.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LAYOUT .................................................................................. 6-9 6.3.1.5 MECHANICAL OPERATIONS ................................................................................................ 6-10 6.3.2 DIS/REASSEMBLE, CLEANING .................................................................................................... 6-11 6.3.2.1 Disassembly ............................................................................................................................ 6-11 6.3.2.2 Cleaning................................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.3.3 MISFEED DETECTION .................................................................................................................. 6-16 6.4.3.1 Initial Check ............................................................................................................................. 6-16 6.3.3.2 Misfeed detection..................................................................................................................... 6-16 6.3.4 Service call error ............................................................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.4.1 Printer error code..................................................................................................................... 6-19 6.4 Large Capacity Cassette.................................................................................................................... 6-21 6.4.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL...................................................................................... 6-22 6.4.1.1 Specifications........................................................................................................................... 6-22 6.4.1.2 PARTS IDENTIFICATION ....................................................................................................... 6-22 6.4.1.3 Drive System ........................................................................................................................... 6-23 6.4.1.4 Electrical Components Layout................................................................................................. 6-24 6.4.1.5 Mechanical Operations............................................................................................................ 6-25 6.4.2 DIS/REASSEMBLY, CLEANING .................................................................................................... 6-27 6.4.2.1 Disassembly ............................................................................................................................ 6-27 6.4.2.2 Cleaning................................................................................................................................... 6-35 6.4.3 MISFEED/MALFUNCTION DETECTION ....................................................................................... 6-37 6.4.3.1 Initial Check ............................................................................................................................. 6-37 6.4.3.2 Misfeed Detection .................................................................................................................... 6-37 6.4.4 Service call error ............................................................................................................................. 6-39 6.4.4.1 Printer error code..................................................................................................................... 6-39 6.5 Duplex/Swichback/2-Bin Tray Unit .................................................................................................... 6-48 6.5.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL...................................................................................... 6-49 6.5.1.1 Specifications........................................................................................................................... 6-49 6.5.1.2 DRIVE SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 6-51 6.5.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LAYOUT ................................................................................ 6-52 6.5.1.4 Operation Of Each Mechanism ............................................................................................... 6-53 6.5.2 DIS/REASSEMBLY, CLEANING .................................................................................................... 6-54 6.5.2.1 Disassembly ............................................................................................................................ 6-54 6.5.2.2 Cleaning................................................................................................................................... 6-56 iv
6.5.3 MISFEED DETECTION .................................................................................................................. 6-58 6.5.3.1 Initial Check ............................................................................................................................. 6-58 6.5.3.2 Misfeed Detection .................................................................................................................... 6-59 6.6 Second phone line ............................................................................................................................. 6-64 6.6.1 Attaching the second phone line..................................................................................................... 6-65 6.6.1.1 Unpacking................................................................................................................................ 6-65 6.6.1.2 Installing the Second phone line module................................................................................. 6-65 6.6.2 Adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... 6-67 6.6.2.1 Multi Line Settings ................................................................................................................... 6-67 About the symbol by the table................................................................................................................ 6-68 6.7 Printer controller................................................................................................................................. 6-69 6.7.1 Attaching the printer controller board.............................................................................................. 6-70 6.7.1.1 Unpacking................................................................................................................................ 6-70 6.7.1.2 Installing the Printer controller kit ............................................................................................ 6-70 6.7.2 Display of the Software Version...................................................................................................... 6-72 6.8 Printer Network Interface ................................................................................................................... 6-73 6.8.1 Attaching the printer network board................................................................................................ 6-74 6.8.1.1 Unpacking................................................................................................................................ 6-74 6.8.1.2 Installing the Network board .................................................................................................... 6-74 6.8.2 Display of the Software Version...................................................................................................... 6-76 6.9 Information Server kit......................................................................................................................... 6-77 6.9.1 Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................... 6-78 6.9.1.1 Packaging contents: ................................................................................................................ 6-78 6.9.1.2 Installation................................................................................................................................ 6-78 6.9.2 Display of the Software Version...................................................................................................... 6-81 6.9.3 Internet fax service mode................................................................................................................ 6-82 6.10 Finisher/Punch kit ............................................................................................................................ 6-84 6.10.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL.................................................................................... 6-85 6.10.1.1 Specifications......................................................................................................................... 6-85 6.10.1.2 DRIVE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 6-87 6.10.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LAYOUT .............................................................................. 6-88 6.10.1.4 Operation Of Each Mechanism ............................................................................................. 6-89 6.10.2 DIS/REASSEMBLY, CLEANING .................................................................................................. 6-96 6.10.2.1 Disassembly .......................................................................................................................... 6-96 6.10.2.2 Cleaning............................................................................................................................... 6-105 6.10.3 MISFEED DETECTION .............................................................................................................. 6-108 6.10.3.1 Initial Check ......................................................................................................................... 6-108 6.10.3.2 Misfeed Detection ................................................................................................................ 6-108 6.10.4 Service call error ......................................................................................................................... 6-112 6.10.4.1 Printer error code................................................................................................................. 6-112
Section 1 General Description

1.1 Product Description
The MFX-2830 is Multi-function product with flat bed scanner and Group 3 and V.34 HDX modem facsimile machine. Documents are printed on plain paper using dry electrophotographic printing.
1-1
General Description
Muratec MFX-2830
1.2 General specifications

Item Type Specifications / Comments Multi-function product with flatbed scanner. Group 3 and V.34 HDX console type facsimile with high-speed facsimile transmitter and receiver. PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or equivalent. ITU-T T.4 and T.30 ITU-T-standard JBIG, MH, MR and MMR. Full-duplex per ITU-T V.34 (only for control channel) Half-duplex per ITU-T V.34, V.17, V.29, V.27ter and V.21 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and 2400 bps per ITU-T V.34. Control signal speed is 1200 or 2400 bps. 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and 2400 bps with automatic fallback per ITU-T, V.17, V.29, V.27ter and V21. Control signal speed is 300 bps. Allows up to four simultaneous operations LCD: 320dots 240dots. Language: English/French/Spanish CCD, CIS(RADF) Dry electrophotographic printer Copier 216 mm (8.5), 279 mm (11.0) (User selectable) Fax 214 mm (8.4), 276 mm (10.9) (User selectable) Upper: 3 mm, Lower: 3 mm, Right: 3 mm, Left: 3 mm ADF (Auto Document Feeder) section Document size (Width Length) Max: 297 mm(11.7) 432 mm(17.0) Min: 148 mm(5.8) 105 mm(4.1) Document thickness : 0.07-0.12mm 2 Document weigh : 52-105 g/m FBS (Flatbed scanner) section (Width Length) Max: 279 mm(11.0) 432 mm(17.0) Min: No limit
Telephone network Compatibility Coding method Communication method Modem
Dual Access Display Scanning method Printing method Effective scanning width Printing margin Acceptable document size
1-2
Muratec MFX-2830 Item Acceptable recording paper size
General Description Specifications / Comments 1st 4th cassette: Letter(SEF/LEF), Legal(SEF), Ledger(SEF), Halfletter(SEF), A3(SEF), B4(SEF), A4(SEF/LEF), B5(SEF/LEF), A5(SEF/LEF), Large Capacity Cassette*: Letter(LEF) Letter(SEF/LEF), Legal(SEF), Ledger(SEF), Halfletter(SEF/LEF), A3(SEF), B4(SEF), A4(SEF/LEF), B5(SEF/LEF), A5(SEF/LEF), A6(SEF), F4(SEF), Postcard(SEF), Custom-sized**, DL(SEF), COM10(SEF), Executive(SEF/LEF). 2 1st 4th cassette: Plain paper(56-90g/m ) 2 Large Capacity Cassette*: Plain paper(56-90g/m ) 2 Bypass tray: Plain paper(56-90g/m ), PasteBoard, Transparency, Postcard 32MB (2,533 pages) Transmit and receive Ambient temperature: 10 C to 35 C (50 F to 95 F) Relative humidity: 15 % to 85 % with no condensation 120 VAC 10 %; 50-60 Hz Auto power off mode: 8.8 W Sleep mode: 50 W Standby: 168 Wh Memory Transmit: 105 W Receive: 880 W Copy: 950 W Maximum: 1320 W (Simultaneous copying, communicating and scanning)
*: Option **: Width: 140 mm(5.5) to 432 mm(17.0), Length: 100 mm(3.9) to 295 mm(11.6)
Bypass tray:
Acceptable recording paper type
Document Memory Error Correction Mode (ECM) Operating environment Power requirements Power consumption
1-3
General Description Item Specifications / Comments
Muratec MFX-2830
Dimensions (W D H) : 678 mm(26.7) 658 mm(25.9) 856 mm(33.7)
602
658
856
108
570 678
Weight Keypad layout
84.7 Kg (186.7 lb) Weight does not include :
Toner bottle, Drum
Body Color
Muratec light gray (91-242)
1-4
Muratec MFX-2830
General Description
1.3 Scanning specifications

Item Scanning method Acceptable document size Specifications / Comments CCD, CIS(RADF) ADF (Auto Document Feeder) section Document size (Width Length) Max: 297 mm(11.7) 432 mm(17.0) Min: 148 mm(5.8) 105 mm(4.1) Document thickness : 0.07-0.12mm 2 Document weigh : 52-105 g/m FBS (Flatbed scanner) section (Width Length) Max: 279 mm(11.0) 432 mm(17.0) Min: No limit Face up ADF section: Yes (Letter(SEF/LEF), Legal(SEF), Ledger(SEF), Half-letter(SEF/LEF)) FBS section: Yes (Letter(SEF/LEF), Legal(SEF), Ledger(SEF), Half-letter(SEF/LEF)) Copier 216 mm (8.5), 279 mm (11.0) (User selectable) Fax 214 mm (8.4), 276 mm (10.9) (User selectable) Transmission: Normal: 8 dots/mm 3.85 lines/mm (203 dpi 98 lpi) Fine: 8 dots/mm 7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) SuperFine: *16 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm (406 dpi 392 lpi or 600 dpi 600 lpi) Grayscale (Memory Tx): 16 dots/mm 7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) Grayscale (Feeder Tx): *16 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm (406 dpi 392 lpi)
*: In the case that the remote fax has the ability of 16 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm. If not, the super fine resolution is 8 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm, and the grayscale resolution in feeder transmission is 8 dots/mm 7.7 lines/mm.
Document feeding direction Document size autodetection
Scanning width Scanning resolution
Scanning contrast Grayscale Automatic document feeder (ADF) capacity Document scanning time
Copy: Normal: N/A Fine: N/A SuperFine: 600 dpi 600 lpi 5 levels (Auto/Manual adjustment) 256 levels 100 sheets (20 lb bond paper) Transmission(ADF/RADF): Normal: 0.80/ 0.95 sec/page Fine: 1.06/1.27 sec/page Super fine(600600dpi): 1.60/1.94 sec/page Super fine(406392dpi): 1.60/1.94 sec/page Grayscale(Memory Tx): 1.06/1.27 sec/page Copy(ADF/RADF) (ADF/RADF): Super fine: 1.60:1.94 sec/page (Based on Letter(LEF) blank page)
1-5
General Description
Muratec MFX-2830
1.4 Printer specifications

Item Printing resolution Printing method Fusing method Printing margin Printing speed Acceptable recording paper size Specifications / Comments Laser diode beam scanning 600 dpi 600 lpi Dry electrophotographic printer Heat roller Upper: 3 mm, Lower: 3 mm, Right: 3 mm, Left: 3 mm 28 ppm (Based on Letter(LEF) paper) 1st 4th cassette: Letter(SEF/LEF), Legal(SEF), Ledger(SEF), Halfletter(SEF), A3(SEF), B4(SEF), A4(SEF/LEF), B5(SEF/LEF), A5(SEF/LEF), Large Capacity Cassette*: Letter(LEF) Bypass tray: Letter(SEF/LEF), Legal(SEF), Ledger(SEF), Halfletter(SEF/LEF), A3(SEF), B4(SEF), A4(SEF/LEF), B5(SEF/LEF), A5(SEF/LEF), A6(SEF), F4(SEF), Postcard(SEF), Custom-sized**, DL(SEF), COM10(SEF), Executive(SEF/LEF). 2 Large Capacity Cassette*: Plain paper(56-90g/m ) 2 Bypass tray: Plain paper(56-90g/m ), PasteBoard, Transparency, Postcard 1st 4th cassette: 500 sheets Large Capacity Cassette*: 2,500 sheets Bypass tray: 150 sheet 500 sheets Optional 2-Bin tray*: Upper: 100 sheets, Lower: 250 sheets Face down Under 17 seconds
*: Option **: Width: 140 mm(5.5) to 432 mm(17.0), Length: 100 mm(3.9) to 295 mm(11.6)
Acceptable recording paper type Recording paper capacity
Output paper tray capacity
Receive paper feeding direction Warm up time
1-6
Muratec MFX-2830
General Description
1.5 Memory specifications

Item Document memory Document stored capacity Document memory backup Specifications / Comments 32 MB (Standard) Optional memory upgrade: See the table below. 2,533 pages (Total memory capacity : Backup time) 32 MB: 34 hours 64 MB: 17 hours The backup battery requires about 48 hours to reach full charge after power to the fax unit is restored. Shows on the LCD
Memory usage indication Option memory upgrade Built-in Connector P6 32 MB 32 MB + 32 MB
Total memory 32 MB (32768 KB) 64 MB (65536 KB)
Standard
1-7
General Description
Muratec MFX-2830
1.6 G3 modem section

Transmission mode Modulation method Transmission speed (bit/s) Modulation speed (baud) Carrier frequency (Hz) Detection method Automatic equalizer Transmission mode Modulation method Transmission speed (bit/s) Modulation speed (baud) Carrier frequency (Hz) Detection method Automatic equalizer 128 Pt. TCM 14400 2400 V.17 64 Pt. TCM 32 Pt. TCM 12000 9600 2400 2400 16 Pt. TCM 7200 2400
1800 Synchronism Automatic adaptive equalizer V.29 16 Pt. QAM 8 Pt. QAM 9600 7200 2400 1700 2400 V.27ter 8 Pt. PhM 4 Pt. PhM 4800 2400 1600 1800 1200 V.21 FSK 300 300 f (0) = 1850 f (1) = 1650 FS None
Synchronism Automatic adaptive equalizer
1.7 V.34 HDX modem section

Transmission mode Modulation method Transmission speed (bit/s) Symbol rate (baud) 33600 31200 28800 V.34 TCM 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800
None None None Carrier frequency (Hz)
3429 3200 3000 2800 None 3429 baud: 1959 high, 1959 low 3200 baud: 1920 high, 1829 low 3000 baud: 2000 high, 1800 low 2800 baud: 1867 high, 1680 low 2400 baud: 1800 high, 1600 low Synchronism Automatic adaptive equalizer V.34 TCM 9600 7200 2400
Detection method Automatic equalizer Transmission mode Modulation method Transmission speed (bit/s) Symbol rate (baud)
14400
12000
4800
2400 None None None None
Carrier frequency (Hz)
Detection method Automatic equalizer
3429 3200 3000 2800 2400 3429 baud: 1959 high, 1959 low 3200 baud: 1920 high, 1829 low 3000 baud: 2000 high, 1800 low 2800 baud: 1867 high, 1680 low 2400 baud: 1800 high, 1600 low Synchronism Automatic adaptive equalizer
1-8
Muratec MFX-2830
General Description
1.8 Features and Functions

1.8.1 Dialer
Item Autodialer Programmable one-touch. Specifications / Comments 500 total; 48 one-touch, 452 speed dial. (Up to 40 digits per location; 24 characters per location ID) 4 total The programmable one-touch keys simplify complex fax operation. The following multi-step operations can be programmed. Fax communication Delayed transmission Regular polling F-code transmission F-code polling 5 total Fax communication Document type(Default setting) Contrast(Default setting) Broadcast(Default setting) Transmission confirmation report(Default setting) Onhook(Default setting) Redial Speed dial Fax forwarding Fax & Copy Programmable one-touch Group transmission Enlarge transmission Security reception TTI on/off TTI Select Cover Page on/off Delayed transmission Batch transmission Scan Size Polling F-code Polling F-code transmission Oversea transmission on/off Memory transmission on/off Dial Option Duplex Scanning Auto Receive Is+Address I-Fax Menu Copy Document type(Default setting) Contrast(Default setting) Duplex (Default setting) Zoom(Default setting) Sort(Default setting) Select paper Combine Repeat Series copy Erasing boarder Erasing center 1-9
Soft key
General Description
Muratec MFX-2830 TopUp copy Binding margin Directional magnification Positive/negative copy Last Job copy Booklet (with optional Duplex unit) Card copy Staple (with optional Finisher unit) Punch (with optional Finisher and Punch kit) 6 total The macro keys simplify multiple fax or copy operations. Up to 60 steps can be programmed in one macro key. Up to 60 characters can be entered in the title of the macro key. Display on the LCD at Fax standby mode. Tone or pulse (10 pps) 2-10 seconds. (Initial setting: 2 seconds) Auto redial in fax mode, programmable for 2 to 15 attempts (default: 2) at 1 to 5 minutes intervals (default: 1); manual last-number redial. Available Available Works only if the handset is attached. The fax can receive a telephone call, but it cannot send or receive a fax message.
Macro key
Telephone index Type of dialing Dialing pause time Redial PIN access On-hook dialing Dialing in the event of a power failure
1-10
Muratec MFX-2830
General Description
1.8.2 Fax Transmitting

Item Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI) Memory transmission Quick memory transmission Rotate transmission Duplexed transmission Delayed transmission Broadcasting Relay broadcast / Relay broadcast initiation (ITU-T sub-address compatible) Specifications / Comments Alphanumeric or symbol, up to 22 characters. 3 patterns of TTI can be registered. Available. Available. Available. (Letter only) Available. Programmable up to 31 days in advance. Up to 530 locations.(48 one-touch, 452 speed dial and 30 normally dial). Specify up to 530 numbers for remote hub unit using a one-touch key, a speed-dial number or a call group number. When receiving a document via ITU-T sub-addressing from another machine to F-Code relay box, your fax machine will relay it to other machine you set up on your relay box. Also, you can send (relay broadcast initiation) the document to hub machines F-Code box with ITU-T sub-address and you get the hub machine relayed it to other machine. Allows multiple broadcasting or polling locations to be placed in up to 32 call groups. Up to 500 locations can be placed in a group. ITU-T sub-address: Up to 20 characters. ITU-T password: Up to 20 characters. Store up to 100 delayed commands. Available. 5 boxes with a location ID of 24 characters. 40 files per box. Programmable up to 24 hours per box. Cover page shows date and time, senders name and fax number, and a 40-character x 3 lines user-programmable message. During sending or receiving, a voice conversation can be initiated on the same call after each page is printed. (Works only if the optional handset is attached.) Note: Not available at V.34 communication.
Group communication SecureMail transmission (ITU-T sub-address compatible)) Delayed commands Security transmission Batch transmission Cover page Call request
1-11
General Description
Muratec MFX-2830 Specifications / Comments Tel ready, Fax ready, Fax/Tel ready, Tel/Fax ready and Ans/Fax ready mode; user selectable. Auto: Automatically reduces printouts from 100 % to 25 %. Reduction margin: 0-3.3 inches (Initial setting: 1.7 inches) Available. Available. (This feature tells the machine to combine two of half-page receptions onto a single sheet.) Up to 50 mailboxes for receiving, 4 digits passcode. Holds a document up to 31 days (or no limit). ITU-T sub-address: Up to 20 characters. ITU-T password: Up to 20 characters. Ability to reject junk fax receptions: user selectable three options. Specify up to 50 numbers in the blocked numbers list. Receives up to 250 communications to memory if recording paper or toner is empty. You can tell the machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not print them) after a certain time; then, later, you instruct it to go ahead and print out the saved faxes. Ability to answer on specific ring patterns. User selectable Select 1 to 10 rings. (Initial setting: 2 rings.) Not available.
1.8.3 Fax Receiving

Item Receive mode Receive reduction rate Rotate reception Half-page reception
SecureMail reception (ITU-T sub-address compatible) Block junk fax Out of paper reception Security reception
Distinctive Ring Detection Number of rings Dial Prefix Remote reception upon second phone connection
1.8.4 Polling
Item Regular polling Delayed polling Database polling (ITU-T sub-address compatible) Polled transmission Specifications / Comments Retrieves a document from the remote fax machine. Programmable up to 31 days in advance. Retrieves a document stored in a memory box in the remote fax machine. You must enter a ITU-T sub-address and password to retrieve a document from any remote faxs memory box. A remote fax machine retrieves a document stored in your fax machine.
1-12
Muratec MFX-2830
General Description Specifications / Comments TBD sec. (Based on Letter(LEF)) Up to 999 Manual: Reduces/enlarges copies by the 1 % ratio from 400 % to 25 %. Fixed: Select the fixed rates from 154, 129, 121, 77, 64, 50 % Reduces/enlarges copies at different ratios horizontally and vertically. From 25% to 400% From 0.1 to 50.0 Available. Available, up to 10 jobs. Available. Available. Available (with optional finisher) Available the following copy image editing. Binding margin: 0 mm to 30 mm (0 to 1.0) Default: 0 mm (0) Erasing center: 1 mm to 50 mm (0.1 to 2.0) Default: 1 mm (0.1) Erasing boarder: 4 mm to 50 mm (0.2 to 2.0) Default: 4 mm (0.2) TopUp copy Card copy Series copy Combine: 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1 Repeat: 2, 4, 8 repeats Separate line (for Combine and Repeat): 0.1 mm to 0.9 mm (0.01 to 0.05) Default: 0.3 mm (0.01) Positive/negative copy Last Job copy Last Job Hold Time: 0 min. to 600 min. Duplex copy: 2-sided ! 1-sided, 1-sided ! 2-sided**, 2-sided ! 2-sided**, Book (Facing)**, Book (Front/Back)** Booklet copy**
*: Enlargement is available only with FBS. **: Available with optional duplex unit.
1.8.5 Copy
Item FCOT (First Copy Out Time) Multiple copies Copy reduction and enlargement* rate Directional magnification
Copy protect Copy reservation Interrupt copy Rotate copy Shift sorting Editing the copy image
1.8.6 Other features

Item Voice guidance Sound operation Operation protect Second telephone jack Daylight saving Image compression mode Separator page Energy saving Department code Specifications / Comments Available. Available. Not Available. Available. Available. Available. Available. Low power mode: 1-100 min. Sleep mode: 30-120 min. For managing fax transaction and copy charge by department. Hold up to 100 department codes.
1-13
General Description
Muratec MFX-2830 Description Prints phone numbers stored in speed dial locations. Prints numbers stored in programmable one-touch keys. Prints groups stored in the autodialer. Prints current machine settings as programmed by the user. Prints the delayed commands. Transmit Confirmation Report (TCR) or Receive Confirmation Report (RCR); User selectable on/off. Prints a cumulative total of the last about 100 transmissions and/or receptions; user selectable as manual or automatic. Transmit cover page showing date, receivers and senders names, and a 40-character user-programmable message. Batch transmission boxes stored remote fax number and transmit starting time. Prints the files number list of documents stored in the batch transmission box. Prints the total communication time and quantity of pages printed for each department code. List of F-code boxes stored in fax machine. Prints the box and files number list of documents stored in the F-code box. Notifies of F-code box receptions. List of the blocked number. Prints a program mode list showing user programming tree. Prints if any documents in memory were erased due to power failure. Prints if communication error occurs; accompanied by audible alarm. Prints current machine settings as programmed by user. Prints current fax settings as programmed by user. Prints current copy settings as programmed by user. Prints a list of Macro titles. Prints the Fax Forward patterns. List of documents stored in memory. It tells how much memory each document is using.
1.8.7 Reports
Report Speed dial list Programmable one-touch list Group number list User settings list Command list Confirmation report Activity journal Cover page Batch transmission box list Batch transmission file list Department time list F-code box list F-code box file list F-code reception message Blocked numbers list Function list Power failure report Check message Machine setting list Fax setting list Copy setting list Macros list Fax Forward list Stored document list
1.9 Supply Yields

Item Toner bottle Drum cartridge Pick up roller Document separator roller Paper pick up roller Fuser unit Ozone filter Exposure lamp Specifications / Comments 14,000 pages (All yields based on letter-sized sheets, 6 % document coverage and three-page interval printing.) 84,000 pages(All yields based on letter-sized sheets, three-page interval printing.) 80,000 pages 50,000 pages 300,000 pages 450,000 pages 150,000 pages 1,000 hours (continuous lighting)
1-14
Muratec MFX-2830
General Description
1.10 Option
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Item Paper feed unit Large capacity cassette Cabinet Handset 2-Bin tray Duplex unit Switchback unit Printer controller Network printer Kit Information server kit Second phone line kit Memory Staple finisher Punch kit Specifications / Comments 500 sheets 2 or 500 sheets 1 2,500 sheets 1 Yes MK-100 simple type (without numeric keypad) Yes Yes Yes Yes (OP-500) Yes (NP-500) Yes (OB-500) Yes (AL-500) 32 MB (See the table on page 1-7.) Yes Yes
5 6
13, 14 3
1-15
Section2 Machine Composition

2.1 Interconnect Block Diagram
Main-Scanner-CCD
P1A
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 69 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 80 80 81 81 82 82 83 83 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 88 88 89 89 90 90 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 99 99 100 100
D0 SG D1 SG D2 SG D3 SG D4 SG D5 SG D6 SG D7 SG D8 SG D9 SG D10 SG D11 SG D12 SG D13 SG D14 SG D15 SG SSD0_1 SG SEN_1 SG SCLK_1 SG STRG_1 SG SSD0_2 SG SEN_2 SG SCLK_2 SG STRG_2 SG A0 +12V A1 +12V A2 +3V A3 +3V A4 +3V A5 +3V /IOR +5V /IOW +5V /CS9801 +5V /CSPORT +5V INT9801 +5V /RES +5V SG SG SG SG NC NC NC NC
P10A
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 69 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 80 80 81 81 82 82 83 83 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 88 88 89 89 90 90 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 99 99 100 100
P11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
+5V +5V CLP SG CLK1 SG CLK2 SG SH SG RS SG SG SG EVENIN SG ODDIN SG +12V +12V
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PCB CCD D9109320-50A
P13
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
A +24V /A B +24V /B
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
FBS MOTOR
P14
1 2 3 1 2 3
+24V LAMP GND
CN1
1 2 3 1 2 3
CN2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
LAMP INVERTER
LAMP
PCB SCANNER
P15
1 2 3 1 2 3
/HS SG LHS
PCB MAIN
1 2 3
1 2 3
HS
P17
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
/MB0 /MB1 /MB2 +5V SG
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
BSS
P18
1 2 1 2
+24V PG
HEATER
P1B
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
+24V PG PG +24V
P10B
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
2-1
Scanner-ADF
P12A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ADFRTN MOTICC M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 MTCLK CWB MTRST ADFEN /DIL /DS2 /DS1 /BIS /DA3 /DB4 /DA4 /DADFREG /DADFA3 /DS3 /DSS /DRS /APS CLUTCH1 CLUTCH2 CLUTCH3 STAMP BSSEN2 DRIV0 SENSEL N.C.
P120A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
P121
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
A +24V /A B +24V /B
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
ADF MOTOR
P129
1 2 1 2
+24V CLUTCH1
1 2
1 2
+24V CLUTCH1
1 2
1 2
CLUTCH 1 (2.5K) CLUTCH 2 (2.5K) CLUTCH 3 (2.5K) CLUTCH 4

/DB4 /DA4 /DA3 /DS1 SG /DRS SG /DSS +5V
3 4
3 4
+24V CLUTCH2
1 2
1 2
+24V CLUTCH2
1 2
1 2
5 6
5 6
+24V CLUTCH3
1 2
1 2
+24V CLUTCH3
1 2
1 2
7 8
7 8
+24V CLUTCH4
1 2
1 2
+24V CLUTCH4
1 2
1 2
(5K)
P1220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P122
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+5V +5V SG SG VCS VCS SG SG +3V +3V SG VLED SG PG PG PG PG PG +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V N.C.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
P125
1 2 1 2
+24 /STAMP
1 2
1 2
STAMPER
DS1
1 2 3
1 2 3
/DS1 SG LDS1
P126
1 2 3 1 2 3
/DS3 SG LDS3
10 11 12
10 11 12
1 2 3
1 2 3
DS3 ASSY TXIL BIS
DRS
P128
1 2 3 1 2 3
/DIL SG LDIL
1 2 3
1 2 3
/DRS SG LDRS
13 14 15
13 14 15
1 2 3
1 2 3
P127
1 2 3 1 2 3
/BIS SG LBIS
DSS
1 2 3
1 2 3
LDSS /DSS SG
16 17 18
16 17 18
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6
/APS SG LAPS
1 2 3
1 2 3
APS HPR SENSOR HPR SENSOR HPR SENSOR2 HPR SENSOR2
P124
1 2 3 1 2 3
/DADFA3 SG LDADFA3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P12C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SD0 SD1 /LST SD2 CISLD SD3 CISDATA SD4 CISCLK SD5 LGATE SD6 SCN SD7 N.C. CIS21M
P120C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4 5 6
4 5 6
/DADFREG SG LDADFREG
1 2 3
1 2 3
7 8 9
7 8 9
/ODA3 SG LODA3
1 2 3
1 2 3
10 11 12
10 11 12
/ODB4 SG LODB4
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1231
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
SD7 GND SD6 GND SD5 GND SD4 GND SD3 GND SD2 GND SD1 GND SD0 GND /LST GND CIS21M GND CISLD GND CISDATA GND CISCLK GND LGATE GND SCN GND VAS GND VCS GND VLED
P130
1 2 3 1 2 3
/DS2 SG LDS2
1 2 3
1 2 3
DS2
P1230
VCS VCS +5V(VAS) VLED +5V(VAS) SG SG SG SG SG SCN CIS21M LGATE SG CISCLK SD7 CISDATA SD6 CISLD SD5 /LST SD4 SD0 SD3 SD1 SD2
P123
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
PCB CONN CIS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
PCB ASSY DSS
P12B
P120B
PCB CONNECT ADF
PCB SCANNER
CIS
2-2
Main-Panel
P151
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
R2 L3 L2 C3 R1 R3 L1 VEE R0 LCDON L0 YU V0 YD S.G. XR +5V XL
P1510
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
P15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
+3V +3V +5V +5V +5VA +12V -12V LD7 LD6 LD5 LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1 LD0 /PIOR /PIOW /CSKEY LA3 LA2 LA1 LCDON PSLED PSKEY /LCDBL PRXD PTXD /RESET SP1 SP2 S.G. S.G. S.G. S.G.
P150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
P1511
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
XR YD XL YU
PANEL2
1 2 3 4
TOUCH PANEL
P152
1 2 1 2
SP1 SP2
SPEAKER
P154
1 1 2
HOT COLD
PCB MAIN
P16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLM CL1 CL2 DON LCD0 LCD1 LCD2 LCD3 SG SG
PCB PANEL
P160
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P161
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FRAME NC LOAD CP DISP D0 D1 D2 D3 VDD (+5V) VSS (SG) VEE (+30V) V0 FG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
LCD MODULE
2-3
Main-NCU/USB/Printer
P3A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
/RESET GND /VSYNC GND /CTBSY GND /HSYNC GND STS GND CMD GND SRCLK GND /PRINT GND /EPRDY GND /PRRDY GND /ETBSY +3V VSREQ +3V /CPRDY /PWRREM /PWRDWN /HTTABLE BW_DETECT /VIA N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
+24VN DP +24VN CML GND L GND H +5VN S +5VN RI RXA CONT24 +12V /OH1 TXA /OH2 GND /CI1 GND /CI2 TONE /DSE1 -12V /DSE2
P50A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
LINE PCB NCU TEL
PRT MECHA CON 511F
PCB MAIN
EXTEL
P9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
+3V +3V GND GND /SUBRESET TXDO SCKO /ST NAR N.C. VOICE N.C. N.C. N.C. +24V +24V CLIGHT CLIGHT VBUS USB_P USB_N GND GND GND GND /RESET TDD /TRST TMS TDI TCK AUDSYNC AUDCK AUDATA3 AUDATA2 AUDATA1 AUDATA0 /ASEMBREAK GND GND
P3A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
P3D
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C. N.C. GND GND VIDEON VIDEOP
PCB USB
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
1 2
CAUTION LIGHT
P3B
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
P.G. +24V +3.3V D.G. +5V S.G.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAIN P/S
P3C
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
+12V -12V GND +5VA /PCON +5V
CN2
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2
PCB PSUALL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2
1 2
2-4
Main-DP/RADF
P4A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
-12V GND A11 A10 A9 A8 GND A7 A6 A5 A4 GND A3 A2 A1 A0 +5V +5V /MWR /MRD IRQ BUSY /BCL /CSDPRAM GND GND N.C. GND N.C. GND N.C. N.C. /SLRES -12V +12V +24V +24V MRES +5V +5V +12V D15 D14 D13 D12 GND D11 D10 D9 D8 GND D7 D6 D5 D4 GND D3 D2 D1 D0
P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 /IOR /IOW /CS65R /INT65R /RESET DREQ0 DREQ1 /DACK0 /DACK1 CK16M BUSY02R /CS9802R N.C. N.C. CK0002 /INT9802R RADFSCLK /RADFSTRG /SENRADF RADFSD0 PCLK /PTRG /PEN PSD +3V +3V +3V GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
Pxx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
DP RAM I/F
P4B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 /CSEXROM /EXROM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PCB MAIN
2-5
RADF CODEC
Main-ExtentionMemory/EFI
P6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
VSS A3 A4 A2 A5 A1 A6 A0 A7 VDD PD1 VSS VDD VSS A8 A10 A9 BS1 A11 BS0 A12 VDD VSS /CS0 CKE /CS1 /CS2 /CS3 /RAS VDD VSS /CAS VSS VSS CLK VSS VSS /WE N.C. VDD VDD VDD VDD DQML DQMU DQ7 DQ8 DQ6 DQ9 DQ5 DQ10 DQ4 DQ11 DQ3 DQ12 DQ2 DQ13 VSS VDD VSS VDD DQ1 DQ14 DQ0 DQ15 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 VSS
P8A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
D15 D13 D14 GND D12 D10 D11 GND D9 D7 D8 GND D6 D4 D5 GND D3 D1 D2 GND +3.3V +3.3V D0 A6 +3.3V A4 A5 GND A3 A1 A2 PSAVE RD_EFI WR_EFI CS_EFI GND +5V +5V BSY_EFI N.C +5V REQD_EFI REQU_EFI GND ACKU_EFI INT_EFI ACKD_EFI GND RST_EFI N.C
PCB NCU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
PCB EX MEMORY
PCB MAIN
P7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
D15 D14 D12 D11 D9 D8 D6 D5 D3 D2 D0 A5 A3 A2 +5V +5V WR CS_PRT CS_MOM REC_CT +3.3V +3.3V ACK_CR INT_CI INT_MOM REQ_MT BUSY +12V -12V +24V GND D13 GND D10 GND D7 GND D4 GND D1 GND A4 GND A1 GND RD CS_HDD CS_CDC RST REC_CA GND ACK_CT GND INT_CDC GND REQ_RT GND RXSIG GND N.C
OPTION
P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
2-6
PCB EX MODEM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
+24VN DP +24VN CML GND L GND H +5VN S +5VN RI RXA CONT24 +12V /OH1 TXA /OH2 GND /CI1 GND /CI2 TONE /DSE1 -12V /DSE2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
LINE
EX TEL
2.2 Interconnect Block Diagram (Printer)

Block diagram (Printer_1of2)
2-7
Block diagram (Printer_2of2)
2-8
2.3 Scanning Section

2.3.1 ADF section
When a document is placed into the document feeder, Document Sensor 1 (DS1) is activated and you will hear the short beep. The width of document is detected by ODB4, ODA3, DB4 and DA3 sensors and length of document is detected by DADFA3 and DADFLEG sensors. The document will be transferred when either the start or copy key is pressed. Document separation is the process that allows a multi-page document to go through the scanner one page at a time. Separation occurs through the action of the separator roller and separator pad. As shows in the illustrations, documents in the feeder are pressed against the separator roller. The bottom document is separated from the remaining documents by the friction of the separator pad. Following document separation, the feed roller causes the document to advance. As it advances, the leading edge of the document activates the Document Sensor 2 (DS2) sensor. Once DS2 is activated, the feed roller continues to rotate until the document reaches the scan wait position. The machine uses the distance from DS2 to the scan wait position and the diameter of the feed roller to determine the number of rotations necessary to feed the document to the scan wait position. When the document reaches the scan wait position, the light from the scanner lamp strikes the face of the document and is reflected into the lens through mirrors A, B, and C. In case the light intensity along the length of the scanner lamp is not uniform, shading compensation is provided to ensure even illumination. As the reflected image passes through the lens, it is focused onto the charged coupled device (CCD). The CCD then converts the dark and light areas of the image into electrical impulses, or image data. When there are following pages, DSS detects the end of the former page and the next page will be transferred. When DS2 detects the trailing edge of the document, the image signal output is turned off. The scanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds in case there is another document to follow. The scanned document is discharged through the document exit by the exit roller. When scanning the back side of the document, the leading edge of the document will be detected by the Document Sensor DSS. It will be scanned by CIS at the scan wait position. When DSS detects the trailing edge of the document, the scanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds, and turn off.
Separator Roller DIL Regist Roller Feed Roller A DRS DSS Pick-up Roller DADF3 DADFLEG
DS2 DS1 DSS
ODB4/ODA3
Feed Roller B Separator pad CIS Roller Feed Roller C DS3 Exit Roller
Scanning position (Front side)
Scanning position (Front side)
2-9
2.3.1.1 Original Detection

Detection Document presence Action Sensor Detects whether there is a document on DS1
the try or not

Leading and trailing edge detection First time size detection Length Width Detects the leading and trailing edge of the feeding document DS2, DS3(Back side) DSS DRS DADF3/DADFLEG ODB4/OSA3
Detects the length of the document on the try Detects width of the document on the try
BIS
DADFLEG
DIL DS1 DSS DRS DS3
DADF3
ODB4 ODA3 DS2
2-10
2.3.2 FBS section

Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image on the CCD Sensor as the Scanner is moved by the Scanner Motor. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical image signal. The electrical image signal is then output to the Main Board.
3 4 2 1 5
9 7 8
1. Exposure Lamp 3. FBS Motor 5. CCD Board (CCD) and Lens 7. Mirror A 9. Mirror B and C
2. Original length detecting sensor (Multi Beam sensor) 4. Inverter Board 6. Mirrors Carriage A 8. Scanner Home Position Sensor
2-11
2.3.1.1 Exposure Section: Construction and Function
1 Reflector Tape When a book or other bound original is copied, the paper in the area near the binding generally fails to come flush against the glass, so that the copy of these areas is generally too dark. The Reflector Tape reduces this problem by reflecting light from the Exposure Lamp onto these areas of the original. 2 Exposure Lamp A fluorescent lamp is used to illuminate the original. 3 Mirror A Directs the reflected light from the original to the Mirror B.
2.3.1.2 Original Size Detection

When the machine is in Auto Paper or Auto Size, the original length detecting sensor mounted in the FBS section receive light reflected off the original to allow the machine to determine the original length size. And the CCD detects original width by reflecting light from the Exposure Lamp. <Original Size Identification: Inch Areas> Multi Beam Sensor (Detect length of original) Original Size Control Signal MB2 MB1 MB0 Letter Letter Legal Half Letter Half Letter 1117 : Crosswise
CCD (Detect width of original)
: Detected by multi beam sensor or CCD, : Not used;
2-12
2.3.1.3 Original Size Detection Timing

The copier CPU affirms and resets the readings of the original size at the following timings. Takes size readings: When the BIS sensor is deactivated. Affirms size readings: When the Start key is pressed with the BIS sensor activated or the APS sensor deactuated. Resets size readings: When the APS sensor is deactuated.
BIS sensor
APS sensor
2.3.1.4 Mirror Carriage A and Mirror Carriage B Moving Mechanism

<Mirror Carriage A> During a scan, the Mirror Carriage A projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto the entire surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the Mirror A of the Mirror Carriage A and then to the Mirror B and Mirror C of the Mirrors Carriage B. The Mirror Carriage A is driven by the FBS Motor and front and rear Scanner Drive belts. Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode. The Mirror Carriage A is at home position when Scanner Home Position Sensor is blocked. This position serves as the reference for the scan motion. <Mirrors Carriage B> The Mirror B and Mirror C are mounted to their holder at right angles to each other. They direct the light reflected off the Mirror A through the lens to the CCD. The Mirror Carriage B is also moved by the Scanner Drive belts and pulleys driven by the FBS Motor. It travels at a speed half that of the Mirror Carriage A, thereby keeping constant the optical path length between the Original Glass and lens.
Mirror carriage B
Mirror B and C Mirror A
Mirror carriage A
Mirror carriage A Home Position Sensor
2-13
2.4 Recording Section

2.4.1 Image Processing
14. Paper Exit 3. Photoelectric Conversion Section 11. Cleaning 12. Erase 2. Drum Charging 10. Paper Separation 4. MFB2 Board 5. Laser Exposure 1. PC Drum 9. Image Transfer 8. Manual Bypass 7. Paper Feed 13. Fusing
6. Development
1 PC Drum Changes the image of the original projected onto the surface of the drum to a corresponding electrostatic latent image. 2. Drum Charging Generates a negative DC charged layer on the surface of the PC Drum. 3. Photoelectric Conversion Section The CCD converts the light reflected off the original to a corresponding electrical signal and outputs it to the IR image processing section. 4. MFB2 Board Converts the electrical signal to a corresponding 8-bit digital image signal, makes various corrections, and outputs the results to the memory. Compresses and stores in memory the digital image signal, and then outputs it to the PH image processing section. After going through necessary corrections, the digital image signal is converted to a corresponding analog signal, based on which the intensity of the laser light is controlled. 5. Laser Exposure A laser beam strikes the surface of the PC Drum, creating an electrostatic latent image. 6. Development Negatively charged toner adheres to the latent image on the PC Drum surface, creating a visible image. AC/DC negative bias voltages are applied to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the background. Toner scraped off by the cleaning mechanism is recycled. 7. Paper Feed Feeds sheets of paper from the appropriate paper source. 8. Manual Bypass Feeds sheets of paper from the Manual Bypass Tray. 9. Image Transfer A positive charge is applied to the Image Transfer Roller to transfer the visible image on the surface of the PC Drum onto the paper.
2-14
10. Paper Separation The PC Drum Separator Fingers remove paper from the surface of the PC Drum. 11. Cleaning Residual toner is scraped off the surface of the PC Drum. The toner is then recycled back to the Developing Unit. 12. Erase The PC Drum is exposed to light, which effectively neutralize any residual charge on the surface of the PC Drum. 13. Fusing Heat and pressure applied by the Right and Left Fusing Rollers fuse toner on the paper. 14. Paper Exit Feeds paper out of the copier onto the Exit Tray.
2-15
2.4.2 Operating Sequence

Sequence of the Recording section
Power On (or Sleep canceled)
Main Motor Heater 1st Drawer Paper Take-up Clutch Polygon Motor Synchronizing Roller Sensor Synchronizing Roller Clutch Exit Sensor IU Motor Exposure Drum Charge Bias Image transfer Bias Developing Bias
Warm - Up Completed *1
Start Key On *3
Print Cycle Completed
*2
*2
Predrive*4
*1: Warm-up temperature control, *2: Standby temperature control, *3: Print cycle temperature control *4: Agitation pre-drive is not carried out when Sleep mode is canceled. Sequence of the Fans
Power On (or Sleep canceled) Full Speed(4S) Power Unit Cooling Fan Cooling Fan Full Speed IU Cooling Fan Fusing Fan Main Motor Stop Full Speed Stop Full Speed *1 Full Speed Half Speed Half Speed Warm - Up Completed Start Key On Full Speed Full Speed Print Cycle Completed Half Speed Full Speed
*1 : The full-speed rotation time of the fusing fan after the Main Motor has been deenergized is 20 s.
2-16
2.4.3 PH Section
Image data sent from the memory section is corrected and, based on the corrected data, a laser light is projected onto the surface of the PC Drum to form a corresponding latent image.
6 1
2 3 4 5
1. Polygon Motor 2. Cylindrical Lens 3. Collimator Lens 4 . Laser Diode Board (PWB-B) 5. SOS Sensor 6. f- Lens he PH Unit is located under the paper exit tray. The Polygon motor revs up depending on the resolutions. To shorten the First copy out time, the motor starts before the print direction. It starts when the document is set or when a key is pressed. When there is no print direction, it stops after a while.
2-17
The signal output from the Master Board triggers the firing of the laser. The laser beam travels to the Polygon Mirror, lens, and SOS Mirror to eventually hit the SOS Sensor, which generates an SOS signal. The SOS signal determines the laser emission timing for each line in the main scanning direction.
The shutter between the PH and Drum closes automatically when the Drum is removed.
Shutter
Drum
2-18
2.4.4 Imaging unit (IU)
The IU contains a PC Drum, Developing Unit, PC Drum Charge Corona, and a Cleaning Unit as one unit. 1 2 3 4 5
6
14 7
13
12
11
10
1. Spent Toner Recycling Coil 3. Spent Toner Feed Roller 2 5. Spent Toner Feed Roller 1 7. PC Drum Protective Shutter 9. Sleeve/Magnet Roller 11. ATDC Sensor (E1) 13. 3rd Toner Conveying Roller
2. PC Drum Charge Corona 4. Cleaning Blade 6. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger 8. PC Drum 10. 1st Toner Conveying Roller 12. 2nd Toner Conveying Roller 14. Spent Toner Recycling Duct 2-19
2.4.4.1 Drum Charging

The PC Drum Charge Corona has a grid mesh to deposit a charge evenly across the surface of the PC Drum. The corona unit has a comb electrode that discharges only toward the grid mesh, thus minimizing the amount of ozone produced.
PC Drum Charge Corona PC Drum
Comb Electrode
Grid Mesh
2-20
2.4.4.2 PC Drum Cleaning

While the IU Motor is turning, the ATDC Sensor samples T/C, and according to the readings, the Toner replenished time will be decided.
Cleaning Blade Charge Neutralzing Sheet
Erase Lamp
PC Drum
This machine employs a spent toner recycling mechanism. The Cleaning Blade which is held pressed against the surface of the PC Drum scrapes residual toner off the surface. The waste toner is conveyed by Spent Toner Feed Roller to the Spent Toner Recycling Duct and eventually back to the Developer Mixing Chamber. Any potential remaining on the surface of the PC Drum is neutralized by both light from the Erase Lamp and a DC negative voltage applied by the Charge Neutralizing Sheet.
2-21
2.4.5 Toner Unit

2.4.5.1 Toner drive mechanism
The IU motor provides the drive for replenishing toner from the Toner Bottle to the Sub Hopper and to the Developing Unit.. There is no motor provided for the exclusive use of the Toner Bottle. The transfer is controlled by the main hopper toner solenoid and sub hopper toner solenoid. The Toner bottle home position is also controlled by the main hopper toner solenoid, and by a ratchet.
Drive to the Toner Bottle Main Hopper Toner Solenoid
Drive from the IU Motor Drive to the Sub Hopper Sub Hopper Toner Solenoid
2.4.5.2 Toner Replenishing Mechanism

Toner Replenishing Control (from Toner Bottle to Sub Hopper)
A reed switch in the Sub Hopper is used to detect a Toner Empty Condition. When the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch is turned ON, the Sub Hopper Toner Solenoid is energized, which causes the Toner Bottle to start turning.
Toner Near Empty Detection

A toner near empty condition is detected when the Toner Bottle has turned 30 times continuously. At this time, a corresponding message is displayed on the Control Panel, but a new copy cycle can still be initiated.
2-22
Sub Hopper
Magnet
Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch
Toner Replenishing Control

Toner/Carrier (T/C) ratio of the toner in the Developing Unit is detected based on the output produced by the ATDC Sensor. The standard T/C ratio is 14.5% and toner replenishing sequence as shown in the below table is carried out according to the detected T/C ratio. When the T/C ratio becomes 10% or less, the copier will enter the T/C recovery mode. If the T/C of 19% or higher, or 7% or less is detected, a ATDC Sensor failure occurs and a malfunction code is displayed. When the copier enters the T/C recovery mode, the IU Motor is energized to carry out the toner replenishing sequence for a maximum 150 sec. If the T/C ratio is not recovered to 14% or higher even when the I/U Motor has been energized for 150 sec., a toner empty condition results and the initiation of a new copy cycle is inhibited. When the T/C ratio has been recovered to 14%, toner in the Developing Unit is agitated for 60 sec. and it then becomes possible to start a new copy cycle. T/C 19% or higher 14% - 19 13% - 14 12% - 13% 10% - 12% 7% - 10% 7% or less Drive IU Motor Is T/C 14% or higher? No 150 sec. elapsed? No Yes Yes Replenishing time/cycle ATDC Sensor failure Not Replenished 249ms/996ms(25%) 498ms/996ms(50%) Fully Replenished(100%) To T/C Recovery Mode ATDC Sensor failure Agitate for 60 sec. Copying
Toner Empty
Copying Inhibited
2-23
2.4.5.3 Hopper
The Hopper is driven by the IU Motor. There is a shutter provided in the rear of the Hopper Unit. When the Hopper Unit is slid into the copier, the shutter opens, allowing toner to be replenished. When the Hopper Unit is slide out
Shutter Closed
When the Hopper Unit is slide in
(Shutter Open) Tonner folls
2-24
2.4.6 Image Transfer Section

A charge is applied to the Image Transfer Roller to transfer the toner image formed on the surface of the PC Drum onto the paper. The image transfer current is controlled according to the size and type of paper, B/W ratio of the original, and whether the copy cycle is 1-sided or 2-sided.The surface of the Image Transfer Roller is cleaned by applying the same negative polarity as the toner. When servicing, the Image Transfer Roller Unit is replaced as a single unit. The Synchronizing Roller is driven by the Synchronizing Roller Clutch, which functions to synchronize the timing of the image on the PC Drum with that of the paper.
Synchronizing Roller Clutch Synchronizing Roller Image Tranfer Roller
2-25
2.4.7 Fusing Section
The Fusing Unit of this machine has two heater lamps for a shorter warm-up time and greater energy savings. There is an intermediate roller installed that functions to tame the curl in the paper. The intermediate roller has an open/close mechanism for the ease of clearing misfeeds.
Fusing Fan
Exit Roller Intermediate Roller
Heater Lamps
Heating Roller
Pressure Roller
The Intermediate Roller echanisim can be opened.
2-26
2.4.7.1 Fusing Heater Lamp

The Main Heater Lamp has a greater heat distribution at its center with lower heat distribution on both ends. The Sub Heater Lamp has a greater heat distribution on both ends with a lower heat output at the center. The Main Heater Lamp is controlled by the Main Thermistor located at the center, while the Sub Heater Lamp is controlled by the Sub Thermistor in the rear. When the thermistors detect an abnormally high temperature, the corresponding relay is turned OFF to shut down energization. If it becomes impossible to control energization of the heater due to an unexpected trouble, the thermostat cuts off current as necessary. Thermsotat Main Thermistor Sub Thermistor Main Heater
Front
Sub Heater
Heater Heat Distribution
Mai Heater
Sub Heater
Both the Main and Sub Heaters turn ON after the Power Switch has been turned ON. Warm-up cycle is completed when both the Main and Sub Thermistors detect 170C. The control temperature during paper feeding can be changed using the Machine Parameter. Mode 1 (5 min.)
Mode 2 (1 min.) Mode 3
180C 170C 165
Main Sub
Warm-up completed Temperature to be reached when warm-up is completed: 170C by the temperature detected by Main and Sub Thermistors Standby temperature: 165C
2-27
The fusing temperature is controlled to maintain an appropriate temperature according to the paper medium, paper Crosswise Direction length, model, and marketing area. The control temperature setting can be varied for plain paper, thick paper, and OHP transparencies using Fusing Temperature Control of Printer which is available from the Machine Parameter.
Mode 1 Media CD length Main/Sub heater In standby 221mm or longer Plain Paper 220mm or less Thick paper, Envelopes, Postcards, Letterhead OHP Transparencies ----170C 200C 155C 180C 180C
Mode 3 Main Sub Heater 165C
2.4.7.3 Paper Transport

The Driven Intermediate Roller and the Driven Exit Roller are made of silicone sponge, which effectively tames any curl in the paper. The Intermediate Roller pulls the paper that extends from the Fusing Roller, thereby preventing any waviness in paper after fusing. An actuator and a exit sensor work together to detect whether there is a sheet of paper present and also detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper.
Exit Roller Intermediate Roller Tension
Exit sensor
Paper Separator Finger
Driven Roller
Paper transport direction
Driver Roller
2-28
2.4.7.4 Fusing Fan

Removes moisture vapor produced from the paper to prevent the paper from curling.
(No Switchback Unit)
(Placed with Switchback Unit)
2-29
2.4.8 Paper Take-up Section

The main features for the paper Cassette Improved paper take-up reliability - The motor lifting mechanism helps stabilize pickup pressure. - The electromagnetic clutch adopted as the type of Paper Take-up Clutch. Improved operability: Universal Tray employed for all drawers The same paper take-up mechanism is used for the Copier Drawers, Paper Feeder Cabinet, and Large Capacity Cabinet. Manual Bypass Multi Bypass Tray: Equipped with a size detection function. Capable of holding up to 150 sheets of paper.
2.4.8.1 Drawer Paper Take-up Mechanism

1st Drawer
The Pickup Roller takes up sheets of paper and the Paper Take-up and Separator Rollers ensure that only one sheet of paper is separated and fed into the copier. When the drawer is slid in, the lever is pushed to lower the Pickup Roller. The Paper Lift-up Sensor then detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised. The Paper Empty Sensor detects when paper in the drawer runs out. The polyethylene sheet reduces resistance between a curled sheet of paper and guide, thereby preventing skewed feeding.
Paper Lift-up Sensor Pickup Roller Lever Feed Roller Polyethylene sheet
Separator Roller Paper Empty Sensor
2-30
2nd Drawer
The 1st drawer and 2nd drawer have the same basic mechanical construction. The 2nd drawer is provided also with the Transport Roller and Transport Roller Clutch.
Transport Roller Clutch Transport Roller
2.4.8.2 Drawer Paper Lifting Motion

When the drawer is slid into the copier and the Set Sensor is activated, the Lift-up Motor starts rotating to raise the Paper Lifting Plate. The paper stack of the drawer pushes up the Pickup Roller. When the upper limit position is detected through the action of the actuator, it stops raising the paper lifting plate. As paper is consumed during the copy cycle and the Pickup Roller is lowered, the Lift-up Motor is energized until the Paper Lift-up Sensor is blocked again.
Paper Lift-up Sensor
1. When the drawer is slid in, the paper lifting plate goes up and the top surface of the paper tack pushes up the roller.
2. The lifting motion stops as soon as the sensor detects the upper limit position.
3. During a Copy Cycle, the sensor is unlocked as the paper is consumed.
4. The paper lifting plate goes up.
2-31
2.4.8.3 Drawer Paper Size Detection

When the Trailing Edge Stop of the drawer is moved, the circular plate located on the bottom of the drawer turns, allowing the four sensors to detect the paper length. Moving the Edge Guide activates or deactivates the two CD Paper Size Detecting Sensors through the cutout in the lever. The combination of the four FD Paper Size Detecting Sensors and two CD Paper Size Detecting Sensors that are either activated or deactivated determines the size of the paper loaded in the drawer. The Set Sensor detects that the drawer is slid into position as it is slid in. Length Detection
Width Detection
Set Sensor
Lift-up Motor
CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor
2.4.8.4 Multi Bypass Tray Mechanism

When there is a print request, the cams at the front and rear turn to raise the paper lifting plate. The upward motion of the paper lifting plate presses the paper stack on the tray up against the Paper Take-up Roller. The Separator Roller ensures that only one sheet of paper is taken up and fed into the copier. Drive for the Paper Take-up Roller comes from the copier side and the roller is driven through controlling the Manual Feed Paper Take-up Clutch. The Paper Empty Sensor determines whether or not there is paper on the tray.
2-32
2.4.8.5 Bypass Tray Paper Lifting Motion

Drive of the cam is controlled by the spring clutch and flapper solenoid. When the solenoid is energized once, the paper lifting plate moves to its raised position. When the solenoid is energized a second time, the paper lifting plate moves to its lowered position. The cam position is detected by the Manual Feed Tray Lift-up Sensor.
2.4.8.6 Bypass Tray Paper Size Detection

The size of the paper loaded in the Multi Bypass Tray is determined with the four Manual Feed Tray FD Paper Size Detecting Sensors and the CD Paper size detecting Variable Resistor (VR). Moving the Edge Guide varies the resistance value of the VR. Whenever the Multi Bypass Tray or the CD Paper size detecting VR has been replaced with a new one, it is necessary to run Bypass tray width adjustment available from Field Service Program Modes (Press Setting, *, 4, 9), and set the VR calibration again. Manual Feed Tray FD Paper Size Detecting Sensors
CD Paper Size Detecting VR
2-33
2.4.9 OTHER UNITS AND MECHANISMS

2.4.9.1 Cooling Fan
Four different fan motors are installed inside the copier: IU Cooling Fan, Cooling Fan, Power Unit Cooling Fan, and Fusing Cooling Fan Motors. The Cooling Fan delivers air in towards the back of the copier and it does not discharge air to the right. A fan for the ozone filter, available in the conventional copiers, is no longer used.
Fuing Cooling Fan Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor Ozone Filter Fusing
Cooling Fan
IU
IU Power Supply Outside air IU Cooling Fan Power Supply
<Front View>
<Top View>
2-34
Section3 Software adjustment

3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description. Set or Clear Machine Parameters................................................................................... Setting, *, 0, 0 Used to set or clear machine parameters. Set or Clear Memory Switches ....................................................................................... Setting, *, 0, 1 Used to set or clear memory switches. Clear Programmed Data / User Settings........................................................................ Setting, *, 0, 2 Erases user-programmed information (date, time, TTI, autodialer, etc.) and any documents stored in memory. All RAM Clear ................................................................................................................... Setting, *, 0, 3 Erases same information as Clear Programmed Data / User Settings function along with resetting all of the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults. Set or Clear Unique Switches ......................................................................................... Setting, *, 0, 4 Used to set or clear Unique switches. Total line monitor ............................................................................................................. Setting, *, 0, 8 Allows fax communication to be heard through the monitor speaker. Test Modes ....................................................................................................................... Setting, *, 0, 9 Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests. Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switches and Unique Switches List ....................................................................................................... Setting, *, 1, 0 Prints a list of the machine switch settings showing the default settings and current settings. Factory Functions ............................................................................................................ Setting, *, 1, 1 Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests. Telephone Circuit Test Modes........................................................................................ Setting, *, 1, 2 Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests. Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ....................................................................................... Setting, *, 1, 4 Perform it before installing the machine. Set, clear or print the consumable order sheet ............................................................ Setting, *, 1, 5 Used to set and print the consumable order sheet. DRAM Clear ...................................................................................................................... Setting, *, 1, 6 Used to clear a DRAM. Clear Life Monitor............................................................................................................. Setting, *, 1, 7 Used to clear a Life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, etc. Set Service Code...............................................................................................................Setting, *, 1, 9 Used to protect to clear a Life monitor. Life Monitor Maintenance................................................................................................ Setting, *, 2, 0 When the main control PCB has been replaced, you should register the previous several counter values of the life monitor. Internet Fax mode ............................................................................................................ Setting, *, 2, 4 For optional OB-500(Internet FAX kit) Set second line................................................................................................................. Setting, *, 2, 8 Used to set memory switches, unique switches, .ECM mode, pose length and number of rings for the second line. Flash ROM Sum check .................................................................................................... Setting, *, 2, 9 Used to confirm flash ROM Check Sum after the software is overwritten.
3-1
Set Service Report ............................................................................................................Setting, *, 4, 2 Used to set service report. Printer registration adjustment .......................................................................................Setting, *, 4, 3 Used to adjust the printer registration. Reset Printer trouble.........................................................................................................Setting, *, 4, 5 Used to reset the printer trouble indication. Cleaning mode ..................................................................................................................Setting, *, 4, 6 Used to clean the feed roller and registration roller. Voice guidance test ..........................................................................................................Setting, *, 4, 7 Used to test voice guidance Bypass tray width adjustment .........................................................................................Setting, *, 4, 9 Used to adjust the width sensor of the bypass tray after reassembling. Key counter mode.............................................................................................................Setting, *, 5, 0 If you have attached the key counter activate this mode to let it count the printed paper. Quick Installation setting mode.......................................................................................Setting, *, 9, 9 You can set the Initial setting, Consumable order setting and Service report setting continually.
3-2
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment

3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost. 1. From standby, press Setting, *, 0, 0.
2. Select [Edit]. 3. Call up the desired parameter by cursor key or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired parameter by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). or of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press or , to change the bit value. Press 0 or 1 on the numeric keypad, or Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the parameter .edit screen. Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter. 6. If you want to set other parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press Reset to return the machine to standby.
3-3
3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters

Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults. 1. From standby, press Setting, *, 0, 0.
2. Press [Parameter Clear].
3 Select [Yes] to reset the machine parameters to factory defaults. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the parameters, press [No]. 4. Press Reset to return the machine to standby.
3-4
8 8M 4 B 3M
Machine Parameter 000 006 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 007
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust DRAM capacity indication (Spare) Usage/Comments
DRAM capacity indication (Slot 1) P5A DRAM capacity indication on the Main PCB
This switch indicates the DRAM capacity. (This switch is read only, do not set any character.) You can see the memory capacity by how many 1 is indicated on the LCD. One 1 means 16MB. For example, if three 1 are indicated, i.e. 00000111, the DRAM capacity is 16MB 3 = 48MB.
Machine Parameter 008 009 --- Factory use only
3-5
Machine Parameter 010

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust DADF (front side) scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. 1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 25 steps 00011001 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000011 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -25 steps 10011001 Settings +5.29 mm +6.77 mm +3.39 mm Initial setting +1.69 mm +0.63 mm 0 mm Standard -1.69 mm -3.39 mm -5.29 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for DADF(front side). (Horizontal) The plus setting stretch the image data and the minus setting squeeze it. Each setting changes by 0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 % +0.8 % +0.4 % +0.2 % +0.1 % 0 % Initial setting -0.1 % -0.2 % -0.4 % -0.8 % -1.5 %
3-6

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for DADF(front side). (Vertical) The plus setting squeeze the image data and the minus setting stretch it. Each setting changes by 0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 : 10000011 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 % +0.8 % +0.2 % +0.1 % 0 % Standard -0.1 % -0.3 % -0.4 % -0.8 % -1.5 %

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment DADF(front side) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)
Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative.
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10001010 means -1.69 mm.
3-7

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment of DADF(front side) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust FBS scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. 1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 25 steps 00011001 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000011 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -25 steps 10011001 Settings +5.29 mm +6.77 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.63 mm 0 mm -1.69 mm -3.39 mm -5.29 mm
3-8

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretch the image data and the minus setting squeeze it. Each setting changes by 0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 % +0.8 % +0.4 % +0.2 % +0.1 % 0 % Initial setting -0.1 % -0.2 % -0.4 % -0.8 % -1.5 %

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. (Vertical) The plus setting squeeze the image data and the minus setting stretch it. Each setting changes by 0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 % +0.8 % +0.4 % +0.2 % +0.1 % 0% -0.1 % -0.2 % -0.4 % -0.8 % -1.5 %
3-9

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (For FBS) Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 4 steps 00000100 : 2 steps 00000010 : 1 steps 00000001 00000000 -1 steps 10000001 : -2 steps 10000010 : -4 steps 10000100 : -8 steps 10001000 : -16 steps 10010000 : -31 steps 10000001 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm +0.28 mm +0.14 mm 5 mm Standard -0.14 mm -0.28 mm -0.56 mm -1.13 mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
Machine Parameter 019 --- Factory use only
3-10

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 Adjust Mirror carriage standby position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the standby position. 1 step = 0.140793616 mm Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 12 steps 00001100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +8.87 mm +8.45 mm +7.04 mm +5.63 mm +4.22 mm +2.82 mm +1.69 mm Initial setting +1.41 mm +0.42 mm +0.28 mm +0.14 mm 36 mm Standard
3-11

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Adjust Mirror carriage transfer mode position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the transfer mode position. 1 step = 0.140793616 mm Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 12 steps 00001100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +8.87 mm +8.45 mm +7.04 mm +5.63 mm +4.22 mm +2.82 mm +1.69 mm +1.41 mm +0.42 mm +0.28 mm +0.14 mm 36 mm Standard
3-12

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in normal resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in super-fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting
3-13

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in hyper-fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in hyper-fine (600dpi 600dpi)resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in Background resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting
3-14

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Scanning density level darker when Auto mode is set in copy contrast. 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
3-15
Machine Parameter 040 049 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 050 059 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 060 069 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 070
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for all document type. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for all document type. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrastec

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for Photo type scanning by fax transmission. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted
3-16

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for Photo type scanning by fax transmission Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for Background type scanning by copying. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for Background type scanning by copying. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-17

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Auto Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted
Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Auto Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted
3-18

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Photo Contrast : Auto Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Auto Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-19

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Auto Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-20

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: Doc. Type: Photo Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-21
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 110 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
-8 steps -16 steps -128 steps
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to 0 mm in Unique Switch 052. Then, after setting this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4 mm) in Unique Switch 052.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 111 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-22

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 112 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 113 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-23
Machine Parameter 104 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 105
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 115 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 117 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to 0 mm in Unique Switch 052. Then, after setting this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4 mm) in Unique Switch 052. 3-24

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Duplex unit in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 118 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-25

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 100 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 101 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-26

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 102 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 103 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-27
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the LCC in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 105 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 107 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Duplex unit in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 108 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-29

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 160. Note: See Machine Parameter 130 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 161. Note: See Machine Parameter 131 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-30

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 162. Note: See Machine Parameter 132 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 163. Note: See Machine Parameter 133 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-31

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 164. Note: See Machine Parameter 134 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 165. Note: See Machine Parameter 135 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-32

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 166. Note: See Machine Parameter 137 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Duplex unit in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 167. Note: See Machine Parameter 138 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-33

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 170. Note: See Machine Parameter 120 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 171. Note: See Machine Parameter 121 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-34

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 172. Note: See Machine Parameter 122 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 173. Note: See Machine Parameter 123 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-35
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Large Capacity Cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 175. Note: See Machine Parameter 125 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-36
Machine Parameter 136 -- Factory use only Machine Parameter 137

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 176. Note: See Machine Parameter 126 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Duplex unit in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the right and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the right margin in Machine Parameter 177. Note: See Machine Parameter 128 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-37
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 1st cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 150 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only left margin, adjust it in this switch.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 151 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-38

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 152 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 4th cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 153 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-39
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 155 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-40

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Bypass tray in normal printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 157 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Duplex unit in normal printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 158 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-41

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 1st cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: See Machine Parameter 140 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 141 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-42

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 142 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 143 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-43
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 144 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: See Machine Parameter 1475 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only left margin, adjust it in this switch. 3-44

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: See Machine Parameter 148 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-45

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 1st cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 170 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only right margin, adjust it in this switch.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 171 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-46

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 172 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 4th cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 173 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-47
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 175 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Bypass tray in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 177 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-48

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Duplex unit in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 178 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-49

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 160 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 161 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-50

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 162 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 163 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-51
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 165 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 167 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only right margin, adjust it in this switch. 3-52

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Duplex unit in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the right margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 168 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-53

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 1st cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 190 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 191 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-54

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 192 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 4th cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 193 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-55
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 195 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Bypass tray in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 197 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Duplex unit in normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 198 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-57

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 1st cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 180 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 181 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-58

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 182 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 183 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-59
Machine Parameter 194--- Factory use only Machine Parameter 195

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Large Capacity Cassette in rotate printing.. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 185 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Machine Parameter 196--- Factory use only Machine Parameter 197

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 187 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Duplex unit in rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 188 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-61

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 1st cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 240. Note: See Machine Parameter 210 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 241. Note: See Machine Parameter 211 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-62

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 242. Note: See Machine Parameter 212 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 4th cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 243. Note: See Machine Parameter 213 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-63
Machine Parameter 204 Machine --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 205
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 245. Note: See Machine Parameter 215 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Bypass tray in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 246. Note: See Machine Parameter 217 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-64

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Duplex unit in normal printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 247. Note: See Machine Parameter 218 for the rotate printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-65

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 1st cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 250. Note: See Machine Parameter 200 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 251. Note: See Machine Parameter 201 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-66

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 252. Note: See Machine Parameter 202 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 253. Note: See Machine Parameter 203 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-67
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Large Capacity Cassette in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. 16 steps The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 255. Note: See Machine Parameter 205 for the normal printing. 8 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 256. Note: See Machine Parameter 207 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-68

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Duplex unit in rotate printing. Adjusts the end point to print. The plus setting increase the print range to the bottom and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: Adjust the bottom margin in Machine Parameter 257. Note: See Machine Parameter 208 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-69

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 1st cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 230 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 231 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-70

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 232 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 4th cassette in normal printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 233 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-71
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 235 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the Bypass tray in normal printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 237 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch. 3-72

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the Duplex unit in normal printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 238 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-73

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 1st cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: See Machine Parameter 220 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 221 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-74

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 222 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 223 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-75
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 225 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: See Machine Parameter 227 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch. 3-76

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the top margin at the Duplex unit in rotate printing. The plus setting increase the top margin and the minus setting decrease it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. -8 steps Note: See Machine Parameter 228 for the normal printing. -16 steps -128 steps Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-77

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 1st cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 250 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only bottom margin, adjust it in this switch.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 2nd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 251 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-78

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 3rd cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 252 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 4th cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 253 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-79
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 255 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the Bypass tray in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 257 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only bottom margin, adjust it in this switch. 3-80

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the Duplex unit in normal printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 258 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-81

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 1st cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 240 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 2nd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 241 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-82

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 3rd cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 242 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 4th cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 243 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-83
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the Large Capacity Cassette in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 245 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the Bypass tray in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 247 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 052. If you want to adjust only bottom margin, adjust it in this switch. 3-84

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the bottom margin at the Duplex unit in rotate printing. The plus setting decrease the bottom margin and the minus setting increase it. Each setting changes by 0.1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 248 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.8 mm
3-85

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the 1st cassette. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0001000 0010001 0100010 0101010 0110010 + 0.8mm +1.7 mm +3.4 mm +4.2 mm +5.0 mm Settings no adjustment Initial
The more loop it is made, the more square the printout becomes. At the same time, thin paper is easy to jam.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the 2nd cassette. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0001000 0010001 0100010 0101010 0110010 + 0.8mm +1.7 mm +3.4 mm +4.2 mm +5.0 mm Settings no adjustment Initial
3-86

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the 3rd cassette. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0001000 0010001 0100010 0101010 0110010 + 0.8mm +1.7 mm +3.4 mm +4.2 mm +5.0 mm Settings no adjustment Initial

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the 4th cassette. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0001000 0010001 0100010 0101010 0110010 + 0.8mm +1.7 mm +3.4 mm +4.2 mm +5.0 mm Settings no adjustment Initial
3-87
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the Large Capacity Cassette. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0001000 0010001 0100010 0101010 0110010 + 0.8mm +1.7 mm +3.4 mm +4.2 mm +5.0 mm Settings no adjustment Initial
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the Bypass tray. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0001000 0010001 0100010 0101010 0110010 + 0.8mm +1.7 mm +3.4 mm +4.2 mm +5.0 mm Settings no adjustment Initial
3-88

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the Duplex unit. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0001000 0010001 0100010 0101010 0110010 + 0.8mm +1.7 mm +3.4 mm +4.2 mm +5.0 mm Settings no adjustment Initial

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment for the Punch unit. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting Adjusts so that a correct loop is formed before the Synchronizing Rollers when paper is fed though. 0000001 0000010 0000011 0000100 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Settings no adjustment Initial
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - .

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Punch holes position adjustment. Each setting changes by 1 mm. Usage/Comments Switch 6543210 0000000 setting 0000001 0000010 0000011 0000100 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Settings no adjustment Initial
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - .
3-89

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Adjusting the fusing temperature for plain paper Usage/Comments
Switch 43210 00000 00001 00010 00011
Settings Setting 1 Initial setting Setting 2 Setting 3 Setting 4
For the temperature, see table below.
Setting 1 2 3 4
Paper width 221mm or more 220mm or less 221mm or more 220mm or less 221mm or more 220mm or less 221mm or more 220mm or less
Heater temperature 180 C 170 C 190 C 180 C 200 C 190 C 170 C 160 C

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Adjusting the fusing temperature for pasteboard Usage/Comments
Switch 43210 00000 00001 00010
Settings Setting 1 Initial setting Setting 2 Setting 3
Setting 1 2 3
Heater temperature 200 C 190 C 180 C
3-90

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Adjusting the fusing temperature for OHP transparencies Usage/Comments
Switch 43210 00000 00001 00010
Settings Setting 1 Initial setting Setting 2 Setting 3
Setting 1 2 3
Heater temperature 155 C 165 C 145 C
3-91
Machine Parameter 291 299 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 301 307 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 308
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Fine adjusting for background level Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps 1 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00001000 + Darkest setting
Lightest setting
3-92
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust RADF scanner back side registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increase the left margin and the minus setting decrease it. 1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Note: See Machine Parameter 010 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 25 steps 00011001 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000011 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -25 steps 10011001 Settings +5.29 mm +6.77 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm Initial setting +0.63 mm 0 mm Standard -1.69 mm -3.39 mm -5.29 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for RADF. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretch the image data and the minus setting squeeze it. Each setting changes by 0.1% Note: See Machine Parameter 011 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 % +0.8 % +0.4 % +0.2 % +0.1 % 0 % Initial setting -0.1 % -0.2 % -0.4 % -0.8 % -1.5 %
3-93
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (DADF back side) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)
Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Note: See Machine Parameter 013 for the front side adjustment.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (DADF back side) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10001010 means -1.69 mm. 3-94
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in normal resolution. (for adjusting the back side density) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting
Note: See Machine Parameter 030 for the front side adjustment.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in fine resolution. (for adjusting the back side density) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in super-fine resolution. (for adjusting the back side density) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting
3-95

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in hyper-fine resolution. (for adjusting the back side density) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in hyper-fine (600dpi 600dpi)resolution. (for adjusting the back side density) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in Background resolution. (for adjusting the back side density) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting
3-96
Machine Parameter 340 349 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 350 359 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 360 369 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 370
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for all document type. (for adjusting the back side slice level) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for all document type. (for adjusting the back side slice level) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrastec

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for Photo type scanning by fax transmission. (for adjusting the back side slice level) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted
3-97

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for Photo type scanning by fax transmission (for adjusting the back side slice level) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for Background type scanning by copying. (for adjusting the back side slice level) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for Background type scanning by copying. (for adjusting the back side slice level) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-98

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Auto Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1. Note: See Machine Parameter 080 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning. (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted
Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1. Note: See Machine Parameter 081 for the front side adjustment.
3-99

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Auto Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1. Note: See Machine Parameter 082 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Manually selected Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1. Note: See Machine Parameter 083 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted
3-100

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Photo Contrast : Auto Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Black high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 Black low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Auto Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1. Note: See Machine Parameter 085 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-101

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Auto Contrast : Manually selected Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1. Note: See Machine Parameter 086 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Auto Note: This adjustment is available only when the Unique Switch 068:0 is set to 1. Note: See Machine Parameter 087 for the front side adjustment. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-102

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Text&Photo Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White slice level adjustment for following scanning: (for adjusting the back side slice level) Doc. Type: Photo Contrast : Manually selected Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 White high-contrasted : 00001000 : 00000000 Standard : 10001000 : 11111111 White low-contrasted
3-103
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Fine adjusting for background level (for adjusting the back side slice level) Switch 127 steps 32 steps Note: See Machine Parameter 308 for the front side adjustment. 16 steps 8 steps 1 step setting Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00001000 + Darkest setting
Lightest setting Initial
3-104
Machine Parameter 400 409 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 410 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 411
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Paper transfer interval Switch 256 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 11111111 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000010 : 00000000 Settings Widest
1 step
Narrowest
The narrower the intervals are, the faster the scanning times become.
Note: The steps will be figured out with 256 times the steps in Machine Parameter 411 and the steps in Machine Parameter 412.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Adjust Paper transfer interval Switch 256 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 11111111 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000010 : 00000000 Settings Widest
1 step
Narrowest
3-105

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Able to use the DS3 sensor. 0: No 1: Yes Adjusting the gain offset when setting the back side ground level 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
3-106

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Paper transfer interval Adjusts document feed after finish scanning to Document Sensor 3 (DS3) on. Switch 256 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 11111111 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000010 : 00000000 Settings Widest
1 step
Narrowest

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Adjust Paper transfer interval Adjusts document feed after finish scanning to Document Sensor 3 (DS3) on. Switch 256 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 11111111 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000010 : 00000000 Settings Widest
1 step
Narrowest
3-107

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Adjust Paper transfer interval Adjusts document feed after finish scanning to Document Sensor 3 (DS3) off. Switch 256 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 11111111 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000010 : 00000000 Settings Widest
1 step
Narrowest

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Paper transfer interval Adjusts document feed after finish scanning to Document Sensor 3 (DS3) off. Switch 256 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 11111111 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000010 : 00000000 Settings Widest
1 step
Narrowest
3-108
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for DADF. (Vertical) The plus setting squeeze the image data and the minus setting stretch it. Each setting changes by 0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 : 10000011 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 % +0.8 % +0.2 % +0.1 % 0 % Standard -0.1 % -0.3 % Initial setting -0.4 % -0.8 % -1.5 %

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (DADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm Initial setting
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)
3-109

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (DADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm Initial setting
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (DADF back side) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 3 (DS3) to the start of scanning the position. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm Initial setting
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)
3-110

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (DADF back side) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 3 (DS3). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 40 steps 00101000 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +10.67 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +6.77 mm +5.08 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm +0.51 mm +0.34 mm +0.17 mm 31 mm Initial setting
1 step = 2 / 300 inches (0.17 mm)

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. (Vertical) The plus setting squeeze the image data and the minus setting stretch it. Each setting changes by 0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 % +0.8 % +0.4 % +0.2 % +0.1 % 0 % Initial setting -0.1 % -0.2 % -0.4 % -0.8 % -1.5 %
3-111

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (For FBS) Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 4 steps 00000100 : 2 steps 00000010 : 1 steps 00000001 00000000 -1 steps 10000001 : -2 steps 10000010 : -4 steps 10000100 : -8 steps 10001000 : -16 steps 10010000 : -31 steps 10000001 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm +0.28 mm +0.14 mm 5 mm Standard -0.14 mm -0.28 mm -0.56 mm -1.13 mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Interval for adjusting skew feeding document Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 1 steps -81steps -16 steps -120 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00000001 00000000 10000001 : 10010000 : 1111000 Settings +10.16 mm +2.56 mm +1.28 mm +0.08 mm 0 mm Initial setting -0.8 mm -2.56mm -9.6 mm
3-112

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust PCL Personality Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000001 00000010 PCL (Initial setting) PCL XL

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Orientation Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 Portrait (Initial setting) Landscape

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Paper size Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001101 00001110 00010000 00010001 00010100 Letter (Initial setting) Ledger Legal Executive A3 A4 A5 A6 F4 B4 (JIS) B5 (JIS) Half Letter COM10 DL Postcard Custom
3-113

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Output bin Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 Paper Tray (Initial setting) or Upper Tray of the finisher 2bin Tray or Lower Tray of the finisher

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Paper source Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 Auto (Initial setting) Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 or LCC Cassette 4 Manual Tray

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Default Media Type Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 Plain (Initial setting) Thick Transparency Envelope/Postcard
Machine Parameter 506~507 Factory use only
3-114
Machine Parameter 508~509 PCL Default Font Number

Switch 508 76543210 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010001 01000000 01000001 01000010 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100010 01110000 01110000 11110000 11110000 01111010 10110000 10110000 00001011 509 76543210 00000011 00000101 00000110 00010001 00010100 00010111 00011111 00101100 00110100 01001000 01100101 11001001 00001010 11011010 00101110 00000101 00000011 00000100 00001111 00101111 00000101 01010000 01100010 01010000 01001101 10101010 00101011 00101101 00101110 Usage/Comments Courier (Initial setting) CG Times Letter Gothic CG Omega Coronet Nw Cent Schlbk IT CA vant Gard Clarendon Univers Antiq Olive Garamond Marigold Albertus Arial Symbol Times New Rmn Courier PS Helvetica Palation ITC Bookman Times Mincho Gothic P. Mincho P. Gothic Winding Zapf Chancery Zapf Dingbats Symbol PC
NOTE: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-116.
3-115
Machine Parameter 510~511 PCL Default Symbol

Switch 510 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 511 76543210 00000100 00001001 00001110 00010011 00010101 00100101 00100110 00100111 00110101 01001110 01011110 10101101 10101110 10110100 11001010 11001110 11101010 00001101 00010101 00100101 00101010 00110100 00110101 01001010 01010101 01110101 10001010 10010101 11001100 11110101 00110101 01001110 01101011 01101100 01101101 01110101 Usage/Comments ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian ISO 15: Italian ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 11: Swedish ISO 6: ASC ll ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 69: French ISO 21: German Legal ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 17: Spanish PS Math ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Microsoft Publishing ISO 8859/6 Latin6 Desk Top Math-8 Roman-8 Windows 3.1 Latin 2 PC-1004 PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Ps Text PC-8 Cord Page 437 (Initial setting) PC-8 D/N, Cord Page 437N Macintosh PC-850 Multilingual HP 4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats PI Font PC-852 Latin 2 ISO 8859/1 Latin1 Windows 3.1j Latin Windows 3.1 Baltic Symbol Windows 3.1 Latin 1
NOTE: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-116.
3-116
Invalid combination of font number and symbols

Courier CG Times LetterGothic CG Omega Coronet NwCentSchlbk ITCAvantGard Clarendon Univers AntiqOlive Garamond ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian ISO 15: Italian ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 11: Swedish ISO 6: ASCII ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 69: French ISO 21: German Legal ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 17: Spanish PSMath ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Microsoft Publishing ISO 8859/6 Latin 6 DeskTop Math-8 Roman-8 Windows 3.1 Latin 2 PC-1004 PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Windows 3.0 Latin 1 PS Text PC-8 Code Page 437 PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Macintosh PC-850 Multilingual HP4000 ITC ZapfDingbats PI Font PC-852 Latin 2 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Windows 3.1j Latin Windows 3.1 Baltic Symbol Windows 3.1 Latin 1 PC-775 Windings Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Marigold Albertus Arial Symbol TimesNewRmn CourierPS Helvetica Palatino ITCBookman Times Mincho Gothic P. Mincho P. Gothic Windings ZapfChancery Zapf Dingbats
SymbolPS
Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Invalid Invalid Invalid
3-117
Machine Parameter 512~515 Factory use only Machine Parameter 516~517 PCL X Resolution
Switch 516 76543210 00000001 00000010 517 76543210 00101100 01011000 Usage/Comments 300 dpi 600 dpi (Initial setting)
Machine Parameter 518~519 PCL Y Resolution

Switch 518 76543210 00000001 00000010 519 76543210 00101100 01011000 Usage/Comments 300 dpi 600 dpi (Initial setting)
Machine Parameter 520~521 PCL Time-out period

Switch 520 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000001 : 00000001 : 00000011 : 11111111 521 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 01100100 : 11001000 : 00101100 : 11110100 : 00100000 : 111111111 Usage/Comments Invalid 1 sec 2 sec : 100 sec : 200 sec : 300 sec (Initial setting) : 500 sec : 800 sec : 65535 sec
3-118
Machine Parameter 522~523 PCL Print copies

Switch 522 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000011 523 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 11100111 Usage/Comments Invalid 1 copy (Initial setting) 2 copies : 999 copies
Machine Parameter 524~525 PCL Time-out period (Text-mode)

Switch 524 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000001 : 00000001 : 11111111 525 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 00001010 : 01100100 : 11001000 : 00101100 : 11110100 : 111111111 Usage/Comments Invalid 1 sec 2 sec : 10 sec (Initial setting) : 100 sec : 200 sec : 300 sec : 500 sec : 65535 sec
3-119
Machine Parameter 532~533 PCL Characters per inch

Switch 532 76543210 00000000 : 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000011 533 76543210 00000000 : 00000011 00000100 00000101 : 01011010 : 01100100 : 01101110 : 11100111 Usage/Comments Invalid : Invalid 0.4 characters/inch 0.5 characters/inch : 9.0 characters/inch : 10.0 characters/inch (Initial setting) : 11.0 characters/inch : 99.9 characters/inch
Machine Parameter 534~535 Factory use only Machine Parameter 536~537 PCL Size of Characters
Switch 536 76543210 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 0100111 537 76543210 00000000 00000001 : 01100100 : 01111000 : 00001101 Usage/Comments Invalid 0.1 point : 10.0 point : 12.0 point (Initial setting) : 999.7 point
3-120

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Line per page (1 line/page) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 : 00000100 00000101 : : 10000000 60 lines (Letter)(Initial setting) Invalid Invalid 5 lines 128 lines

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Main Paper Source Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 Cassette 1 (Initial setting) Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 or LCC Cassette 4 Manual Tray
3-121
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment

3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches
2. Select [Mem Switch Edit]. 3. Call up the desired Memory switch by cursor key or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired memory switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the memory switch settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). or of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press Press 0 or 1 on the numeric keypad, or or to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory switch edit screen. Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch. 6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press Reset to return the machine to standby.
3-122
3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches

Resets the memory switches to factory defaults. 1. From standby, press Setting, *, 0, 1,.
2. Press [Mem Switch Clear]. 3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the memory switches, press [Cancel]. 4. Press Reset to return the machine to standby.
About the symbol by the table The at left side of the table indicates that you can set the switch respectively for the second phone line.
Memory Switch 000 - Dialer

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only DIS detect time after dialing 0: 55 sec 1: 70 sec CED detection 0: No 1: Yes Dial tone detection 0: Do not dial 1: Dial Phone line type for the first phone line 0: PSTN 1: PBX Usage/Comments
Sets the time DIS signal is detected after dialing a number. Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on the telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED signal. Determines if the machine proceeds with dialing or indicates an error if no dial tone is detected within five seconds of going off-hook. When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial tone and acts according to the setting of memory switch 000, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machine always dials a given number of seconds after going off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number of seconds.
3-123

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only DIS detection condition Usage/Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not. Normal Strict 200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Switch
5 4
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
PBX mode dial pause
Sets the number of seconds the machine waits before dialing when memory switch 002, bit 0 is set to PBX mode. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Pause time 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Initial setting 4 sec 5 sec 6 sec 7 sec 8 sec 9 sec 10 sec 11 sec 12 sec 13 sec 14 sec 15 sec
3-124
Memory Switch 002 003 --- Factory use only Memory Switch 004 - Dialer
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only DTMF attenuation Usage/Comments
See table below
Memory Switch 004DTMF attenuation

Switch 3 2 1 0 -15 dB 1 1 1 1 -14 dB 1 1 1 0 -13 dB 1 1 0 1 -12 dB 1 1 0 0 -11 dB 1 0 1 1 -10 dB 1 0 1 0 -9 dB 1 0 0 1 -8 dB 1 0 0 0 -7 dB 0 1 1 1 -6 dB 0 1 1 0 -5 dB 0 1 0 1 -4 dB 0 1 0 0 -3 dB 0 0 1 1 -2 dB 0 0 1 0 -1 dB 0 0 0 1 -0 dB 0 0 0 0

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only
Ring signal detect time Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected after hanging up. Switch 6 5 4 0 0 0 100 ms 0 0 1 200 ms 0 1 0 300 ms 0 1 1 400 ms 1 0 0 500 ms 1 0 1 600 ms 1 1 0 700 ms 1 1 1 800 ms Select the number of detection time of CI signal in the Fax/Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode. Incoming calls are answered according to this setting regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User Settings.
Usage/Comments
Number of CI signal detection in Fax/Tel Ready mode 0: Detect 1 time 1: Detect 2 times
Dual ring detection 0: No 1: Yes Long ring detection 0: No 1: Yes

Frequency of the CI signal detection 0: No 1: Yes
When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer an incoming ring with an off time of 120 - 60 ms. Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring if the ring on-time is longer than two seconds.
When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of the incoming CI signal.
Memory Switch 006 009 --- Factory use only
3-125
Memory Switch 010 - Transmission

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Usage/Comments Busy tone detection Set this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit 0: No is mistaken for a busy signal. 1: Yes Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1: 4 times 1 time 1 time 1 time 2 times 1 time Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by 0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS 1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal. V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo 0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the 1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high speed modem training (V.29). Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1
3-126

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 6 1 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch. 4 0 Switch 5 Switch 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 1 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 See table below
Output attenuation
Memory Switch 011Output attenuation

3-127

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Changing the date format of the transmitted TTI 0: No 1: Yes TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When set to 1, the machine changes the date format of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY, or vice versa. When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI includes the followings: Sender name Senders fax number Data & time, and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW 016. The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post message.
1 0
0 0
(Note: Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations.) ECM response time 0: 3 sec 1: 4.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is 0: 200 ms retransmitted. 1: 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Switch 1 Switch 0

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust ANSam detection 0: Yes 1: No V.34 transmission 0: Yes 1: No CSI/TSI/CIG transmit 0: Yes 1: No ECM mode 0: On 1: Off Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN/PIN signals 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the handshake and an error occurs, set to 1. Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and CIG signals are disabled. Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and reception times. When set to 1, retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
2 1 0
1 0 0
3-128
Memory Switch 014 --- Factory use only Memory Switch 015 - Transmission
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Program individual autodialer attributes 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Sending RTC signal when transmission is canceled 0: Yes 1: No Usage/Comments Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as attribute 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and 013 as attribute 4 when one-touch and speed dial locations are programmed. (Refer to page 3-167 for settings.)
6 5 4 3 2
0 0 0 0 0
Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs 0: Yes 1: No Action after EOR signal 0: Continue 1: Discontinue
RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission. When set at 0, the machine will send the RTC if the transmission is canceled. No error will occur. When set at 1, an error will occur because RTC will not be sent at the end of a canceled transmission. When set at 0, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the machine will not retry the transmission.
Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400 bps.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Additional data on TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
Subscriber ID transmit 0: No 1: Yes
TTI (name) transmit 0: No 1: Yes
When set at 0, the transmission of the additional data (time, the number of pages, file number, etc) is disabled. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available. When set at 0, the transmission of the subscriber ID is disabled. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available. When set at 0, the transmission of the name which was stored in the unit is disabled. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available.
Factory use only

3-129
Memory Switch 020 - Reception

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Data error rate 0: 10% 1: 20% Pause one second after sending CED 0: No (75 ms) 1: Yes (1 sec) Usage/Comments Determines the allowable number of erred lines out of total lines received in a document. A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression in some telephone equipment. When set to "1", the machine pauses one second after sending CED, which allows echo suppression to restart. This may help with problematic overseas reception.
5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 1
Factory use only Factory use only Receive speed (kbps) Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines. 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Memory Switch 021 - Reception

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Not used Paper size detection 0: At DCS reception 1: At DIS reception Factory use only T1 timer 0: 35 sec 1: 20 sec Print image data when post message is not received after receiving RTC signal 0: No 1: Yes Disable ITU-T superfine reception 0: Yes 1: No G3 echo receive Adjusts the delay between detection of training/TCF and sending of CFR. 0 1 Switch 1 Switch 0 100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Usage/Comments When to detect the paper size. Setting this bit to 1 the paper in the cassette will be detected at DIS reception. Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials the remote machines phone number, it begins sending CNG and waits this amount of time before disconnecting the line. If the received document includes the RTC, the machine prints the data even though the following protocol is not succeeded.
5 4
0 0
Set to 1 if a compatibility error occurs because the transmitting machine does not understand the extended frame for ITU-T superfine resolution. (Note: Setting this switch to 1 will disable superfine mode.)
3-130
Memory Switch 030 - Modem

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Number of HDLC end flags Usage/Comments Defines the number of HDLC end flags. Switch 7 6 5 4 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Factory use only Factory use only Digital cable equalizer 0: Free 1: Hold No use
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Initial setting
3 2 1
0 0
When set to 1, become efficient for the line short break, but become weak for the line noise. Its available only for communication at 14,400 or 12,000 bit/s.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Adjust EYE-Q check level at 7200 bps EYE-Q check level at 9600 bps EYE-Q check level at 12000 bps EYE-Q check level at 14400 bps Usage/Comments 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1
3-131

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust EYE-Q slice level 0: Disable 1: Enable Check EYE-Q 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only EYE-Q check level at 2400 bps EYE-Q check level at 4800 bps Usage/Comments Setting this bit to 1 enables memory switch 032, bits 0-3 and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and enables EYE-Q check adjustment. Set at 0: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not checked after checking TCF. Set at 1: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked after checking TCF.
5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Delete receive echo of CFR at the receiver side 0: No 1: Yes Expand FSK receive time after detecting flag 0: 3.3 seconds 1: 10 seconds Usage/Comments
Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode. Sets this switch to 1 to resolve the problem caused of the echo of CFR. Setting this switch to 1 extend HDLC frame receive timer in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after detecting pre-amble.
3-132
Memory Switch 040 - Scanner

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Document TX length limit 0: 3.6 meters 1: 1 meter Usage/Comments
Setting to unlimited will override document jam sensing.
Memory Switch 041 059 --- Factory use only Memory Switch 060 - Remote reception
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Factory use only CML relay off time after dialing 0: 1 sec 1: 200 ms DTMF tones heard through handset 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise may occur as the CML relay switches on and off. Set this switch to 0 to avoid this. Determines if DTMF tones are produced through the handset in off-hook dialing.
4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
3-133
Memory Switch 061 - Remote reception

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Off-hook / on-hook detect time Usage/Comments
Sets the time interval between the on-hook and offhook(or off-hook/on-hook) condition. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms 0100 400 ms Initial setting 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms 1001 900 ms 1 0 1 0 1000 ms 1 0 1 1 1100 ms 1 1 0 0 1200 ms 1 1 0 1 1300 ms 1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-134

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only CNG detect in Ans/Fax ready 0: No 1: Yes Switch-hook time Usage/Comments
When set to 1, the machine detects the CNG signal in Ans/Fax ready. If the switch hook is quickly depressed and released, switch-to-fax will occur. This setting adjusts how quickly the switch hook activation must be. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms Initial setting 0100 400 ms 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms 1001 900 ms 1 0 1 0 1000 ms 1 0 1 1 1100 ms 1 1 0 0 1200 ms 1 1 0 1 1300 ms 1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-135
Memory Switch 063 - Remote reception and TAD interface

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Adjust silent detection time Usage/Comments This switch adjusts the length of silence required for silent detection activation. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 1 sec 0010 2 sec 0011 3 sec 0100 4 sec 0101 5 sec Initial setting 0110 6 sec 0111 7 sec 1000 8 sec 1001 9 sec 1010 10 sec 1011 11 sec 1100 12 sec 1101 13 sec 1110 14 sec 1111 15 sec This switch adjusts the length of time silence detection remains active. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec Initial setting 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec
Number of seconds silent detection remains active
3-136
Memory Switch 064 - Remote reception and TAD interface

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust CNG detect period after TAD begins recording ICM Usage/Comments Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD begins recording incoming messge. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec Initial setting 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD answers an incoming call. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec Initial setting 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec
CNG detect period after TAD answers
Incoming rings
TAD plays Outgoing message CNG detection is active

(Adjusted by Memory switch 064, bit 0-3)
TAD records Incoming message CNG detection is active

Silent detection is active

Silent detection time

3-137

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of CI detect time Usage/Comments Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI detect time. Switch 7 6 5 4 3 11111 11101 : 01001 00111 00101 00011 00000 00010 00100 00110 01000 : 11100 11110 Factory use only Factory use only Beep if fax handset hang up 0: Yes 1: No Time 15 msec 14 msec : 4 msec 3 msec 2 msec 1 msec 0 msec -1 msec -2 msec -3 msec -4 msec : -14 msec -15 msec
Initial setting
2 1 0
0 0 0
Determines if your machine beeps when having left the faxs handset hanging up after communication.
3-138
Memory Switch 070 - Operation

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Display error line 0: No 1: Yes Total line monitor 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Sort autodialer printout 0: Sort by autodialer location 1: Sort by location ID Print check message if power is lost 0: No 1: Yes Print page if error occurs during memory transmission 0: No 1: Yes Print check message 0: No 1: Yes Stop printing check message for a memory transmission by pressing the stop key 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments The number of error lines contained in the received data will be shown in the LCD. Allows fax communication to be heard through the monitor speaker.
5 4
0 0
Specifies how entries on autodialer printouts are sorted. In the event of two power losses in a 40 hour period, documents will be lost. When power is restored, a check message will print. For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a check message if an error occurs during memory transmission. To notify the user of an error, a check message can be printed if a communication error occurs. Determines if pressing the stop key stop printing the check message for a memory transmission.

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is NG 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is OK 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Display modem speed 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is NG.
4 3
0 1
For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is OK.
2 1 0
0 0 0
The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.
3-139

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Erase polled document 0: No 1: Yes Print TCR after the batch transmission 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
Determines if a document stored for polling is erased after being polled. Determines if printing the confirmation report after completing the batch transmission.
Memory Switch 073 075 --- Factory use only Memory Switch 076 - Operation
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Print Activity journal even if any communication was not performed. 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
3-140
3.4 Unique Switch Adjustment

3.4.1 Setting the Unique Switches
2. Select [Switch Edit]. 3. Call up the desired switch by cursor key or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the unique switch settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). or of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press Press 0 or 1 on the numeric keypad, or or , to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed unique switch and return to the unique switch edit screen. Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed unique switch.
6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press Reset to return the machine to standby.
3-141
3.4.2 Clearing the Unique Switches

Resets the unique switches to factory defaults. 1. From standby, press Setting, *, 0, 4.
2. Press [Parameter Clear].
3. Press [Yes] to reset the unique switch to factory defaults. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the unique switches, press [Cancel]. 4. Press Reset to return the machine to standby.
About the symbol by the table The at left side of the table indicates that you can set the switch respectively for the second phone line.
3-142
Unique Switch 000 Dialer

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Congestion tone detection 0: No 1: Yes Ring back tone wait time (seconds) 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 Switch 5: 0 0 1 1 Switch 4: 0 1 0 1 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Setting this switch to 0 ignores telephone line congestion tones. Sets the time until the ring back tone begins after answering an incoming call in the Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode.
4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0
Unique Switch 001 009 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 010 - Transmission
Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Reduce TTI vertically 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Including TTI inside the document 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
Setting this bit to 1 makes the TTI reduce 50% to the vertical direction when sending a fax.
4 3
0 1
Setting this bit to 0 transmit the document length added with the TTI. Setting it to 1 transmit the length including TTI inside the document. However in this case, the image at the top of the document might be overlapped with TTI. (TTI length: 4.2mm)
2 1 0
0 1 1
Factory use only The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission 1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Unique Switch 011 014 --- Factory use only
3-143
Unique Switch 015 - Transmission

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Factory use only Report the transmission result of relay Tx and relay broadcast Tx 0: No 1: Yes Not used Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only V.8 handshake in real time Tx 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 1
Determine I the handshaking will be done with V.8 recommendation if real time transmission.

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Available *, # and space upon F-code box registration 0: No 1: Yes Available *, # and space upon F-code communicating 0: No 1: Yes Ignore space in F-code ID 0: Yes 1: No F-code sub-frame off 0: Send 1: Not send Send F-code boxs TTI 0: No 1: Yes Send undelivered report to the sender machine 0: No 1: Yes Retrieve document 0: No 1: Yes Ignore F-code bit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space are available upon F-code box registration.
6 5
1 0
Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space are available upon F-code communicating.
Determines if checking the space stored in the F-code ID. Do not send the sub-address and password of Fcode box when a point of sending DCS signal after EOM signal. Transmit the sub-address and box name of F-code box with F-code polling document.
Retrieve the document received in F-code SecureMail box by polling transmission. Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS signal at F-code polled transmission.
Note: The F-code communication is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code (SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.
3-144
Unique Switch 017 Transmission

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only JBIG transmission 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 7200 bps 0: No 1: Yes Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 4800 bps 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Transmission when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission. 0: Retry to detect NSF 1: Transmit with the standard protocol Usage/Comments
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 7200 bps.
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 4800 bps.
2 1 0
0 1 0
Determines the action when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission.
Unique Switch 019 --- Factory use only
3-145
Unique Switch 020 - Reception

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Transmit CED signal 0: No 1: Yes Pseudo-ring start time (seconds) 5 6 8 10 Switch 3: 0 0 1 1 Switch 2: 0 1 0 1 Printout the pages completed to receive during receiving into memory 0: No 1: Yes Avoid time out in ECM reception 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
Determines if sending CED signal at on-hook transfer. Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after answering an incoming call. (Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)
2 1
0 1
Determines if whether to printout the page which data is completed to receive during receiving it into faxs memory.
Disables 60 seconds RNR time out in ECM mode.
3-146

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only TCF check time (in 100 ms units) Usage/Comments
If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the result, lengthen the TCF check time. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Time 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms Initial setting 900 ms 1000 ms 1100 ms 1200 ms 1300 ms 1400 ms 1500 ms

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only JBIG reception 0: No 1: Yes Receive the junk fax 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
Determines how documents from the remote fax are received. When the block junk fax feature is set to Mode 2 and the fax does not receive the TSI signal from the remote fax, determine if receiving the fax other than the remote fax number set to the block junk dial list.
1 0
0 0
3-147

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Number of seconds pseudoring rings (seconds) 30 40 50 60 Switch 1: 0 0 1 1 Switch 0: 0 1 0 1 Usage/Comments
Sets the length of time the pseudo-ring rings.
3-148
Unique Switch 030 - Modem

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only 3429 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 3200 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 3000 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 2800 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only 2400 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
If the error frame often occurs because of the symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to 1 mask that symbol rate and keep down the occurrence of error frame.
1 0
0 1
See above (switch 5 to 2).

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Adjust Forced 2400 symbol rate when probing SNR is adverse Usage/Comments SNR means that Signal Noise Ratio. If the SNR is less than the threshold you set, the modem overrides the bandwidth evaluation algorithm and forces the symbol rate to2400 baud.
3-149

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only ANSam output time 0: 3 sec 1: 4 sec Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to 1 when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.
1 0
0 1
Unique Switch 033 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 034 - Modem
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments Tune the symbol rate 0: Yes 1: No Symbol rate adjustment. Adjust the symbol rate selected by the link. Switch 6 5 4 FLAT 2Link 3Link 4Link 5Link 6Link 7Link 0 0 0 : 3429 3429 3200 3000 3000 3000 2800 0 0 1 : 3429 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 2800 0 1 0 : 3429 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800 0 1 1 : 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800 1 0 0 : 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only
6 5 4
0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
3-150

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only The delay before postmessage is transmitted Usage/Comments
If retraining occurs due to the low reception signal level and few delay of the telephone line, it may overlap the second post-message. In this case, increase the delay before the post-message is transmitted. 0 ms 0 0 100 ms 0 1 200 ms 1 0 300 ms 1 1
0 Switch 4: Switch 3:
2 1 0
0 0 1
Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only
3-151
Unique Switch 040 - Scanner

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Transmit a small document at center 0: No 1: Yes Scanning standard point of ADF 0: Front left 1: Rear left Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Hyper fine resolution 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments When set to 1, the image will transmit at center even when you put the small document along the edge. When set to 0, the document is scanned from the front left point and the rear part can be missed in the case that the image is larger than the recording paper. When set to 1, the front part can be missed.
4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
When set to 1, Super fine resolution (203 dpi 392 lpi) changes into Hyper fine resolution (406 dpi 392 lpi).
Unique Switch 041

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Set the fixed ratio for copy and the auto ratio in detail 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Rotate Letter document and store it as Letter 0: Not rotate 1: Rotate Usage/Comments When set to 1, the ratio will be calculated in detail automatically according to the document size and the recording paper size.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1
This is available when the rotate transmission is set to ON.
3-152
Unique Switch 042

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Scan width of ADF for an Half-letter sized document 0: Letter 1: Half-letter Factory use only Usage/Comments
For troubles, when a document a little smaller than Letter is scanned and the ADF scans only Halfletter width, set this bit to 0.
Unique Switch 043 045 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 046 - Scanner
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Left edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS Adjusts the left edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Each setting changes by 0.4233 mm. Usage/Comments
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000101 001010 001111 010100 011001 011111 100011 101000 101101 110010 110111 111100 111111
Settings 0 mm 0.42 mm 2.11 mm 4.23 mm 6.35 mm 8.42 mm 10.58 mm 12.70 mm 14.83 mm 16.93 mm 19.05 mm 21.17 mm 23.28 mm 25.40 mm 26.67 mm
3-153

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Right edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS Adjusts the right edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Each setting changes by 0.4233 mm. Usage/Comments
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000101 001010 001111 010100 011001 011111 100011 101000 101101 110010 110111 111100 111111
Settings 0 mm 0.42 mm 2.11 mm 4.23 mm 6.35 mm 8.42 mm 10.58 mm 12.70 mm 14.83 mm 16.93 mm 19.05 mm 21.17 mm 23.28 mm 25.40 mm 26.67 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Leading edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS Adjusts the leading edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Each setting changes by 1 mm. Usage/Comments
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 : : 111111 3-154
Settings 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm 9 mm 10 mm 11 mm 12 mm 13 mm 14 mm 15 mm 16 mm 17 mm 18 mm 19 mm 20 mm 21 mm 22 mm 23 mm 24 mm 25 mm
63 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Trailing edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS Adjusts the trailing edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Each setting changes by 1 mm. Usage/Comments
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 : : 111111
Settings 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm 9 mm 10 mm 11 mm 12 mm 13 mm 14 mm 15 mm 16 mm 17 mm 18 mm 19 mm 20 mm 21 mm 22 mm 23 mm 24 mm 25 mm
63 mm
3-155
Unique Switch 050 - Printer

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Smoothing of List print in normal printing 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in S-Fine rotate printing 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Normal rotate printing 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in H-Fine (400 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in S-Fine (200 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Fine mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Normal mode 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Smoothes the data scanned in each resolution mode.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Print reduction 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
If the document size is different from the recording paper size in the paper cassette: When set to 0, print the image at 100 % size on two or more pages. When set to 1, reduce printout to fit on one sheet.
3-156

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Printing margin adjustment 0: Normal 1: No margin Usage/Comments
Unique Switch 053 Printer

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Printer density adjustment. Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 : Settings Not available Lightest : : Normal : : Darkest Not available
3-157
Unique Switch 054 056 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 057 - Printer
Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Countdown display 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Determine if the machine displays the remaining pages which can be printed after the machine detects the Toner low or Drum near end. Note: It will count down the number of sheets which can be printed. For example: The machine received the legal-sized document with the following condition: Receive reduction rate is 100% The machine has Letter-sized and half letter sized paper in the paper cassette. when set this switch to 1, the machine will print the received legal-sized document on two lettersized paper. when set this switch to 0, the machine will print the received legal-sized document on three half letter sized paper. When this bit is set to 1, the received document will be printed on the same width paper to the document. When it is set to 0, a paper that will have less margin will be selected.
Select paper when one received document will be printed on more than one page. 6 0 0: No 1: Yes
4 3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0 1
Select paper with the same width to the received document 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Printer duty
You can adjust the toner consumption by lighten the printing. Bit 1 0 0 0 duty 100% dark (toner consumption high) 01 75% 10 50% 11 25% light (toner consumption low) Note: All the received fax will be printed in 100%, when the setting is 75% or 25%. All the Nin1 copy and repeated dopy set with separator line will be printed with 100% duty.
3-158
Unique Switch 058- Printer

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Number of the available pages to print after appearing the replace message of the toner or the drum. Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 : 00110010 : 01100100 : 10010110 : 11001000 : 11111111 Usage/Comments Settings Toner 0 page 1 page 50 pages 100 pages 150 pages 200 pages 255 pages Drum 0 page 10 pages 500 pages 1000 pages 1500 pages 2000 pages 2550 pages
Unique Switch 059 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 060 - Remote reception
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Use numeric keypad on the fax using second phone 0: No 1: Yes Manual transmit/receive using Start key after off-hook of second phone 0: No 1: Yes Silent detection 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
Determines if using the numeric keypad on the control panel of the fax using the second phone.
Determines if transmitting or receiving manually using Start key after off-hook of the second phone. Note: To enable this function Unique Switch 060: 2 must also set to 1 Enables or disables silent detection during Ans/Fax Ready mode.
.0
3-159
Unique Switch 061 066 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 067 Remote reception and TAD interface
Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Strict condition of CNG detection after OGM output 0: No 1: Yes CNG detection during OGM output in ANS Ready 0: Yes 1: No Number of detection DTMF Usage/Comments
When set at 1, the condition of CNG detection becomes strict. CNG should be detected 2times continuously and the OFF time should be 24 sec.
Sets the number of detection the DTMF during Ans/Fax Ready mode. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1111 Number of detection Not detect 1 2 3 Initial setting 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
Unique Switch 068 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 069 Remote reception and TAD interface
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Edit the fax number for location where to sending the service report 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Setting this bit to 1 makes it unable to edit the entered fax number of Report Location 1 in service report setting.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1
3-160
Unique Switch 070 - Operation

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Usage/Comments Factory use only LCD error message After an error message has printed, the setting of 0: Remains in LCD this switch determines if the error message will 1: Returns to standby remain in the display. Buzzer/keypad volume OFF Low Medium Maximum 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Factory use only Priority mode Determine if Copy mode or Fax mode appears 0: Copy mode when the machine returns to standby with auto 1: Fax mode reset. Note: It is also available when turn the machine on. Factory use only Factory use only
5 4 3 2
1 0 0 0
1 0
0 0

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Line monitor in Quick memory transmission 0: Off 1: On Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only RX document to polling document 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
6 5 4 3 2 1
0 1 0 0 0 0
Retrieve the document received in the memory by polling transmission.
3-161

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Send service report 1: No 2: Yes Factory use only Transmit the consumables order sheet automatically 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When both bit 7 of Unique SW 073 and this bit set to 1, the machine automatically transmit the consumables order sheet to the registered distributors office. It does not print the consumable order sheet. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.14 Consumable order sheet, page 3-188.

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Print consumable order sheet 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments If this switch is set to 1, the machine will print the consumable order sheet automatically when the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.14 Consumable order sheet, page 3-188. 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 1 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Continuous polling daily 0: One day 1: Every day Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only
If this setting is turned to 1, continuous polling is available evf
2 1 0
0 1 0
3-162

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Priority of consumable order sheet printing 0: Print after the current printing job completed 1: Print immediately 1 0 Print the transmission time on TCR 0: Blank 1: Print the transmit time When receive a fax message during Auto power off mode, the LCD will be in standby mode 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When the drum cartridge has reached its design life, or the toner cartridge is empty, the machine prints a consumable order sheet (see unique switch 073). When this switch is set at 0, the machine not print consumable order sheet until the current printing job is finished. When set to 1, the transmission time will be printed on TCR.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only The time for the Auto power off mode (0 sec. to 7 sec.) Usage/Comments
The machine will be in the Auto power off mode after keeping to press the Energy saving key for the time you set here. Switch 210 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Settings 0 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. Initial setting 4 sec. 5 sec. 6 sec. 7 sec.
Note: When set it to 0 sec., the machine will be in the Auto power off mode immediately without being in the Sleep mode after pressing the Energy saving key.
3-163
Unique Switch 080 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 081 - Miscellaneous
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Display the copy reservation confirmation screen 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Redial over operation 0: Not available 1: Available Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
5 4 3 2
0 0 0 0
Determine if the machine should attempt the redials again if the last redial attempt fails.
1 0
0 0
Unique Switch 082 084 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 085 - Miscellaneous
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Print/Send the consumable order sheet when the drum is near end 0: Yes 1: No Print/Send the consumable order sheet when toner is near empty 0: Yes 1: No Print the received time stamp inside the document 0: No 1: Yes Next doc default setting when scanning with ADF 0: No 1: Yes Next doc default setting when scanning with FBS 0: No 1: Yes Enlarge the 24 font character to the horizontal direction 1: Yes (150%) 2: No (100%) Factory use only Usage/Comments When both bit 0 of Unique SW 072 and 7 of Unique SW 073 are set to 1, the setting will be reflected to this switch. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.14 Consumable order sheet, page 3-188. When both bit 0 of Unique SW 072 and 7 of Unique SW 073 are set to 1, the setting will be reflected to this switch. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.14 Consumable order sheet, page 3-188. Setting this bit to 1 makes the receive time stamp to print inside the document. Note: Printing the time stamp inside the document may overwrite the senders TTI. Determine the default setting for Next doc scanning with ADF. If it is set to 0 the default setting for Next doc is No, if is 1 the setting is Yes. Determine the default setting for Next doc scanning with FBS. If it is set to 0 the default setting for Next doc is No, if is 1 the setting is Yes. Such characters used in cover pages or TCRs will be enlarged 150% to the horizontal direction when this switch is set to 1.
3-164
Unique Switch 086 - Miscellaneous

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Add senders TSI to the received time stamp 0: No 1: Yes Time to alarm that a document is left on the FBS Usage/Comments
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0
The alarm beeps after the setting time has passed. Switch 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0000001 0000010 0000011 0000100 0000101 : 0001100 : 0010100 : 0011110 : 0110010 : 1010000 : 1100100 1111110 1111111 Settings 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 4 sec. 5 sec. 12 sec. Initial setting 20 sec. 30 sec. 50 sec. 80 sec. 100 sec. 126 sec. 127 sec.
Unique Switch 087 - Miscellaneous

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Print the stored document list again 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Print the sending document on the error massage sheet 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Print last 25-digit of remote number on TCR 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
3 2
0 0
1 0
0 0
Determines if printing the , followed by the last 25-digit of remote number on TCR, when the remote number exceeded the ability of its column on TCR.
3-165
Unique Switch 088 095 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 096 - Miscellaneous
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Update the Flash ROM via USB cable 0: Unable 1: Able Multi line setting 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Fine adjustment of erasing area of TopUp copy. Steps 0.5 mm Usage/Comments
This switch enables it to set the first and second line differently.
5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 0
The machine can make copies with erasing the shadow of the outside of the document. This switch provides the fine adjustment for erasing area. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 +0.0 mm 0001 +0.5 mm | 0011 +1.5 mm 0100 +2.0 mm initial setting | 1110 +7.0 minutes 1111 +7.5 minutes
Unique Switch 097 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 098 - Miscellaneous
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Stop voice guidance 0: Do not stop 1: Stop Stop voice guidance 0: Do not stop 1: Stop Stop voice guidance 0: Do not stop 1: Stop Stop voice guidance 0: Do not stop 1: Stop Stop voice guidance 0: Do not stop 1: Stop Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments This switch enables to stop the guidance of The toner is empty. This switch enables to stop the guidance of The toner is law. This switch enables to stop the guidance of A document has been left on the glace. This switch enables to stop the guidance of Please place the paper face down. This switch enables to stop the guidance of The machine is in printer mode.
2 1 0
0 0 0
Unique Switch 099 --- Factory use only

3-166
3.5 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes

This function allows the user to configure an individual one-touch or speed dial entry with the settings shown in Memory Switches 010, 011, 012 and 013. *Autodialer : Speed-dial numbers, one-touch keys
To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 015, bit 7 to a 1. (See setting 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more information on changing memory switch 015.) 2. When the function is enabled, an Attribute option is added to the autodialer programming steps. As a one-touch or speed dial location is programmed, an extra step showing Attribute 1, Attribute 2, Attribute 3, and Attribute 4 are added as the last step.
or of 3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. To change a setting, press the cursor key until the cursor is in the desired bit position; then press 1 or 0 to make the change. 4. Press [Enter] to save the setting and advance to the next attribute. 5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3-4. 6. If you want to set other autodialers attribute, press [Enter] and select desired autodialer, then repeat steps 3-4. If you want to finish this operation, press Reset to return to standby.
3-167
Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Usage/Comments Busy tone detection Sets this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit 0: No is mistaken for a busy signal. 1: Yes Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400 Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by 0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS 1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal. V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo 0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the 1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high speed modem training (V.29). Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1
3-168

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 6 1 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch. 4 0 Switch 5 Switch 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 1 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 See table on next page
Output attenuation
Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

3-169

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Changing the date format of the transmitted TTI 0: No 1: Yes TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When set to 1, the machine changes the date format of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY, or vice versa. When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI includes the followings: Sender name Senders fax number Data & time, and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW 016. The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post message.
1 0
0 0
(Note: Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations.) ECM response time 0: 3 sec 1: 4.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is 0: 200 ms retransmitted. 1: 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Switch 1 Switch 0

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust ANSam detection 0: Yes 1: No V.34 transmission 0: Yes 1: No CSI/TSI/CIG transmit 0: Yes 1: No ECM mode 0: On 1: Off Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN/PIN signals 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the handshake and an error occurs, set to 1. Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and CIG signals are disabled. Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and reception times. When set to 1, retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
2 1 0
1 0 0
3-170
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings

User programmed information such as speed dial entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the machines Random Access Memory (RAM). This information is held by a battery back up when the power is lost. This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches. Therefore, this setting is useful to reset the user programmed information but leave specific parameters and switches configured for a particular telephone system, etc. To reset only each switch, see page 3-2, 3-123 and 3-142. Note: If desired, the All RAM Clear setting can be used to erase all user programmed information, all documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and machine parameters to factory defaults. For information on the All RAM Clear setting, see below. 1. To clear programmed data and user settings, from standby, press Setting, *, 0, 2.
2. Select [Yes]. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, select [No]. 3. Turn the power off and on.
3.7 All RAM Clear

The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user programmed information, all documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and machine parameters to factory defaults. This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings, onetouch and speed dial listings to help in reprogramming this information. Note: The All RAM Clear does not clear the machine parameters, life monitor and consumable order sheet. If you need to clear them, see Clearing the machine parameters, page 3-2 or Clear Life Monitor, page 3-195. 1. To perform an All RAM Clear, from standby, press Setting, *, 0, 3.
2. Select [Yes]. Note: To finish the operation without performing RAM clear, select [No]. 3. Turn the power off and on. 3-171
3.8 Monitor speaker

This mode allows fax communication to be heard through the monitor speaker 1. From standby mode, press Setting, *, 0, 8.
2. Turn the monitor off and on by selecting the icon.
3.9 Test Modes

This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included are followings. A. B. C. D. E. Life monitor Test pattern print Port status (Factory use only) Background level Roller Cleaning
3.9.1 Life Monitor

The life monitor displays the current software version and the total number of pages scanned, printed, and transmitted. Note: The All RAM Clear setting does not clear the life monitor. To clear, see next column. 1. From standby mode, press Setting, *, 0, 9.
2. Select [Life Monitor]. The software version, total number of scanned pages, printed pages, transmitted pages will be shown on the LCD.
3-172
ROM Ver. 0 1 2 P
Item The software version for the machine The software version for OP-500 The software version for OB-500 or NP-500 The printer engine firmware virsion
3. Press Reset to exit and return to the standby mode.
3.9.2 Printer Test

The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below. Checkered Squares Paper scum
Ladder
Gradation
Margin Pattern
6% Pattern
3-173
1. Press Setting, *, 0, 9. 2. Select [Test Pattern Print].
3. Select the desired pattern.
4. Select the paper to print, and press [Enter].
5. Select [Yes]. The selected pattern will print continuously. Note: Press [No] to cancel the printing. 6. Press STOP to finish printing and return to standby.
3.9.3 Port Status

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3-174
3.9.5 Set Background Level

The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced; therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed. The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents. Note: When you do this, prepare a plane white 11x17 sized paper in advance. 1. Press Setting, *, 0, 9. 2. Select [Background level].
3. Select the desired side to set the Background level.
4. If you have chosen [Back] or [Both], set an ledger(11x17) sized paper or a letter press start. If you have chosen [Front], press start. Note: To finish the operation without setting the background level, press Reset. 5. After setting, the machine will return to standby.
on the ADF, and
3-175
3.9.5 CIS Roller Cleaning

This function enables you to rotate the CIS roller little by little. Use this function to clean the CIS roller, because the roller cannot be rolled by the hands. Note: When you do this, prepare a wiping cloth in advance. Open the ADF cover and the inside cover so that you can clean the CIS roller.
1. Press Setting, *, 0, 9. 2. Select [Roller Cleaning].
3. When you press [Rotate], the CIS roller rolls a little. 4. Wipe the roller and repeat steps 3 to 4, until all sites of the roller becomes clean. 5. Press RESET to finish cleaning and return to standby.
3.10 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the machine to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique switch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each. To print it, press Setting, *, 1, 0, and then [Yes]. After printing, the machine will return to standby.
3-176
3.11 Factory Functions

This factory functions provide several machine testes. Included are followings. 01. 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11. 12. Factory functions list LED test LCD test Panel test SRAM check DRAM check RTC test Page memory check ATDC adjustment Adjust Touch Panel Generate Bell test Toner supply mode
3.11.1 Function List

1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1.
2. Select [Factory Function List].
3. Press [Yes]. A list of the Factory functions and Test functions will be printed. After printing, the machine will return to standby.
3-177
3.11.2 LED Test

1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select [LED test].
3. Pressing Setting toggles between All LEDs turn on and off. 4. Press Reset to return to standby.
3.11.3 LCD Test

This mode displays two test patterns in LCD. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select [LCD test].
3. Pressing Setting toggles between all dots on the LCD turn on and off. 4. Press Reset to return to factory function.
3.11.4 Panel Test

1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select [Panel test].
3. As each button on the keypad or on the LCD panel is pressed, a representative name as show in the 3-178
following table will be displayed. Key COPY FAX SCANNER PRINTER Panel Key (4) Indication in LCD Copy Fax Scanner Printer Panel Key 1 Panel Key 2 Panel Key 3 Panel Key 4 Reset Voice Guide Menu List Key Macro program Numeric keys (0 ~ 9, *, #) Fax Cancel/ Job Confirm. Interrupt Stop Indication in LCD Macro prog. Numeric keys (0 ~ 9, *, #) Fax Cancel Interrupt Stop
Reset Voice Guidance Settings List
Start Energy Save One-touch keys (01 ~ 84)
Start Energy Save One-touch keys (01 ~ 84)
4. Press Stop twice to return to factory function. Note: and symbols are for factory use (for factory inspection).
3.11.5 SRAM Check

This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time, TTI, etc are stored. Note: When this test is executed, All RAM Clear will be performed by the machine. The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select [SRAM Check].
3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key 01 to 06, then press Start. The HEX code is written to, then read from, memory. After that, the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. Then the machine will return to factory function.
3-179
3.11.6 DRAM Check

This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory. Note: When this test is performed, All DRAM Clear will be performed by the machine. The All RAM clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults. This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete. Note: Perform a DRAM test whenever a memory upgrade is added to the machine. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select [DRAM Check].
3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key 01 to 06, then press Start. 4. Enter the Check area (0 ~ 4). Note: Usually, enter 0.
Check area: 0: All DRAMs 1: The first half of DRAM (16MB) installed on the main PCB 2: The second half of DRAM (16MB) installed on the main PCB 3: The first half of the upgraded DRAM (16MB) 4: The second half of upgraded DRAM (16MB) 5. Press Start. The machine starts checking and the result(OK/NG) will be shown in the display. For example, if the check area is 0 with additional memory, you will see:
6. Press Reset to return to factory function. If you want to check other DRAMs, press STOP and repeat steps 4-5. 3-180
3.11.7 RTC(real time clock) Test

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3.11.8 Page memory check

When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select or to go to the next menu items.
3. Select [Page Memory Check].
4. Enter the Check area (All, 1 - 3). Note: Usually, select [All]. Check area: 1: The Page memory installed on the main PCB 2: The second Page memory 3: The third Page memory 5. The machine starts checking and the result(OK/NG) will be shown in the display. If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (page 3-139), and then go back to step 1.
6. Select [End] to return to the standby. If you want to check other Page memory, repeat steps 3-5.
3-181
3.11.9 ATDC adjustment

This mode adjust the value of data read by the ATDC Sensor When a reused drum is set to a machine, the value of must be adjusted to the former machines value. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select or to go to the next menu items.
3. Select [ATDC adjustment].
4. Input the desired value using
or
, or numeric keypad.
5. Select [Enter] to save the setting. The machine returns to standby. Note: Press [Cancel] not to save the setting and return to standby.
3.11.10 Adjust Touch Panel

This adjustment makes the LCD to memorize the corner of the displayed area, so the displayed image comes in front of the LCD. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select or to go to the next menu items.
3. Select [Adjust Touch Panel].
4. Touch the lower left corner of the panel, and press Start.
5. Touch the upper right corner of the panel, and press Start. The machine goes back to standby. 3-182
3.11.11 Generate Bell Test

1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select or to go to the next menu items.
3. Select [Generate Bell Test], and the bell stars ringing.
4. Press Stop to stop . The machine goes back to factory function screen.
3.11.12 Toner supply mode

The toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C) of the developer in the Developer Mixing Chamber is 14% at default setting. This mode forces to supply the toner to the prescribed standard ratio, when it goes down for an unexpected reason. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 1. 2. Select or to go to the next menu items.
3. Select [Toner supply mode].
4. Select [ON] to activate this mode. 5. Press [Enter] to save this setting, and the machine goes back to standby.
3-183
3.12 Line Tests

This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are relay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.
3.12.1 Relay Test

This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 2.
2. Select the line you want test. If you do not attached the optional board for the second phone line, you can select only [LINE1].
3. Select [Relay].
4. Select the relay you want to test. When it is selected, it will be shaded.
5. Press Reset to return to standby.
3-184
3.12.2 Tonal Signal Test

The tonal signal test permits the machines output tones to be monitored. Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 2. 2. Select the line you want test. If you do not attached the optional board for the second phone line, you can select only [LINE1]. 3. Select [Tonal].
4. Select the desired tonal signal. Refer to the following table. Signal None(stop signal) 400 Hz tone 600 Hz tone 1100 Hz tone 1300 Hz tone 2100 Hz tone 3000 Hz tone 3400 Hz tone FSK WHITE FSK BLACK FSK _W1_B1 V27_1200_2400 picture date V27_1600_4800 picture date V29_2400_7200 picture date V29_2400_9600 picture date V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 picture date Signal V17_2400_7200_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_7200_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_7200_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_12000_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_14400_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W4_B1 picture date
Signal V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600 V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400 V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800 V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200 V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600 VOICE MELODY GRBT
3-185
5. The output signal will begin. To stop outputting the tonal signal, press STOP. 6. To select another tonal signal, repeat steps 4-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press Reset to return to standby.
3.12.3 DTMF Output Test

The DTMF output test permits the machines DTMF tones to be monitored. Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 2. 2. Select the line you want test. If you do not attached the optional board for the second phone line, you can select only [LINE1]. 3. Select [DTMF].
4. Select the desired DTMF tone. Refer to the following table. Choice 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AST SHARP Signal DTMF0 (941 Hz 1336 Hz) DTMF1 (697 Hz 1209 Hz) DTMF2 (697 Hz 1336 Hz) DTMF3 (697 Hz 1477 Hz) DTMF4 (770 Hz 1209 Hz) DTMF5 (770 Hz 1336 Hz) DTMF6 (770 Hz 1477 Hz) DTMF7 (852 Hz 1209 Hz) DTMF8 (852 Hz 1336 Hz) DTMF9 (852 Hz 1477 Hz) DTMF6* (941 Hz 1209 Hz) DTMF# (941 Hz 1477 Hz) Choice ROW1 ROW2 ROW3 ROW4 COL1 COL2 COL3 COL4 Signal ROW1(697 Hz) ROW2(770 Hz) ROW3(852 Hz) ROW4(941 Hz) COL1(1209 Hz) COL2(1336 Hz) COL3(1447 Hz) COL4(1633 Hz)
5. The output signal will begin. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press STOP. 6. To select another DTMF tone, repeat step 4. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press Reset to return to standby.
3-186
3.13 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode

Important: The machines mirror carriage is fixed using the two pins at transferring. When installing the machine, screw the pin and turn them down and turn the power on. Then perform this mode. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 4.
2. Select [OFF]. Then press [Enter]. Important: If reshipping, turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then power off and mount the mirror carriage using two transport screws.
3-187
3.14 Consumable order sheet

When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Dealers fax number Customers name Place of the customer write his/her signature Block letter of customers signature Customers address Customers account Serial number of the unit Customers fax number registered by Initial setting mode (Setting, User Install). Order item Description of the order item Quantity of the order item 3-188
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Dealers name Dealers code Dealers telephone number Dealers fax number Comments Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds) Drum life time (261920 seconds) Drum used percentage Total print pages Number of print pages after toner bottle or drum unit was replaced. ROM version
3.14.1 Set the consumable order sheet

If using this feature, you should be enter following items:
Dealers code Dealers name (Suppliers name) Dealers telephone number Dealers fax number Customers Account # Customers name Customers address Customers telephone number Machine serial number Order sheet setting
Heres how: 1. Clear the junk data, if necessary (see Clear consumable order sheet, page 3-193). 2. Press Setting, *, 1, 5.
3. Select [Order Sheet].
4. Press [Dealer Code]. Enter the Dealers code The name may be up to 10 characters in length.
To type a lower-case letter, select [Lower]. To switch back for upper-case entries, press [Upper]. To enter spaces and symbols, select [Symbol] or [Space]. Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clear] to erase the left. To change just one character, move the cursor by cursor key. 3-189
5. Press [Enter] to save the dealers code. 6. Press [Dealer Name]. Enter the Dealers name (Suppliers name). The name may be up to 30 characters in length.
To type a lower-case letter, select [Lower]. To switch back for upper-case entries, press [Upper]. To enter spaces and symbols, select [Symbol] or [Space]. Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clear] to erase the left. To change just one character, move the cursor by cursor key. 7. Select [Enter] to save the dealers name. 8. Select [Dealer Tel No]. Enter the distributors telephone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
To enter the numbers, use the numeric keypad. 9. Press [Enter] to save the dealers telephone number 10. Select [Dealer Fax No].
Enter the dealers fax number. The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length. 11. Press [Enter] to save the dealers fax number.
3-190
12. Select [Cust Account #].
Enter the customers account number. The customers account number may be up to 10 characters in length. 13. Press [Enter] to save the customers code. 14. Select [Cust Name].
Enter the customers name. The customers name may be up to 30 characters in length. 15. Press [Enter] to save the customers name. 16. Select or to go to the next menu items.
17. Select [Address 1].
Enter the customers address for the upper row. The customers address may be up to 30 characters in length. 18. Press [Enter] to save the customers address for the upper row. 19. Select [Address2].
3-191
Enter the customers address for the lower row. The customers address may be up to 30 characters in length. 20. Press [Enter] to save the customers address. 21. Select [Cust Tel].
Enter the customers phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length. 22. Press [Enter] to save the customers phone number. 23. Select [Unit Serial #].
Enter the scanners serial number. The number may be up to 18 characters in length. 24. Press [Enter] to save the scanners serial number. 25. Select [Order Sheet Setting].
Determine if the machine prints or transmit the consumable order sheet when the printer consumable is near end of its designed life. If OFF is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even though the printer consumable is near end of its designed life. 26. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
3-192
3.14.2 Clear consumable order sheet

The consumable order sheet keeps several items. These are not cleared with the all RAM clear function (Setting, *, 0, 3). To clear the information of consumable order sheet: 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 5.
2. Select [Clear Order Sheet].
3. To clear the information of the consumable order sheet, select [Yes]. To finish the operation without clearing, press [No].
3-193
3.14.3 Order Sheet List

You can print out a sample of the consumable order sheet, to confirm whether it is entered correctly. To print out the consumable order sheet: 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 5.
2. Select [Order Sheet List].
3. To print the sample of the consumable order sheet, select [Yes]. To finish the operation without printing, press [No].
3.15 DRAM Clear

Note: Perform a DRAM clear whenever a memory upgrade is installed to the machine or the DRAM is replaced. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 6.
2. Select [Yes]. The DRAM will be cleared. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, select [No]. 3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.
3-194
3.16 Clear Life Monitor

The life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, printed, and transmitted. This mode clears these counters. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 7. 2. If the passcode (see 3.17 Set Service Code) is set, enter the passcode and press [Enter]. Otherwise, proceed to step 3.
or 3. Select [Yes]. The counters will be reset and the machine will return to standby. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, select [No].
3.17 Set Service Code

This is the code which one can protect the life monitor clear operation. If it is not necessary to protect to the life monitor clear operation, abort this operation without entering the passcode. 1. Press Setting, *, 1, 9.
2. If you will modify the passcode, enter the old passcode. If you will set the passcode for the first time, proceed to step 3. 3. Enter the desired four-digit numbers for the new passcode. 4. Select [Enter]. Note: To set the passcode at off and return to normal life monitor clear (not protect), change the code to 0000 by repeating steps 1-4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
3-195
3.18 Life Monitor Maintenance

When you replace the main control PCB, you should register the previous several counter values of the life monitor. 1. Before updating the software or replacing the main control PCB, you must write down the counter values of the life monitor. 2. To confirm the life monitor, see 3.9.1 Life Monitor, page 3-172. 3. After you write down the counter values of the life monitor, update the software or replace the main control PCB. 4. Press Setting, *, 2, 0.
5. Select [Printed pages].
Enter previous value of the printed pages using 6. Select [Enter]. 7. Select [# of pages printed after toner warning].
or
or numeric keypad.
Enter previous value of the total pages printed with the current drum. 8. Select [Enter].
3-196
9. Select [Toner Replaced Count].
Enter previous value of the toner replaced count. 10. Select [Enter]. 11. Select [# of drum replacements].
Enter previous value of the drum replaced count. 12. Select [Enter]. 13. Select [Enter]. The machine returns to its standby mode.
3-197
3.19 Internet fax service mode

This mode is available only when the optional Internet fax kit has been installed. This mode provides the following three items: Display the sum-check of internet fax board Clear the Administrators information All clear the registered parameters of the optional Internet fax board
3.19.1 Display the sum check

This mode displays the ROM version and sum check of the Internet fax board. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 4.
2. Select [Show Server Sumcheck].
3. Select [Enter]. The machine returns the network service mode.
3-198
3.19.2 Clear the Administrators information

This mode clears the registered information of the Administrator. You can clear the data for the Administrator using this mode. It is useful when the Administrators password is lost and unable to modify. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 4.
2. Select [Delete Manager].
3. Select [Yes]. The Administrators information will be deleted and the machine will return to standby. Note: To finish the operation without deleting the Administrators information, select [No].
3.19.3.All clear the registered parameters of the Internet fax board

You can clear all the data for the Internet fax kit. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 4.
2. Select [Clear Server Data].
3. Select [Yes]. The server data will be deleted and the machine will return to standby. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the server data, select [No]. 3-199
3.20 Multi Line Settings

This setting makes it possible to set the following menu for the optional second line: Memory Switches Unique Switches ECM mode Dialing Pause Number of Rings Note: To set the second line, it is necessary that the Unique Switch 096 bit 6 is set to On (1) in advance. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 8.
2. Select [Memory Switch].
Make the desired settings for the second line. See 3.3 Memory Switch adjustment, if necessary. 3. Press [Enter] till you come back to the menu in Step1. 4. Select [UniSwitch].
Make the desired settings for the second line. See 3.4 Unique Switch adjustment, if necessary. 5. Press [Enter] till you come back to the menu in Step1.
3-200
6. Select [ECM Mode].
Make the desired settings for the second line. 7. Press [Enter] 8. Select [Dialing Pause].
Make the desired settings for the second line using numeric keypad, or or ,
9. Press [Enter]. 10. Select [# of Rings].
Make the desired settings for the second line using numeric keypad, or 11. Select [Enter].
or
3.21 Flash Rom Sum Check

This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 9. 2. Select [Enter]. The machine returns to its standby mode.
3-201
3.22 Set Service Report

This setting makes it possible to send the service report automatically to the registered location.
3.22.1 Set the service report

If using this feature, you should be enter following items:
Report location 1 and 2 Where to send the service report. The muratec customer service number is entered as default of location 1 however you can change it. Report format Select between one page report or detailed report Period The report can be send ether once in a determined month or one a month on a designated date and time.
2. Select [Setting]. To activate the Service Report mode, press [On].
3. Press [Enter].
4. Now you can enter the detail for the report. Press [Report Location 1]. 5. Press [On].
3-202
6. Select [Enter] to save the setting. 7. Enter the fax number where to send the service report. The number of Muratec Customer Support Number is entered as initial, however you can overwrite it with another number.
8. Select [Enter] to save the setting. 9. Press [Report Location 2] to enter another location.
If you enter the second location, press [On] and repeat the Steps from 5 to 7 again. If another location is not needed, press [Enter] to close the screen. 10. Press [Report Format]. Select the report format between one page and a detailed.
11. Select [Enter] to save the setting.
3-203
12. Press [Period]. Select the reporting period between the following:
Interval The report will be sent once in some definite months. Monthly - The report will be sent at a designated time once a month. 13. Press [Enter]. 14-1. If you have selected Interval. Use the arrow key or the numeric keypad to set in how many months the report should be send.
14-2. If you have selected Monthly. Use the arrow key or the numeric keypads to set at which day and what time the report should be send.
15. Select [Enter] to save the setting.
3.22.2 Delete the service report setting

2. Press [Delete] to erase the service report setting. 3-204
3.23 Printer registration adjustment

This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source. For more detail, see 5.3 Adjustment in section5.
3.24 Printer Trouble Reset

This mode clears the service call. Perform this operation after solved the trouble. 1. Press Setting, *, 4, 5.
2. Select [Yes]. The service call will be cleared and the machine will return to standby. Note: To finish the operation without performing clearing, select [No].
3.25 Cleaning Mode

This mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface of them. 1. Press Setting, *, 4, 6.
2. The feed roller starts rotating. Open the ADF cover and clean feed roller A using a lens cleaning wiper or similar material saturated with alcohol. To clean feed roller B and C, open the Platen cover, and remove the plate press document and cover guide inner. 3. To rotate the registration roller, select [On] for the [Regist roller].
3-205
4. To stop rotating, close the covers and select [Enter]. Note: The pickup roller does not rotate when the ADF cover is open, so to clean it, rotate it manually.
Registration roller
Feed roller A
Feed roller C
Feed roller B
3.26 Voice Test

This mode makes it possible to hear the voice guidance. 1. Press Setting, *, 4, 7.
2. The voice guidance comes from the speaker one after another. 3. Press Reset to return to the standby mode. Note: The pickup roller does not rotate when the ADF cover is open, so to clean it, rotate it manually.
3-206
3.27 Bypass tray width adjustment

This mode is used to adjust the bypass tray width sensor after the tray is reassembled. 1. Press Setting, *, 4, 9.
2. Spread the bypass tray guide to its maximum, and select [Set].
3. Narrow the bypass tray guide to its minimum, and select [Set]. The machine adjust its sensor and returns to standby mode.
3.28 Key counter mode

If you have attached the key counter to the machine activate this mode to let it count the printed paper. 1. Press Setting, *, 5, 0.
2. Select [ON], and press [Enter]. The key counter mode will be activated. Note: To finish the operation deactivating this mode, select [OFF] ] and press [Enter].
3-207
3.29 Update the software

Heres instruction to update the software version of the Flash ROM. Important: To update the software, it needs two flash ROM writers and nine (or seven) of the latest versions of EP-ROMs ROM0, ROM1, ROM2, ROM3, ROM4, ROM5, ROM6, CGROM0 and CGROM1.
1. Turn off the power switch. 2. Confirm that the JP1 JP3 are set to ON. 3. Set the BOOTROM and the six ROMs to the Flash ROM writer. Note: Be careful of the direction of the ROMs when you attach them. 4. Remove the ROM cover and connect the cables as follows: Flash ROM writer Main control PCB P1 <---------------------> P6 P2 <---------------------> P7 5. Turn the power on. 0 will be indicated on the right ROM NO. and 1 will be on the left ROM NO. Dots will be lighted on the CHECK SUMs. 6. The Flash ROM writer erases the current program in the machine, then starts writing the new program to the machine.
3-208
7. At the end of this operation (it takes a few minutes), the Flash ROM writer indicates the Check Sums of the last ROMs. 8. Pressing the SW1, confirm the Check Sums as follows: Check Sum of ROM0, Check Sum of ROM1 (Pressing SW1) Check Sum of ROM2, Check Sum of ROM3 (Pressing SW1) Check Sum of ROM4, Check Sum of ROM5
(Pressing SW1)
If the Check Sum indicated on the Flash ROM writer and the one written on the ROM are not same, confirm the cable connection and the ROM attaching, then perform from step 1 again. 9. Turn off the power switch, then disconnect the cables. 10. Set the JP2 of the second Flash ROM writer and to ON. 11. Connect the second Flash ROM writer and turn the power on. 12. At the end of this operation (it takes a few minutes), the Flash ROM writer indicates the Check Sums of the last ROMs. 13. Turn off the power switch, then disconnect the cables. 10. (Re-attach the rear cover using the three screws.)
Error code
If the error occurred during writing, the following error code will be appeared: E.02: Maker code read error E.04: Sector erase error E.05: Writing error E.06: Sum check error E.07: Time out error When the above error occurred, turn off the power switch, confirm the cable connection and the ROM attaching, then perform from step 1 again.
3-209
3.30 Quick Initial settings

At installation of MFX-2530, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures. You can do the following setting with continuously. 1. User install 2. Consumable order sheet settings 3. Service report settings Note: Before starting the installation settings, clear the memory by pressing Setting, *, 0, 2, ENTER. Entering initial settings (Setting, User Install) 1-1. To start Initial setting mode, press Setting, *, 9, 9.
1-2.
Press [Language]. Select the language between English, French or Spanish.
1-3. 1-4.
Press [Enter] to save the setting. Press [Time Setting]. Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad and arrow keys. Enter time in 24-hour format.
1-5. Press [Enter] to save the setting. 1-6. Press [Set Daylight Saving]. When the setting is On, your machine automatically recognizes DST at 2 am on the appropriate switchover Sundays each year. When the setting is Off, no automatic change will occur.
3-210
1-7. 1-8.
Press [Enter] to save the setting. Press [Comm. Line]. Select the line mode according to your using phone line.
1-9.
Press [Enter] to save the setting.
1-10. Press [Reception Mode]. Select the desired reception mode.
1-11. Press [Enter] to save the setting. 1-12. Press [DialTone Detection]. Select the dial tone between On and Off. Note: Usually set to [Off] for dial tone detection.
1-13. Press [Enter] to save the setting. 1-14. Press to go to the next screen.
3-211
1-15. Press [TTI Enter/Edit].You can enter three TTIs. The procedure for entering TTI 1, 2 and 3 are the same.
1-16. Press [TTI 1]. Enter the TTI by pressing keys on the touch screen.
To type a lower-case letter, press [Lower]. To switch back for upper-case entries, press [Upper]. To enter spaces, press [Space]. To enter numbers, use the numeric keypad. To enter special characters and symbols, press [Symbol]. _, . and @ are placed on the alphabet entry screen. 1-17. Press [Enter] to save the setting. 1-18. Repeat Step 16 and 17 and enter TTI2 and TTI3 as needed. 1-19. Press [Standard TTI]. Select the standard TTI among the entered TTIs. 1-20. Press [Enter] to save the setting. 1-21. Press [TTI Number]. Enter the users telephone number by pressing the numeric keypad. 1-22. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
3-212
Consumable order sheet settings 2-1. The LCD now shows the Consumable order sheet settings.
2-2.
Select [Order Sheet].
2-3.
Press [Dealer Code]. Enter the Dealers code The name may be up to 10 characters in length.
To type a lower-case letter, select [Lower]. To switch back for upper-case entries, press [Upper]. To enter spaces and symbols, select [Symbol] or [Space]. Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clear] to erase the left. To change just one character, move the cursor by cursor key. 2-4. Press [Enter] to save the dealers code.
2-5. Press [Dealer Name]. Enter the Dealers name (Suppliers name). The name may be up to 30 characters in length.
To type a lower-case letter, select [Lower]. 3-213
To switch back for upper-case entries, press [Upper]. To enter spaces and symbols, select [Symbol] or [Space]. Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clear] to erase the left. To change just one character, move the cursor by cursor key. 2-6. Select [Enter] to save the dealers name.
2-7. Select [Dealer Tel No]. Enter the distributors telephone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
To enter the numbers, use the numeric keypad. 2-8. 2-9. Press [Enter] to save the dealers telephone number Select [Dealer Fax No].
Enter the dealers fax number. The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length. 2-10. Press [Enter] to save the dealers fax number. 2-11. Select [Cust Account #].
Enter the customers account number. The customers account number may be up to 10 characters in length. 2-12. Press [Enter] to save the customers code.
3-214
2-13. Select [Cust Name].
Enter the customers name. The customers name may be up to 30 characters in length. 2-14. Press [Enter] to save the customers name. 2-15. Select or to go to the next menu items.
2-16. Select [Address 1].
Enter the customers address for the upper row. The customers address may be up to 30 characters in length. 2-17. Press [Enter] to save the customers address for the upper row. 2-18. Select [Address2].
Enter the customers address for the lower row. The customers address may be up to 30 characters in length. 2-19. Press [Enter] to save the customers address.
3-215
2-20. Select [Cust Tel].
Enter the customers phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length. 2-21. Press [Enter] to save the customers phone number. 2-22. Select [Unit Serial #].
Enter the scanners serial number. The number may be up to 18 characters in length. 2-23. Press [Enter] to save the scanners serial number. 2-24. Select [Order Sheet Setting].
Determine if the machine prints or transmit the consumable order sheet when the printer consumable is near end of its designed life. If OFF is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even though the printer consumable is near end of its designed life. 2-25.Press [Enter] to save the setting.
3-216
Service report settings 3-1. The LCD will show:
3-2.
Select [Setting]. To activate the Service Report mode, press [On].
3-3.
Press [Enter].
3-4. 3-5.
Now you can enter the detail for the report. Press [Report Location 1]. Press [On].
3-6.
Select [Enter] to save the setting.
3-217
3-7. Enter the fax number where to send the service report. The number of Muratec Customer Support Number is entered as initial, however you can overwrite it with another number.
3-8. 3-9.
Select [Enter] to save the setting. Press [Report Location 2] to enter another location.
If you enter the second location, press [On] and repeat the Steps from 5 to 7 again. If another location is not needed, press [Enter] to close the screen. 3-10. Press [Report Format]. Select the report format between one page and a detailed.
3-11. Select [Enter] to save the setting. 3-12. Press [Period]. Select the reporting period between the following:
Interval The report will be sent once in some definite months. Monthly - The report will be sent at a designated time once a month. 3-13. Press [Enter].
3-218
3-14-1.If you have selected Interval. Use the arrow key or the numeric keypad to set in how many months the report should be send.
3-14-2. If you have selected Monthly. Use the arrow key or the numeric keypads to set at which day and what time the report should be send.
3-15. Select [Enter] to save the setting.
3-219
Section4 Troubleshooting Procedures

4.1 Troubleshooting Outline
Before troubleshooting a unit check the following:
Is the power cord correctly connected to the machine? Is the telephone handset and the telephone line cord connected correctly? Is there paper in the paper cassette? Are all covers closed correctly?
Before removing any portions of the machine or making any adjustments be sure the power cord is disconnected from the unit. Check the following:
The power source should be rated according to unit specifications. The unit should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages may
vary.
The unit should be installed on a flat, level surface. The ambient temperature and relative humidity surrounding the unit should be 50F to 95F (10C to
35C) at 15% to 85% humidity with no condensation. The unit should be located in a well ventilated area. The unit should receive necessary cleaning and maintenance.
The unit should be installed:
Away from heat sources and heating or cooling vents. Away from water heaters, steam generators, humidifiers or other areas of high humidity. Away from dusty areas. Away from areas where chemical fumes or gasses are generated or may collect. Away from areas exposed to direct sunlight.
Check the consumable:
Verify that the recording paper supply is adequate and that it is high- or standard-quality 20lb.
xerographic bond. Verify that the recording paper has been stored away from moisture and damp areas. Verify that the recording paper has not been damaged in any way.
4-1
4.2 Document feeder problems

Mechanical troubles Trouble The Documents are not fed / skew. Check item Is the pick-up roller dirty or worn? Is the separator roller capable to feed the document? Do the motors runs? Action Clean or replace the pickup roller. Clean the separator roller. Check the harness are plugged. Replace the motor. Check the harness are plugged. Replace the clutch. Close the cover properly. Remove it. Use the FBS to scan.
Do the clutches working?
The Documents jams while feeding.
Is the scanner cover closed properly? Is there any substances inside the scanner area? Are the original documents conform to the specifications designed for use in the machine and that they are not damaged in any way? Are the pages of the document not stuck together from glue, wet or damp correction fluid, tape, etc.?
Use the FBS to scan.
Place less documents to Are the number of documents the ADF at once. placed into the feeder not exceeding its maximum capacity?
Sensor troubles Trouble Check item The machine does not beep, when Sensor DS1 the document is fed to the ADF. The documents are not scanned, Sensor DS2 or DS3(the back and do not stop an the end point. side, Duplex only) Start point / end point is not usual. The scanned size is not correct. Sensor DA3 or DB4 The alarm sounds after the documents are scanned and whine Sensor DS2, DS1, DSS, SRS, they are coming out. The alarm sounds after the scanned DS3 documents come out. Door open is detected. Top up is detected. Door interlock sensor Sensor APS
Action Replace sensor DS1.
Replace sensor DS2 or DS3 Replace sensor DA3 or DB4 Replace sensor DS2, DS1, DSS, SRS, DS3. Replace interlock switch. Replace sensor APS.
4-2
4.3 Mirror Carriage Error

Trouble The Mirror carriage does not move. Check item Is the timing belt in joint? Is the inverter harness not entangled? Is the exposure harness not entangled? Is the cable link not dropped off? Are the transport screws turned down? Action If it is out of the joint, place it back. Check the harness. Check the harness. Reattach the cable link. Use a Philips driver and turn the screws down. Press, Setting, *, 1, 4, and turn the mirror carriage mode off. Replace the home sensor. Close the cover properly. Check the belt and remove the obstruction. Check the belt and reattach it to the motor.
A strange noise from FBS.
Home sensor. Is the scanner cover closed properly? Is the timing belt interfered with something? Is the timing belt correctly attached to the motor?
4.5 Transmit Error

Symptom: Check message prints after attempting transmission. Suggested corrective action: 1. Reference the error code on the check massage or the journal to the error code list contained in this section.
4.6 Cannot transmit

Symptom: The unit will not transmit Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify the telephone line cord is properly installed and plugged into the correct type of wall jack. 2. Check for dial tone at the unit and wall jack. If no dial tone is present at the unit, check the NCU PCB. 3. Verify that the correct telephone number has been dialed or that the correct telephone number is programmed in the autodialer. 4. Insure Security TX turned off. 5. Place a call through the monitor and check for excessive noise or interference on the telephone line. 6. Verify that the remote location is capable of receiving by checking the following: 6.1 Place a call to the remote machine and verify that if auto answers. 6.2 Insure that the remote machine does not have closed network or block junk fax turned on. 6.3 Transmit to another location. 7. Check the operation of NCU PCB and the main control PCB.
4.7 Receive Errors

Symptom: Check message prints after attempting a reception. Suggested corrective action: 1. Reference the error code on the check message or the journal to the error code list contained in this section.
4-3
4.8 Recording paper misfeed

4.8.1 Electrical Components Check Procedure
If a paper misfeed or malfunction occurs, perform the following operations to check the condition of the electrical components.
1. Sensor Step 1 Check Does the input signal of the control board change when the sensor light is interrupted? (H L, L H) Result NO YES Action Replace the sensor. Replace the control board.
2. Switch Step 1 Check Does the input signal (NO) of the control board change from L to H when the switch is activated? Result NO YES Action Replace the switch. Replace the control board.
4-4
3. Solenoid Step 1 Check Does the output signal of the control board change from H to L when the solenoid is activated? Result NO YES Action Replace the control board. Replace the solenoid.
4. Clutch Step 1 Check Does the output signal of the control board change from H to L when the clutch is activated? Result NO YES Action Replace the control board. Replace the clutch.
4-5
5. Motor Step 1 Check Does the LOCK signal of the control board switch to H when the machine goes into standby? Does the REM signal of the control board change from H to L when the motor is turned on? Result NO Action Replace the control board. Replace the motor.
YES
Replace the motor.
Step 1
Check Does the output signal of the control board change from H to L when the clutch is activated?
Result NO YES
Action Replace the control board. Replace the clutch.
Step 1
Check Are the relay connector of the motor and the print jack of the control board correctly connected? YES
Result Action YES Replace the motor or the control board. NO Connect the connector or the print jack.
4-6
4.8.2 Sensor Check List

[Printer]
Symbol PC1 PC4 PC2 PC116PF PC126PF PC18 PC19 Panel Display Bypass/ Duplex Timing Roller Exit 2nd Take-up 3rd Take-up 4th Take-up Bypass Tray Paper Empty FD Size 1 Parts/Signal Name Synchronizing Roller Sensor Exit Sensor 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor Manual Bypass Tray Set signal Manual Feed Tray Paper Empty Sensor Manual Feed Tray FD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 Manual Feed Tray FD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 2 Manual Feed Tray FD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 3 Manual Feed Tray FD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 4 Manual Feed Tray LiftUp Sensor Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor Switch Back Unit Sensor Duplex Unit Set signal Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Manual Paper Size Detection Unit Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Not set Paper not present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Unblocked Paper present Paper present Paper present Out of position When opened 0 Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Set Paper present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Blocked Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Set When closed Master Board (PWB-A) Input Board CN/PJ No. PJ11A-5 PJ18A11 PJ22A-9 PPJ6C2 PF-8 PJ11C2 PF-2 PJ23A-3 PJ13A-6
PC20
FD Size 2
PJ13A-9
PC21
FD Size 3
PJ13A12 PJ12A-3
PC22
FD Size 4
PC29 PC24 PC25 PC26 PC23 VR1
Bypass Tray Pick-up Duplex Paper Passage 1 Duplex Paper Passage 1 Dup. Duplex Set Duplex Cover Bypass Paper Width Detect
PJ12A11 PJ20A-5 PJ20A-8 PJ19A-9 PJ20A-1 PJ20A11 PJ12A-7
Analog value
4-7
Symbol PC7 PC8 PC9 PC6 PC11
Panel Display 1st Drawer Drawer Set Paper Near Empty Paper Empty Surface CD Size 1
Parts/Signal Name 1st Drawer Set Sensor 1st Drawer Paper Near Empty Sensor 1st Drawer Paper Empty Sensor 1st Drawer Paper LiftUp Sensor 1st Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 1st Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 Paper Size Detection Board 1
Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Set Out of position Unblocked Blocked Paper not present At upper limit Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Set Unblocked Paper not present At upper Limit Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Out of position Paper present Not at upper limit Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Out of position Blocked Paper presemt Not at upper limit Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Set Set Not set Set
Input Board Master Board (PWB-A)
CN/PJ No. PJ23A-6 PJ23A-3 PJ15A-8 PJ115A-11 PJ23A-9
PC10
CD Size 2
PJ23A-12
PWB11
FD Size 1 FD Size 2 FD Size 3 FD Size 4
PJ24A-1 PJ24A-2 PJ24A-3 PJ24A-4 Master Board (PWB-A) PJ25A-6 PJ25A-3 PJ22A-3 PJ22A-6 PJ26A-3
PC13 PC14 PC15 PC12 PC17
2nd Drawer
Drawer Set Paper Near Empty Paper Empty Surface CD Size 1
PC16
CD Size 2
PWB12
FD Size 1 FD Size 2 FD Size 3 FD Size 4
2nd Drawer Set Sensor 2nd Drawer Paper Near-Empty Sensor 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor 2nd Drawer Paper LiftUp Sensor 2nd Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 2nd Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 2 Paper Size Detection Board
PJ26A-6
PJ26A-7 PJ26A-8 PJ26A-9 PJ26A-10 PJ22A-12 Master Board (PWB-A) PJ17A-3 PJ15A-14 PJ21A-4
PC3 S2 PC5 S4 Toner/ Side Cover
2nd Take-up Side Cover Front Cover Sub Hopper
Right Lower Door Set Sensor Door Interlock Switc Front Door Set Sensor Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch
Toner not loaded: 1 and 0 alternately displayed.
4-8
Symbol M2 M1 M9 M4
Panel Display Drive Motor Detect Main Motor I/U Motor Polygon Motor Cooling Fan (Power Supply) Cooling Fan Motor I/U Cooling Fan Engine Fusing Thermistor 1 Fusing Thermistor 2 ATDC Sensor Drum Thermistor Temperature Humidity I/C Discrimination
Parts/Signal Name Transport Motor Imaging Unit Motor Polygon Motor Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor Cooling Fan Motor I/U Cooling Fan Motor
Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 When When turning stopped When When turning stopped When When turning stopped When When turning stopped When turning When turning Analog value Analog value Analog value Analog value Analog value Analog value Analog value When stopped When stopped
Input Board Master Board (PWB-A)
CN/PJ No. PJ28A-7 PJ28A14 PJ2A-4 PJ33A-3
M5 M6
PJ11A-8 PJ15A-3
TH1 TH2 UN2 TH4 TH3 -
Fusing Roller Thermistor Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor ATDC Sensor Drum Thermistor Temperature/Humidity Sensor I/C Type Detection signal
Master Board (PWB-A)
PJ18A-6 PJ18A-2 PJ5A-1 PJ11A10 PJ16A-6 PJ16A-4 PJ5A-5 PJ5A-6
4-9
[3rd Cassette]
Symbol Panel Display Parts/Signal Name Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Out of Set position Unblocked Paper not present Raised Position Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Door Set Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Open Paper present Blocked Paper present Not raised Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Closed Paper not present Input Board CN/PJ No.
PC112PF PC113PF PC115PF PC114PF PC118PF PC119P PWB-I PF
3rd Drawer Set Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper NearEmpty Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor 3rd Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 3rd Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 2 3rd Drawer FD Paper Size Detecting Board
Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
PJ3C2 PF-9 PJ4C2 PF-3 PJ6C2 PF-6 PJ6C2 PF-3 PJ3C2 PF-3
CD Size 2
PJ3C2 PF-6
FD Size 1
PJ3C2 PF10 PJ3C2 PF11 PJ3C2 PF12 PJ3C2 PF13 PJ6C2 PF15 PJ6C2 PF-8
FD Size 2
FD Size 3
FD Size 4
PC111PF PC116PF
Take- up Lower Pick-Up
[4th Cassette
Symbol Panel Display Parts/Signal Name Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Out of Set position Unblocked Paper not present Raised Position Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value Maximum value 4th Drawer Paper TakeUP Sensor Paper present Blocked Paper present Not raised Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Not at maximum value Paper not present Input Board CN/PJ No.
PC121PF PC122PF PC124PF PC123PF PC127PF PC128PF PWB-I PF
4th Drawer Set Sensor 4th Drawer Paper NearEmpty Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Empty Sensor 4th Drawer Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor 4th Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 4th Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 2 4th Drawer FD Paper Size Detecting Board
Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
PJ8C2 PF-3 PJ8C2 PF11 PJ10C2 PF6 PJ10C2 PF3 PJ7C2 PF-3
CD Size 2
PJ7C2 PF-6
FD Size 1
PJ8C2 PF-4
FD Size 2
PJ8C2 PF-5
FD Size 3
PJ8C2 PF-6
FD Size 4
PJ8C2 PF-7
PC125PF
Pick-Up
PJ10C2 PF8
4-10
[LCC]
Symbol PC2LCC PC1LCC PC9LCC PC3LCC PWB-E LCC Panel Display Vertical Trans Take- Up Shift Tray Paper Empty Main Tray Paper Empty Paper Empty Parts/Signal Name LCC Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Take-Up Sensor Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Upper Paper Empty Sensor Paper Empty Board Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Paper Paper not present present Paper Paper not present present Paper Paper not present present Paper Paper not present present Paper present Lower Overrun Raised (Lift-Up) Lowered (Lift-Up) Position Not lowered Home (Shift) Shift Tray Stop Position Lower Limit Sensor Tray Upper Limit Sesor Tray Lower Position Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Tray Set Sensor Right Lower Door Sensor Paper Descent Key Incorrect operation Raised Position Lowered At home Return position Blocked Blocked At home Open Open On Paper not present Correct operation Not raised Not lowered Not at home Not at return position Unblocked Unblocked Not at home Closed Closed Off Input Board Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) CN/PJ No. PJ5C1 LCC5 PJ5C1 LCC2 PJ3C1 LCC4 PJ5C1 LCC9 PJ3C1 LCC6
PC7LCC PC4LCC PC13LCC PC12LCC PC11LCC PC10LCC PC8LCC PC14LCC PC6LCC PC5LCC UN1LCC
Paper Empty Board (PWB-E LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC)
PJ3C1 LCC2 PJ5C1 LCC-12 PJ3C1 LCC9 PJ3C1 LCC8 PJ3C1 LCC8 PJ3C1 LCC5 PJ3C1 LCC3 PJ4C1 LCC1 J7C1 LCC-2 PJ5C1 LCC15 PJ2H LCC10
Elev. Mtr Pulse Shift Mtr Pulse Dividing Position Cassette Open Right Door Open Manual Button Down
[Duplex Unit/Switch back Unit]

Symbol PC24 PC25 PC26 PC23 Panel Display Duplex Paper Passage 1 Duplex Paper Passage 2 Dup. Duplex Set Duplex Cover Parts/Signal Name Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor Switch Back Unit Sensor Duplex Unit Set signal Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Paper Paper not present present Paper Paper not present present Paper Paper not present present Set Open Not set Closed Input Board Control Board (PWB-A CN/PJ No. PJ20A-5 PJ20A-8 PJ27A-9 PJ20A-1 PJ20A-11
4-11
[2Bin tray]
Symbol PC1JOB PC2JOB Panel Display Upper Bin Full Upper Bin Empty Switch Back Unit Set Job Tray Set Parts/Signal Name Paper Full Detection Sensor Paper Empty Detection Sensor Switch Back Unit Set signal Job Tray Set signal Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Blocked Blocked Set Set Unblocked Unblocked Not set Not set Input Board CN/PJ No. PJ27A-8 PJ27A-5 PJ19A-10 PJ27A-1
Control Board (PWB-A)
4-12
[Finisher / Punch Unit]

Symbol PC5-FN PC4-FN S3-FN S2-FN S1-FN Panel Display Paper Passage (Middle) Paper Passage (Feed in) Elevate Tray Raise/ Lowered Shutter Status Front Door Set Parts/Signal Name Transport Sensor Entrance Sensor Elevator Tray Upper/ Lower Limit Switch Shutter Detection Switch Front Cover Open/Close Detection Switch Punch Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor Alignment Home Position Sensor1 Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 Shutter Home Position Sensor Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor Exit Roller Home Position Storage Tray Detecting Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Self-Priming Sensor Staple Empty Detection Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Punch Positioning Sensor 1 Punch Positioning Sensor 2 Punch Trash Full Transport Jam Detection Switch Crease Roller Home Position Sensor Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Paper Paper not present present Paper Paper not present present Raised Not raised Position Closed Closed Blocked Blocked Blocked Set Blocked At home At home At home At home At home Paper present Blocked Blocked Blocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Closed At home Open Open Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Not set Unblocked Not at home Not at home Not at home Not at home Not at home Paper not Present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Unblocked Open Not at home PJ12A FN-8 PJ9A FN-3 PJ9A FN-4 PJ10A FN-2 PJ9A FN-7 PJ13A-FN-3 PJ13A FN-6 PJ9A FN-5 PJ17A FN-7 PJ20A FN-7 PJ13A FN-8 PJ17A FN-3 PJ16A FN-8 PJ16A FN-9 PJ16A FN-7 PJ12A FN-2 PJ12A FN-5 PJ10A FN-2 PJ22A FN-1 PJ2C SK+3 Input Board Q CN/PJ No. PJ20A FN-9 PJ25A FN-4 PJ6A FN-7 PJ6A FN-3 PJ5A FN-3
PC2-PK C14FN PC15FN PC3-FN PC6-FN C7-FN PC16FN PC11FN PC12FN PC8-FN PC10FN PC3-PK PC4-PK PC1-PK S4-FN PC22SK
Punch Pulse Lower (Elev) Surface (Elev.) Optional Tray (Elevate) Elevator Tray Position Align Home 1 Align Home 2 Home (Shutter) Paddle Home (Exit) Exit R Home Empty (Finisher) Staple Home (CD) Self-Priming Staple Empty Staple Home Punch Pos. 1 Punch Pos. 2 Punch Wastes Full Middle Guide Home (Paper Hold R)
4-13
4.8.3 Initial Checks

When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial checks.
Check Item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Action Replace paper. Replace paper. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. Set as necessary.
Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operational and checked for correct operation?
Correct or replace the defective actuator.
4.8.4 Misfeed display

When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location (flashing), and paper location (lit) are displayed on the Touch Panel of the copier. Misfeed location 1st Drawer Take-Up Section Image Transfer Section Fusing Section/Paper Exit Section Duplex Unit Transport Section Duplex Unit Take-Up Section 2nd Drawer Take-Up Section Vertical Transport Section Manual Bypass 3rd Drawer Take-Up Section 4th Drawer Take-Up Section LCC (Large capacity cassette) Finisher Action See page 4-17 See page 4-18 See page 4-19 See page 4-20 See page 4-21 See page 4-22 See page 4-23 See page 4-24 See page 4-25 See page 4-23 See page
<Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure> Open the corresponding door, clear the misfed sheet of paper, and then close the door.
4-14
4.8.5 Misfeed-Detecting Sensor Layout

With 3rd, 4th cabinette, Switchback Unit, Duplex Unit.
Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) Exit Sensor (PC4)
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Duplex Unit Lower Sensor (PC25) 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2)
3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF)
4-15
With LCC cabinette, Switchback Unit, Duplex Unit.
Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) Exit Sensor (PC4) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2)
LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCC) Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1-LCC)
4-16
4.8.6 Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures

(1) 1st Drawer Take-Up Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection Size error detection
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch has been energized. The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the sensor has been blocked by the paper. The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is unblocked before the set period of time.
<Action> Relevant Electrical Components Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Master Board PWB-A 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch 1 (CL3)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4
Initial checks PC1 sensor check Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop are at correct position to accommodate paper. Replace PWB-A
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON) PWB-A PJ11A-2 (ON) G-1 G-1
4-17
(2) Image Transfer Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Image Transfer Section
Detection of paper remaining at Image Transfer Section <Action>
Description The Exit Sensor (PC4) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Synchronizing Roller Clutch is set to OFF. The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the sensor has been unblocked by the paper. The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Relevant Electrical Components Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Master Board PWB-A Exit Sensor (PC4) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL1)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4 4-5
1 2 3 4 5
Initial checks PC1 sensor check PC4 sensor check CL1 operation check Replace PWB-A
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON) PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON) PWB-A PJ11A-2 (ON) G-1 page 4-81 I-1 page 4-81 G-1 page 4-81
4-18
(3) Fusing Section/Paper Exit Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Description Fusing Section/ The Exit Sensor (PC4) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has Paper Exit Section elapsed after the Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) has been blocked by the Misfeed detection paper. The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Sensor (PC4) has been unblocked by the paper. Detection of paper The Exit Sensor (PC4) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door remaining at or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Fusing Section/Paper Exit Section <Action> Relevant Electrical Components Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Master Board PWB-A Exit Sensor (PC4) Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4 4-4
1 2 3 4 5
Initial checks PC1 sensor check PC4 sensor check PC26 sensor check Replace PWB-A
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A5(ON) PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON) PWB-A PJ19A-9 (ON) G-1 page 4-81 I-1 page 4-81 D-8 page 6-63
4-19
(4) Switchback Unit/Duplex Unit Transport Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Description Turnover Unit / The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set period of Duplex Unit Transtime has elapsed after the Exit Sensor (PC4) has been unblocked by the port Section mispaper. feed detection The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is blocked by the paper. The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is blocked by the paper. Detection of paper The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is blocked when the Power Switch is set remaining in the to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is Turnover Unit / reset. Duplex Unit Trans- The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is blocked when the Power port Section Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. <Action> Relevant Electrical Components Exit Sensor (PC4) Master Board PWB-A Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4
1 2 3 4 5 6
Initial checks PC4 sensor check PC26 sensor check PC24 sensor check PC25 sensor check Replace PWB-A
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON) PWB-A PJ19A-9 (ON) PWB-A PJ20A5(ON) PWB-A PJ20A-8 (ON) I-1 page 4-81 D-8 page 6-63 I-1 page 6-63 C-4 page 6-63
4-20
(5) Duplex Unit Take-Up Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Duplex Unit Take - Up Section Misfeed detection
Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) has been blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper remaining in the Duplex Unit Take - Up Section
The Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
<Action> Relevant Electrical Components Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Master Board PWB-A Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC26)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4
1 2 3 4
Initial checks PC1 sensor check PC25 sensor check Replace PWB-A
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON) PWB-A PJ20A-8 (ON) G-1 page 4-81 C-4 page 6-63
4-21
(6) 2nd Drawer Take-Up Section/Vertical Transport Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Description Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the 2nd Drawer Vertical Take- Up Section / Transport Sensor (PC2) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Vertical Transport 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch has been energized. Section misfeed The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set period detection of time has elapsed after the leading edge of the paper has blocked 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2). Detection of paper remaining in the Take - Up Section /Vertical Transport Section The 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
<Action> Relevant Electrical Components Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Master Board PWB-A 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2) 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Clutch 2 (CL4)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4 4-5
1 2 3 4 5
Initial checks PC1 sensor check PC2 sensor check CL4 operation check Replace PWB-A
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON) PWB-A PJ22A-9 (ON) PWB-A PJ21A-10 (ON) G-1 page 4-81 H-1 page 4-81 E-11 page 4-82
Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Exit Sensor PC3 Duplex Unit Turnover Motor M1 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Duplex Unit Transport Motor M2 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL2 Duplex Unit Control Board PWB-A Duplex Unit Transport Sensor PC2 Master Board PWB-A
4-22
(7) Manual Bypass Take-Up Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch has been energized.
Detection of The 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Power paper remaining in Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or the Paper Takemalfunction is reset. Up section
<Action> Relevant Electrical Components 2nd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2) Master Board PWB-A Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch (CL5)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4
1 2 3 4
Initial checks PC2 sensor check CL5 operation check Replace PWB-A
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ22A-9 (ON) PWB-A PJ13A14(ON) H-1 page 4-81 D-2 page 4-81
4-23
(8) 3rd Drawer Take-Up Section Misfeed (Option) <Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 3rd Drawer Paper Feed Motor has been energized.
Detection of The 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the paper remaining in Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed the Paper Takeor malfunction is reset. Up The 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the section Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. <Action> Relevant Electrical Components 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Control Board PWB-C2 PF 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) 3rd Drawer Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4 4-6
1 2 3 4 5
Initial checks PC117-PF sensor check PC116-PF sensor check M122-PF operation check Replace PWB-C2 PF
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-8 F-2 page 4-81 F-3 page 4-81 E-2 page 4-81
4-24
(9) 4th Drawer Take-Up Section Misfeed (Option) <Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 4th Drawer Paper Feed Motor has been energized.
Detection of The 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the paper remaining in Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed the Paper Takeor malfunction is reset. Up The 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the section Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. <Action> Relevant Electrical Components 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Control Board PWB-C2 PF 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) 4th Drawer Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF)
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4 4-6
1 2 3 4 5
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2 PF-2 PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-8 E-8 page 4-81 E-8 page 4-81 F-8 page 4-81
4-25
(10)
LCC Paper Take-Up Section Misfeed (Option)
<Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1-LCC) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the LCC Paper Feed Motor has been energized. The leading edge of the paper does not block the LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCC) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Paper Take-Up Sensor has been energized. Detection of The The Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1-LCC) is blocked when the Power Switch paper remaining in is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction the Paper Takeis reset. Up The LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCC) is blocked when the Power section Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
<Action> Relevant Electrical Components Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1-LCC) Control Board PWB-C1 LCC LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCC) LCC Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCC))
Step
Operations
Ref. Page 4-4 4-4 4-6
1 2 3 4 5
Initial checks PC1-LCC sensor check PC2-LCC sensor check M1-LCC operation check Replace PWB-C1 LCC
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ5C1 LCC-5 PWB-C1 LCC PJ5C1 LCC-2 C-6 page 4-81 C-6 page 4-81
4-26
(11)Finisher transport Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher Transport Section misfeed detection
Finisher Paper Exit Section misfeed detection Detection of paper remaining in the Transport Section <Action>
Description The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the copiers Exit Sensor (PC4) is blocked by the paper. The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the copiers Exit Sensor (PC4) is unblocked by the paper. The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is blocked by the paper. The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is unblocked by the paper. The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Copier Exit Sensor (PC4) Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) Transport Sensor (PC5-FN)
Relevant Electrical Components Control Board (PWB-A FN) Copier Master Board (PWB-A)
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ18A-11 PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-4 PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-9 I-1 B-7 page 4-94 A-7 page 4-94 C-5 page4-94 F-6 page 4-81
1 2 3 4 5 6
PC4 sensor check PC4-FN sensor check PC5-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement PWB-A replacement
4-27
(12) Finisher Staple Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher staple misfeed detection
Description The Staple Home Position Sensor in the Staple Unit is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor rotates forward, and then the Staple Motor rotates backward, and the Staple Home Position Sensor in the Staple Unit is blocked within the set period of time
<Action> Staple Unit Relevant Electrical Components Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) D-7 page 4-94 C-5 page 4-94
1 2 3 4 5
Drive Coupling Section check I/O CHECK Staple Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
(13) Finisher Punch Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher punch misfeed detection
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) F-2 page 4-94 C-5 page 4-94
1 2 3 4 5
Drive Coupling Section check I/O CHECK Punch Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
4-28
(14) Finisher Bundle Exit Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher Bundle Exit misfeed detection <Action> Relevant Electrical Components Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Exit Motor (M1-FN)
Description The Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Motor (M1-FN) is energized.
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-8 F-7 page 4-94 C-5 page 4-94
1 2 3
PC8-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
4-29
4.9 Service Call Error

When certain machine problems occur these message will appear in the LCD.
4.9.1 Call For Service

Symptom: Call For Service is in the LCD. Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify the lamp turns on when the book cover open and close. 2. If the lamp turns on, check the back ground seal surface dirt. If dirty, clean the back ground seal. The back ground seal is attached on the inner guide B. 3. Verify the mirror carriage moves normally. (See Mirror carriage error, page 4-3.) 4. If during step 1 the lamp did not turn on, check the following connection: Lamp assembly to the Inverter PCB (CN2) Inverter PCB (CN1) to the Harness to the main control PCB (P14) 5. Replace the lamp and/or the Inverter PCB.
4.9.2 Please Call Service

This machine CPU has a function that self-diagnoses the printer conditions. On detection of a malfunction, the corresponding error code representing a particular malfunction name, location, and details as listed on next page is displayed on the LCD together with a Please Call Service message. (Such as Please Call Service: 01) Perform the following steps to reset the printer trouble code. Malfunction Resetting Procedure This mode clears the service call. Perform this operation after solved the trouble. 1. Press Setting, *, 4, 5.
2. Select Yes. The service call will be cleared and the machine will return to standby. Note: To finish the operation without performing clearing, select No.
4-30
4.9.2.1 Detection Timing by Printer Error Code

Code 01 02 03 05 06 07 08 Description Main Unit Communication Failure Communications error (option I/F) Main Unit G/A Communication Failure Flash ROM Failure 1st Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure Main Motor Failure Detection Timing Communications with the Master Board and the MFB3 Board fail. The connection status of a finishing option is changed after the power has been turned ON. Communications with the gate array for expansion I/O (the IC mounted on the Master Board) fail. The Flash ROM data was determined to be fault when the unit was turned on. The Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer has begun. The Transport Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Transport Motor is turning. The Imaging Unit Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Imaging Unit Motor is turning. The Imaging Unit Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while the Imaging Unit Motor remains stopped. The Polygon Motor Lock signal could not be detected within the set period of time after the Polygon Motor is energized. (Faulty start detection) No First Lock signals are detected during the 1second period that starts 1 second after a First Lock signal. (Faulty lock signal detection) The Polygon Motor Lock signal could not be detected after the set period of time has elapsed while the Polygon Motor is turning. (Out-of-timing lock detection) The Polygon Motor Lock signal is set to ON for longer than the set period of time while the Polygon Motor remains stopped. (Abnormal lock detection) The Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Cooling Fan Motor is turning. The Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while the Cooling Fan Motor remains stopped. The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor is turning. The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while the Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor remains stopped. The I/U Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the I/U Cooling Fan Motor is turning. The I/U Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while the I/U Cooling Fan Motor remains stopped.
09
Imaging Unit Motor Failure
0A
Polygon Motor Failure
0B
Cooling Fan Failure
0C
Power Unit Cooling Fan Failure
0F
IU Cooling Fan Motor Failure
4-31
Code
Description
10
HSYNC detection failure
12
ATDC Sensor failure Abnormal image transfer voltage 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure
14 15 16
17
Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Main)
18
Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Sub)
19
Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Main) Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub) High Fuser Temperature Failure (Main) High Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub) EEPROM Failure
1C
1A
1D
1B
21
LCC Elevator Motor Failure
Detection Timing No SOS falling edges are detected within the set period of time after laser emission began while the Polygon Motor is turning. No SOS falling edges are detected while VIA remains ON. The value of data read by the ATDC Sensor is faulty. (ATDC Sensor reading is 19 % or more, or 7 % or less.) The image transfer voltage exceeds 100 V for the set period of time while the Imaging Unit Motor remains stopped. The Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer has begun. The Fusing Roller Thermistor does not detect the required temperature within 30 sec. after a warm-up cycle has begun; therefore, the copier does not complete the warm-up cycle. The temperature of the Fusing Rollers does not reach the required level even after the set period of time has elapsed during a warm-up cycle. The Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor does not detect the required temperature within 30 sec. after a warm-up cycle has begun; therefore, the copier does not complete the warm-up cycle. The temperature of the Fusing Rollers does not reach the required level even after the set period of time has elapsed during a warm-up cycle. The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature below 105 C during standby. The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature below 105 C during printing. The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature above 240 C when the Power Switch is set to ON. The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature above 240 C when the Power Switch is set to ON. An EEPROM where no initial data is written is detected. The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCC) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
4-32
Code
Description
23
LCC Lift Failure
24
LCC Shift Gate Operation Failure
25
LCC Communication Failure
26
LCC Shift Motor Failure
Detection Timing The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed with paper loaded during the paper lift-up operation. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the lowering operation has begun. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the lowering operation has begun. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCC) is not unblocked during the lowering operation. The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCC) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCC) has begun with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCC) set to L. Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) cannot detect both the rising and falling edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCC) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
4-33
Code
Description
LCC Shift Failure 27
28
Manual Bypass Paper-Lifting Failure
33
Elevator Motor Ascent/Descent Drive Failure
35
Shutter Drive Failure
Detection Timing The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation has begun (shifter is moved to the right). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation has begun (shifter is moved to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation has begun (shifter is moved to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation has begun (shifter is moved to the left). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the return operation has begun (shifter is moved to the left). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the return operation has begun (shifter is moved to the left). The Manual Feed Tray Lift-Up Sensor (PC29) is not blocked or unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Manual Paper Feed Pick-Up Solenoid (SL3) is energized after the manual feed paper take-up operation has begun. The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3-FN) and Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) are not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized. The Elevator Tray does not stop at the position for the specified tray after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of descent operation) and the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is blocked. The Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of ascent operation) when paper is being fed out. The Lock signal is detected after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized. The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-opening operation). The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-closing operation).
4-34
Code
Description
36
Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure
37
Staple Drive Failure
38
39
Staple Unit CD Drive Failure
3A
Exit Roller Pressure/ Retraction Failure
3C
Punch Cam Motor Unit Failure
3F
Paper Holding Drive Failure
Detection Timing The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 1 (M4-FN) is energized The Home Position Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor is energized (beginning of staple operation). The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 2 (M5-FN) is energized. The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN) is energized (beginning of return operation to predetermined position). The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of pressure operation). The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of retraction operation). The Punch Motor Pulse Sensor cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Punch Drive Motor is energized. The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) is activated (beginning of paddle retraction operation). The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) is activated (beginning of paddle paper-holding operation).
4-35
4.9.2.2 Troubleshooting Procedures by Printer Error Code

(1) 01: Main Unit Communication Failure Trouble Code 01 Description Communications with the Master Board and the MFB3 Board fail.
MFB3 Board (MFB3)
Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Step
Operations Check the MFB3 Board connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-A Board connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the flat cable between MFB3 and lPWB-A for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Turn the copier off, then on again. Replace the MFB3 Board. Replace the PWB-A Board.
Ref. Page
3 4 5 6
4-36
(2) 02: Communications error (option I/F) Trouble Code 02 Description The connection status of a finishing option is changed after the power has been turned ON.
Control Board (PWB-A FN) Control Board (PWB-A)
Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A
Step
Operations
Ref. Page
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
1 2 3
Turn the copier off, then on again. Check each control board and the Master Board for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Replace the appropriate Control Board and the Master Board if necessary.
4-37
(3) 03: Main Unit G/A Communication Failure Trouble Code 03 Description Communications with the gate array for expansion I/O (the IC mounted on the Master Board) fail. The Light Emitting Diode on the PWB-A Board does not flash.
Step
Operations
Ref. Page
1 2 3
Turn the copier off, then on again. Check each control board and the Master Board for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Replace the Master Board if necessary.
4-38
(4) 05: Flash ROM Failure Trouble Code 05 Description The Flash ROM data was determined to be fault when the unit was turned on.
Step
Operations Unplug and plug the power cord, and then turn off on the copier. Replace the Master Board.
Ref. Page
1 3
4-39
(5) 06: 07: 15: 16:
1st Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure Description The Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer has begun.
Trouble Code 06 07 15 16
Relevant Electrical Parts 1st Drawer Lift-Up Motor (M7) Master Board PWB-A 2nd Drawer Lift-Up Motor (M8) Power Supply Unit (PU1) Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) Lift-Up Motor 2 (M125-PF) 1st Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor (PC6) 2nd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor (PC12) Lift-Up Sensor 1 (PC114-PF) Lift-Up Sensor 2 (PC123-PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Step
Operations Check the connectors of each motor and sensor for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of each motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. Check the PU1 connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC6 sensor check PC12 sensor check PC114-PFsensor check PC123-PF sensor check M7 operation check. M8 operation check. M124-PF operation check. M125-PF operation check. Replace PWB-A. Replace Board. the PWB-C2 PF Control
Ref. Page
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6
PWB-A PJ15A-11 B-8 page 4-81 ON PWB-A PJ22A-6 B-11 page 4-82 ON PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 G-3 page 4-81 PF-3 PWB-C2 PF F-8 page 4-81 PJ10C2 PF-3 PWB-C2 PF PJ4C2 PF-5,4 PWB-C2 PFPJ8C2 PF-12,13 B-8 page 4-81 D-11 page 4-82 D-3 page 4-81 G-3 page 4-81 E-5 page 4-81
Replace PU1.
4-40
(6) 08: Main Motor Failure Trouble Code 08 Description The Transport Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Transport Motor is turning. Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A Power Supply Unit (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ28A-4 (REM) H-1 page 4-81
Transport Motor (M2)
Step
Operations Check the M2 connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the M2 for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. M2 operation check. Replace PWB-A. Replace PU1.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4 5
4-41
(7) 09: Imaging Unit Motor Failure
Trouble Code 09
Description The Imaging Unit Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Imaging Unit Motor is turning. Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A Power Supply Unit (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ28A-11 (REM) B-14 page 4-81
Imaging Unit Motor (M1)
Step
Operations Check the M1 connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the M1 for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. M1 operation check. Replace PWB-A. Replace PU1.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4 5
4-42
(8) 0A: Polygon Motor Failure
Trouble Code
0A
Description The Polygon Motor Lock signal could not be detected within the set period of time after the Polygon Motor is energized. (Faulty start detection) No First Lock signals are detected during the 1-second period that starts 1 second after a First Lock signal. (Faulty lock signal detection) The Polygon Motor Lock signal could not be detected after the set period of time has elapsed while the Polygon Motor is turning. (Out-of-timing lock detection) The Polygon Motor Lock signal is set to ON for longer than the set period of time while the Polygon Motor remains stopped. (Abnormal lock detection) Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
PH Unit
Step
Operations Check the PH connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Replace PH Unit. Replace PWB-A.
Ref. Page
1 2 3
4-43
(9) 0B: Cooling Fan Failure 0C: Power Unit Cooling Fan Failure 0F: IU Cooling Fan Motor Failure Trouble Code 0B Description The Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Cooling Fan Motor is turning. The Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while the Cooling Fan Motor remains stopped. The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor is turning. The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while the Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor remains stopped. The I/U Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the I/U Cooling Fan Motor is turning. The I/U Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while the I/U Cooling Fan Motor remains stopped.
0C
0F
Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor (M5) Master Board PWB-A Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor (M4) Power Supply Unit (PU1) I/U Cooling Fan Motor (M6) 0B: Step Cooling Fan Failure Operations Check the motor connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload, and correct as necessary. M5 operation check. Replace PWB-A. Power Unit Cooling Fan Failure Operations Check the motor connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload, and correct as necessary. M4 operation check. Replace PWB-A. Ref. Page WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ33A-1 (REM) H-22 page 4-83 Ref. Page T-3 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A-6 (REM) F-17 page 4-82
1 2 3 4 0C: Step
1 2 3 4
4-44
0F: Step
Power Unit Cooling Fan Failure Operations Check the motor connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload, and correct as necessary. M6 operation check. Replace PWB-A. Ref. Page WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ15A-1 (REM) C-14 page 4-82
1 2 3 4
4-45
(10) 10: HSYNC detection failure
Trouble Code 10
Description No SOS falling edges are detected within the set period of time after laser emission began while the Polygon Motor is turning. No SOS falling edges are detected while VIA remains ON. Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
PH Unit
Step
Operations
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4
Turn the copier off, then on again.. Check PH Unit and the Master Board connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Replace PH Unit. Replace PWB-A.
4-46
(11) 12: ATDC Sensor failure
Trouble Code 12
Description The scanning value of the ATDC Sensor is less than 7% while the Imaging Unit Motor is turning. The scanning value of the ATDC Sensor is more than 19% while the Imaging Unit Motor is turning. Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
ATDC Sensor (UN2)
Step
Operations Check the ATDC sensor connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Remove the Developing Unit from the Imaging Unit, and then replace UN2. Run F8. Replace PWB-A. Replace PU1.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4 5
4-47
(12) 14: Abnormal image transfer voltage
Trouble Code 14
Description The image transfer voltage exceeds 100 V for the set period of time while the Imaging Unit Motor remains stopped. Relevant Electrical Parts High Voltage Unit (TH1) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Image Transfer Roller
Step
Operations Check the installation of the Image Transfer Roller. Replace TH1.
Ref. Page
1 2
4-48
(13) 17: Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Main) 18: Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Sub) 1A:Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Main) 1D:Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub)
Trouble Code
17
18
1A
1D
Description The Fusing Roller Thermistor does not detect the required temperature within 30 sec. after a warm-up cycle has begun; therefore, the copier does not complete the warm-up cycle. The temperature of the Fusing Rollers does not reach the required level even after the set period of time has elapsed during a warm-up cycle. From room temperature to 60 C: Within 4 sec. From 60 to 100 C: Within 4 sec. From 100 to 130 C: Within 2 sec. From 130 C to the completion of warm-up (170 C): Within 1 sec. The Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor does not detect the required temperature within 30 sec. after a warm-up cycle has begun; therefore, the copier does not complete the warm-up cycle. The temperature of the Fusing Rollers does not reach the required level even after the set period of time has elapsed during a warm-up cycle. From room temperature to 60 C: Within 7 sec. From 60 to 100 C: Within 7 sec. From 100 to 130 C: Within 2 sec. From 130 C to the completion of warm-up (160 C): Within 1 sec. The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature above 240 C when the Power Switch is set to ON. The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature above 240 C when the Power Switch is set to ON.
Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1) Master Board PWB-A Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp (H2) Power Supply Unit (PU1) Fusing Roller Thermistor (TH1) Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor (TH2) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Step
Operations Check that the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp comes on when the Power Switch is set to ON, and correct or replace as necessary. Check that the Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp comes on when the Power Switch is set to ON, and correct or replace as necessary. Check the installation of the Fusing Roller Thermistor and the Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor, and correct or clean as necessary. Check the operation of the Fusing Roller Thermistor. Remove CN80 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN80-2 and 3 on the Thermistor is infinity.
Ref. Page
4-49
Step
Operations Check the operation of the Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor. Remove CN81 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN81-2 and 3 on the Thermistor is infinity. Check the continuity of the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp. Correct or replace as necessary. Check the continuity of the Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp. Correct or replace as necessary. Replace PU1. Replace PWB-A.
Ref. Page
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
7 8 9
4-50
(14) 19: Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Main Heater) 1C: Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub Heater)
Trouble Code 19 1C
Description The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature below 105 C during standby. The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature below 105 C during printing.
Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1) Master Board PWB-A Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp (H2) Power Supply Unit (PU1) Fusing Roller Thermistor (TH1) Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor (TH2) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Step
Operations Check that the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp comes on when the Right-Side Door is opened, then closed, and correct or replace as necessary. Check that the Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp comes on when the RightSide Door is opened, then closed, and correct or replace as necessary. Check the installation of the Fusing Roller Thermistor and the Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor, and correct or clean as necessary. Check the operation of the Fusing Roller Thermistor. Remove CN80 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN80-2 and 3 on the Thermistor is infinity. Check the operation of the Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor. Remove CN81 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN81-2 and 3 on the Thermistor is infinity. Check the continuity of the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp. Correct or replace as necessary. Check the continuity of the Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp. Correct or replace as necessary. Replace PU1. Replace PWB-A.
Ref. Page
7 8 9
4-51
(15) 1B:
EEROM Failure
Trouble Code 1B
Description An EEPROM where no initial data is written is detected. Relevant Electrical Parts
Master Board PWB-A WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Step
Operations Unplug and plug in the power cord, and then turn off and turn on the copier. Check the EEPROM on the Master Board for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Replace PWB-A. Replace the EEPROM.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4
4-52
(16) 21:
LCC Elevator Motor Failure
Trouble Code 21
Description The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCC) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
Relevant Electrical Parts Elevator Motor (M5-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Step
Operations Check the motor connectors and other connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC10-LCC sensor check. M5-LCC operation check Replace PWB-A.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4
4-4 4-5
PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-5 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-7,6
F-2 See page 6-47 H-2 See page 6-47
4-53
(17) 23: Trouble Code
LCC Lift Failure Description The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed with paper loaded during the paper lift-up operation. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the lowering operation has begun. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the lowering operation has begun. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation has begun. The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCC) is not unblocked during the lowering operation.
23
Relevant Electrical Parts Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ5C1 LCC-12 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-9 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-5 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-2 B-6 See page 6-47 D-2 See page 6-47 F-2 See page 6-47 H-2 See page 6-47 E-8 See page 6-47
Step
Operations Check the sensor connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC4-LCC sensor check. PC13-LCC sensor check. PC10-LCC sensor check. PC7-LCC sensor check. Replace PWB-C1 LCC.
Ref. Page 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5
1 2 3 4 5 6
4-54
(18) 24: Trouble Code 24
LCC Shift Gate Operation Failure Description The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCC) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCC) has begun with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCC) set to L.
Relevant Electrical Parts Shift Gate Home Position Sensor(PC14Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) LCC) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components)
Step
Operations Check the PC14-LCC connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC14-LCC sensor check. M3-LCC operation check. Replace PWB-C1 LCC.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4
4-4 4-6
PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-1 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-3,4
I-2 See page 6-47 I-2 See page 6-47 E-8 See page 6-47
4-55
LCC Communication Failure Description Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. Relevant Electrical Parts
Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) E-8 See page 6-47
Step
Operations
Ref. Page
1 2 3
Turn the copier off, then on again. Check the connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Replace PWB-C1 LCC.
4-56
LCC Shift Motor Failure Description The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) cannot detect both the rising and falling edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCC) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
Relevant Electrical Parts Shift Motor (M4-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-3 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-5,4 G-2 See page 6-47 H-2 See page 6-47 E-8 See page 6-47
Step
Operations Check the motor connectors and other connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC8-LCC sensor check. M4-LCC operation check. Replace PWB-C1 LCC.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4
4-4 4-6
4-57
(21) 27: Trouble Code
LCC Shift Failure Description The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation has begun (shifter is moved to the right). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation has begun (shifter is moved to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation has begun (shifter is moved to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation has begun (shifter is moved to the left). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the return operation has begun (shifter is moved to the left). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the return operation has begun (shifter is moved to the left).
27
Relevant Electrical Parts Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-3 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-7 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-5,4 G-2 See page 6-47 E-2 See page 6-47 D-2 See page 6-47 E-8 See page 6-47
Step
Operations Check the connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC8-LCC sensor check. PC11-LCC sensor check. PC12-LCC sensor check. Replace PWB-C1 LCC.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4 5
4-4 4-4 4-6
4-58
Manual Bypass Paper-Lifting Failure Description The Manual Feed Tray Lift-Up Sensor (PC29) is not blocked or unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Manual Paper Feed Pick-Up Solenoid (SL3) is energized after the manual feed paper take-up operation has begun.
Relevant Electrical Parts Manual Paper Feed Pick-Up Solenoid (SL3) Master Board (PWB-A) Manual Feed Tray Lift-Up Sensor (PC29) Power Supply Unit (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ12A-11 (ON) PWB-A PJ12A-5 (ON) PWB-A PJ15A-11 (ON) B-2 page 4-81 A-2 page 4-81
Step
Operations Check the SL3 connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC29 sensor check. SL3 operation check. Replace PWB-A. Replace PU1.
Ref. Page
1 2 3 4 5
4-4 4-4
4-59
(23)
33:
Elevator Motor Ascent/Descent Drive Failure Description The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3-FN) and Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) are not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized. The Elevator Tray does not stop at the position for the specified tray after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of descent operation) and the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is blocked. The Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of ascent operation) when paper is being fed out. The Lock signal is detected after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized.
Trouble Code
33
<Action> Relevant Electrical Parts Elevator Motor (M11-FN) Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3Elevator Board (PWB-B FN) FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ7A FN-1,2 PWB-B FN PJ9A FN-7 PWB-B FN PJ9A FN-3 PWB-B FN PJ9A FN-4 G-7 page I-7 page 6-94 H-7 page 6-94 I-7 page 6-94 I-6 page 6-94 C-5 page 6-94
Step
Operations Check the M11-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary Check M11-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary If AK-1 is connected, check the connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the installation position of the AD-1 tray, and correct as necessary M11-FN operation check PC3-FN sensor check PC14-FN sensor check PC15-FN sensor check PWB-B FN replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-60
(24)
35:
Shutter Drive Failure Description The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-opening operation). The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-closing operation).
Trouble Code
35
Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) Elevator Board (PWB-B FN) Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-1,2 PWB-B FN PJ2B FN-9 B-7 page 6-94 H-7 page 6-94 I-6 page 6-94 C-5 page 6-94
Step
Operations Check the M6-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M6-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M6-FN operation check PC16-FN sensor check PWB-B FN replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6
4-61
(25)
36: 38
Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure Aligning Plate 2 Drive Failure Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 1 (M4FN) is energized. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 2 (M5FN) is energized.
Trouble Code
36
38
Relevant Electrical Parts Alignment Motor 1 (M4-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Alignment Motor 2 (M5-FN) Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7FN)) 36: Step Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure Operations Check the M4-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M4-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M4-FN operation check PC6-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 38 Step Aligning Plate 2 Drive Failure Operations Check the M5-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M5-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M5-FN operation check PC7-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-6 G-7 page 6-94 F-7 page 6-94 C-5 page 6-94 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-3 G-7 page 6-94 F-7 page 6-94 C-5 page 6-94
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
4-62
(26)
37:
Staple Drive Failure Description The Home Position Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor is energized (beginning of staple operation). Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-A FN)) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) D-7 page 6-94 D-7 page6-94 C-5 page6-94
Trouble Code 37
Staple Unit
Step
Operations Check the Staple unit connector for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the Staple Unit for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. Staple Unit operation check Staple Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5
(27)
39:
Staple Unit CD Drive Failure Description The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN) is energized (beginning of return operation to predetermined position).
Trouble Code 39
Relevant Electrical Parts Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ17A FN-3 E-7 page 6-94 D-7 page 6-94 C-5 page 6-94
Step
Operations Check for interference with the Shutter and Exit Roller, and correct as necessary. Check the M7-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M7-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M7-FN operation check PC10-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6
4-63
(28)
3A:
Exit Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure Description The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of pressure operation). The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of retraction operation).
Trouble Code
3A
Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-1,2 PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-7 B-7 page 6-94 A-7 page 6-94 C-5 page 6-94
Step
Operations Check the M6-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M6-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary M6-FN operation check PC12-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5
(29)
3C:
Punch Cam Motor Unit Failure Description The Punch Motor Pulse Sensor cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Punch Drive Motor is energized. Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) F 2 page 6-94 C 5 page 6-94
Trouble Code 3C
Punch Unit
Step
Operations Check the Punch Unit connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the Punch Unit for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. Punch Unit sensor check Punch Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5
4-64
(30)
3F:
Paper Holding Drive Failure Description The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2FN) is activated (beginning of paddle retraction operation). The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2FN) is activated (beginning of paddle paper-holding operation). Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Trouble Code
3F
Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11FN)
Step
Operations Check the SL2-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary PC11-FN sensor check SL2-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ17A FN-7 PWB-A FN PJ18A FN-6 D-7 page 6-94 C-7 page 6-94 C-5 page 6-94
4-65
4.10 Power-Supply-Related Malfunctions

(1) Copier is not receiving power. Relevant Electrical Components Power Switch (S1) Power Supply Unit (PU1) Master Board (PWB-A) WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) F-25
Step 1 2 3 4
Operation Is a voltage being applied to the electrical outlet? s the wiring to terminal S1 correct? Is there continuity across the fuse (F101) on PU1? Is there continuity across the fuse (F103) on PU1? Is DC 5 V being output from PJ8A-2 on the Master Board?
Result NO NO NO NO NO
Action Provide a power supply. Rewire. Replace the fuse. Replace the fuse. Replace the Master Board. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
D-5 YES
(2) Only the Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns. Relevant Electrical Components Power Supply Unit (PU1) MFB3 Board (MFB3) Control Panel (UN1) Master Board (PWB-A) WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) C-6 (page 4-81) H-19 (page 4-83)
Step 1
Operation Is DC 4.5 V being output from PJ8A3 on the Master Board? Is DC 5 V being output from PJ9PU1-1 on PU1?
Result NO NO YES
Action Replace the Master Board. Replace the Power Supply Unit. Replace the Control Panel.
4-66
4.11 Image Failure

4.11.1 Image Failure Troubleshooting
If any image failure has occurred, first make the initial checks, then proceed to the corresponding image failure troubleshooting procedure.
4.11.2 Initial Checks

Determine if the failure is attributable to a basic cause or causes. Section Step Check Result Action Installation 1 PRECAUTIONS FOR NO Change the installation site. site INSTALLATION contained in GENERAL Paper 2 Recommended paper is used. NO Instruct user. 3 Original 4 5 6 7 PM parts 8 Paper is damp. Original not flat Faint original Highly transparent original (OHP transparencies, etc.) Dirty or scratched Original Glass PM parts relating to image formation have reached the end of cleaning/replacement cycles. There are settings can be readjusted to remedy the image failure. YES YES YES YES YES YES Replace paper. Instruct user on paper storage. Correct. Instruct user. Instruct user. Clean or replace. Clean or replace.
Adjustment items
YES
Readjust.
Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (Image Reading Section) or the output system (Engine section). Check Make copies at different zoom ratios. Result Full size Reduction Cause
Input system
Full size
Reduction
Output system
4-67
4.11.3 Troubleshooting Procedures classified by Image Failure

(1) Blank Copy or black copy <Typical Faulty Image>
Blank copy Section Scanner
Step 1 2
Check Item Is the Scanner drive transmission mechanism in good condition? Do the connections from CCD PCB Scanner PCB Main PH unit remain intact?
Result NO NO YES
Action Check and change as necessary. Reconnect.

Change PCB AFE, PCB Scanner, PCB Main, PWB-A, in that order.
Black copy Section
Step 1
2 Scanner 3 4 5
Check Item Does the Exposure Lamp turn ON when make a copy with open the platen cover? Does the voltage across P14 on pin 2 and pin 3 change from DC0V to DC24V when step 1 is performed again? Does the voltage across P14 on pin 1 and pin 3 change to DC0V when step 1 is performed again? Are the mirrors and lens installed properly? Are the mirrors and lens dirty?
Result YES NO
Action Perform steps 4 and onward. Check connectors and harnesses and perform steps 2 and 3. Change PCB Scanner. Change Inverter or exposure lamp, in that order. Change PCB Main. Install them properly. Clean or change.
NO
YES NO NO YES
Blank copy and black copy Section Step 1 IU part 2 3 PH part 4 5 IU part 6
Check Item
Result NO YES YES NO NO
Developing Unit is driven properly. Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Developing bias contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
PH shutter (the one located on the laser beam path between PH Assy and PC Drum) opens and closes properly.
Action Correct or change drive coupling mechanism. Clean or change. Clean or change. Correct. Correct. Change I/C. Change PH Assy. Change High Voltage Unit. Change Master Board. Correct.
PC Drum protective shutter opens and closes properly.
Master Board and PH Assy are connected properly.
YES
NO (2) Low Image Density or rough image
4-68
<Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step 1
Printer engine
Check Item Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Developing bias contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Is the trouble settled with above steps? Is the Scanner drive transmission mechanism in good condition? Do the connections from CCD PCB Scanner PCB Main PH unit intact? Are the press document plate and contact glass dirty? Are you copying a thick volume while trying to close the platen cover trying to close?
Result YES YES
Action Clean or change. Clean or change. Change DC Drum Unit. Change PH Assy. Change High Voltage Unit. Change Master Board. Check and change as necessary. Change PCB AFE, PCB Scanner, PCB Main, PCB Connect or PWB-A, in that order. Reconnect. Clean each parts and set the background level again. Copy with opened platen cover.
NO
NO
2 Scanner 3 4
YES NO YES YES
4-69
(3) Foggy Background <Typical Faulty Image> When engine is faulty. When scanner is faulty.
Section
Step 1 1 2 3 4
Printer engine
5 6
Check Item Sunlight or any other extraneous light enters the copier. PC Drum is dirty. Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Charge Neutralizing Sheet contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Erase Lamp is dirty. Erase Lamp is conducting.
Result YES YES YES YES YES YES NO
Action Protect the copier from extraneous light. Clean. Clean or change. Clean or change. Clean or change. Clean. Change Erase Lamp. Change PC Drum Unit. Change Developing Unit. Change PH Assy. Change High Voltage Unit. Change Master Board. Clean each parts and set the background level again. Copy with opened platen cover.
Is the trouble settled with above steps? Are the press document plate and contact glass dirty? Are you copying a thick volume while trying to close the platen cover trying to close? Are the mirrors and lens dirty? Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or deteriorated? Do the connections between the Exposure Lamp and INVERTER remain intact? Do the connections from INVERTER to PCB Scanner remain intact? Do the connections from PCB Scanner to PCB Main remain intact? Do the connections from PCB Main to High Voltage Unit remain intact?
NO
1 2 3 4 5
YES YES
YES YES NO
Clean or change. Clean or change. Reconnect.
Scanner
NO
Reconnect.
NO
Reconnect.
NO
Reconnect.
4-70
(4) Black Streaks or Bands <Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step 1
Check Item Paper path is dirty with toner. PC Drum is dirty. Fusing Rollers are dirty or scratchy.
Result YES YES YES Clean. Clean.
Action
Printer engine
2 3
Clean or change. Change Developing Unit. Change Master Board. Clean. Change PCB AFE, PCB Scanner, PCB Main, PCB Connect or PWBA, in that order. Reconnect.
NO 1 Scanner 2 Are the mirrors, lens, Contact glass or FBS glass dirty with foreign matter? Do the connections from CCD PCB Scanner PCB Main PH Unit PWB-A remain intact? YES
YES NO
4-71
(5) Black Spots <Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step 1 2 3 4
Check Item Paper path is dirty with toner. PC Drum is dirty. Fusing Rollers are dirty or scratchy. Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Charge Neutralizing Sheet contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Erase Lamp is dirty.
Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Clean. Clean.
Action
Clean or change. Clean or change. Clean or change. Clean or change. Clean. Change I/C. Change High Voltage Unit. Change Master Board. Change Erase Lamp. Clean. Change PCB AFE, PCB Scanner, PCB Main or PH Unit board in that order. Reconnect.
Printer engine
5 6 7
Erase Lamp is conducting. NO
1 Scanner 2
Are the mirrors, lens, Contact glass or FBS glass dirty with foreign matter? Do the connections from CCD PCB Scanner PCB Main PH Unit PWB-A remain intact?
YES
YES NO
4-72
(6) Blank Streaks or Bands <Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step 1 2
Check Item Image Transfer Roller is dented or scratchy. PC Drum is dirty. Fusing Rollers are dirty or scratchy.
Result YES YES YES Change. Clean.
Action
Printer engine
Clean or change. Change PC Drum Unit. Change Developing Unit. Change Master Board. Clean. Change PCB Scanner, PCB Main or PH Unit in that order. Reconnect.
4 1 Scanner 2
Is the trouble settled with above steps? Are the Contact glass or FBS glass dirty with foreign matter? Do the connections from CCD PCB Scanner PCB Main PH Unit remain intact?
NO YES YES NO
4-73
(7) Void Areas <Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step 1 2
Check Item PC Drum is dirty. Image Transfer Roller is dented or scratchy. Fusing Rollers are scratchy or deformed. Is the trouble settled with above steps? Is the Contact glass or FBS glass dirty? Do the connections from CCD PCB Scanner PCB Main PH Unit remain intact?
Result YES NO YES NO NO YES YES NO
Action Clean. Change. Clean or change. Change I/C. Change Master Board. Change PC Drum. Change Developing Unit. Change Master Board. Clean or change. Change PCB Scanner, PCB Main or PH Unit in that order. Reconnect.
Printer engine
4 1 Scanner 2
4-74
(9) Smear on Back <Typical Faulty Image>
Section Printer engine
Step 1 2 3
Check Item Paper path is dirty with toner. Image Transfer Roller is dirty. Fusing Rollers are dirty.
Result YES YES YES
Action Clean. Clean. Clean.
(10) Uneven Image Density <Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step
Check Item Image Transfer Roller is dirty or deformed.
Result YES NO
Action Clean or change. Change I/C. Change Master Board. Change PC Drum. Change Developing Unit. Change Master Board. Clean or change. Clean or change. Clean or change. Change PCB AFE, PCB Scanner, PCB Main, PCB Connect or PWBA, in that order. Reconnect.
1 Printer engine 2
Is the trouble settled with above step? Are the mirrors, lens, Contact glass or FBS glass dirty with foreign matter? Is the Shading Sheet under the Size cover dirty? Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or deteriorated? Do the connections from CCD PCB AFE PCB Scanner PCB Main PCB Connect PWB-A remain intact?
NO
1 2 Scanner 3
YES YES YES YES NO
4-75
(10) Gradation Reproduction Failure <Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step 1
Check Item Image Transfer Roller is dirty or deformed. Is the trouble settled with above step? Is the Shading Sheet under the Size cover dirty? Is the Contact glass or FBS glass dirty? Do the connections from CCD PCB AFE PCB Scanner PCB Main PCB Connect PWB-A remain intact?
Result YES NO NO YES YES YES NO
Printer engine 2 1 2 Scanner 3
Action Clean or change. Change I/C. Change Master Board. Change PC Drum. Change Developing Unit. Change Master Board. Clean or change. Clean or change. Change PCB AFE, PCB Scanner, PCB Main, PCB Connect or PWBA, in that order. Reconnect.
4-76
(11) Periodically Uneven Image <Typical Faulty Image>
Section
Step 1 2 3
Check Item Developing Unit is driven properly. PC Drum and Image Transfer Roller are driven properly. Synchronizing Roller is driven properly. Fusing Unit is driven properly. Ds Roller is dirty PH Unit is securely installed. Is the trouble settled with above steps? Is the FBS Motor drive gear cracked or dirty with foreign matter? Is the Scanner Motor secured properly? Are the FBS belts attached loose? Is the Mirror carriage A secured properly? Are the Mirror carriage drive belts wound properly? Are the Scanner rails damaged or dirty with foreign matter? Do the connections from CCD PCB AFE PCB Scanner PCB Main PCB Connect PWB-A remain intact?
Result NO NO NO NO YES TES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES YES NO
Printer engine
4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
Action Correct or change drive coupling mechanism. Correct or change drive coupling mechanism. Correct or change drive coupling mechanism. Correct or change drive coupling mechanism. Clean. Correct. Change PC Drum. Change Developing Unit. Change Master Board. Clean or change. Secure properly. Adjust the belt tension. Secure properly. Wind the belts properly. Clean or change. Change PCB AFE, PCB Scanner, PCB Main, PCB Connect or PWBA, in that order. Reconnect.
Scanner
5 6
4-77
4.12 Error Codes

If an error occurs during a communication, a check message will be printed. The following provides an explanation of the information found on check messages. A possible solution to the problem The date and time of the attempted communication The sending location (if the remote fax has a Location ID) The number of pages which got through before the error terminated the call The error code The sample document. You will also see a code listed in the Result column of the report. Result codes indicate the specific problem encountered: D codes occur while dialing R codes occur during reception T codes occur during transmission Here is a list of error codes the fax machine may print.
Dialing errors
D.0.2 D.0.3, D.0.8 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again. The remote unit didnt respond, the call couldnt be completed or STOP was pressed during dialing. Re-try the call. If your machine repeats the message, call the remote fax units operator and verify that unit is operating properly. Either the remote unit didnt respond, the call somehow didnt go through or STOP was pressed during dialing. Try the call again.
D.0.6, D.0.7
Reception errors
R.1.1 R.1.2 R.1.4 R.1.5 R.2.3 T1 time-out. The calling unit was not a fax machine or the transmitting unit is having difficulties. Compatibility error. The calling unit is attempting to poll a document that does not exist. The STOP button was pressed during reception. The fax machine didnt detect the silence period for ending channel when receiving RCR. No response to FTT. Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Enable the one second pause after CED on Memory Switch 020. Also try increasing the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021 if echo is on the line. No response to CFR. DCN was received from the transmitter. Poor line conditions made communication impossible. Adjust the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021. Try increasing the output levels via Memory Switch 011 Too many errors were detected during data reception. The carrier was interrupted. Increase the data error rate on Memory Switch 020. DCN was received after FTT. Communication was not possible at 2400 bps. Poor phone line conditions prevented fax communication. Enable the Eye Quality Check on Memory Switch 031 and 032. MPS/EOM/EOP was not received. Either the line disconnected before reception was completed or too many errors were detected by the receiving unit. Adjust the data error rate on Memory Switch 020. It may also be necessary to decrease the receive communication speed via Memory Switch 020.
R.3.1
R.3.3 R.3.4
R.4.2
4-78
R.4.4 R.5.1 R.5.2 R.8.1 R.8.10 R.8.11
The receiving fax machine has reached its memory capacity. DCN was received instead of RR during ECM communication. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM reception. A compatibility error occurred. Line noise or other problems prevented line probing. The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
Transmission errors
T.1.1 T1 time-out. The remote fax machine didnt respond to your machine. This usually occurs during a manual transmission or when an incorrect number was dialed. Call someone at the remote machine. The fax machines page counter detected a possible document feeder error. Carefully put the document back into the feeder and try the call again. STOP was pressed during transmitting. CFR or FTT was not received from the remote machine. Either the phone line disconnected during fax communication or transmission became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Try the call again. It may be necessary to increase the output levels on Memory Switch 011. The receive machine may also have closed network or block junk fax enabled. The two fax machines were incompatible. No mailbox at receiver or security transmission is enabled. FTT was received from the remote machine at 2400 bps. Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions can change rapidly, so try the call later. Turn on the echo protect tone on Memory Switch B:0. Also adjust the interval between DCS and TCF on Memory Switch 011. If the problem persists, try increasing the output levels on Memory Switch 011. The page counter in the fax machine detected a document feeder error during transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call. The fax machine didnt detect the silence period for ending channel. No response to MPS/EOP/EOM. Poor phone lines caused the receiving unit to disconnect. Adjust the interval between CFR and data on Memory Switch 011. Try increasing the output levels on Memory Switch 011. It may also be necessary to adjust the transmit speed on Memory Switch 010. RTN was received from the remote machine. After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Try the call again. Attempt the solutions described for the T.4.1 error. Poor line conditions prevented transmission. PIP was received. The transmission was interrupted by the call mode. The receiving unit may be experiencing problems. Try the call again. No response to RR from the remote machine. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012. No response to CTC. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012. EOR was received from the remote unit but further transmission was not possible. Adjust Memory Switch 015 for this problem. A compatibility error occurred. Line noise or other problems prevented line probing. The remote fax machine didnt complete the equalizer training phase.
T.1.2 T.1.4 T.2.1
T.2.2 T.2.3
T.3.1 T.3.2 T.4.1
T.4.2 T.4.4
T.5.1 T.5.2 T.5.3 T.8.1 T.8.10 T.8.11
4-79
Communication Error Messages

The error messages on Check Message printouts indicate the following: Heres a brief summary: Error Message Check condition of remote fax. Possible Meanings Remote machine malfunctioned No handshake signals from remote machine Wrong phone number reached Poor phone line conditions prevented communication No handshake signals from remote machine Document missfeed or miscount Unable to reach remote machine after attempting specified number of redial Remote machine was busy Remote machine didnt answer Receive confirmation signal not received from remote machine Poor line conditions caused a poor image Remote units memory capacity has been exceeded An autodialer number is not stored programmed properly The STOP key was pressed at the remote fax during the handshake Someone pressed STOP during communication Printer error occurred during communication
Repeat transmission.
Line is busy. Check received documents.
Memory full. Dialing number is not set. Stopped. (Message area is blank)
4-80
4-81
4-82
Large capacity cassette
Finisher
2-Bin Tray
4-83
Section 5 Maintenance & Adjustment

NOTE: Before disassembling, disconnect the power cord and line . 5.1 Maintenance schedule .....................................................................................................................5-3 5.2 Re/Disassemble ...............................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.1 ADF...........................................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.1.1 GUIDE OUTER A. .............................................................................................................5-4 5.2.1.2 GUIDE OUTER B ..............................................................................................................5-5 5.2.1.3 ROLLER SEPARATOR / ROLLER PICKUP ..................................................................5-6 5.2.1.4 Lock knob, Lock shaft knob...............................................................................................5-8 5.2.1.5 ROLLER PRESS B ...........................................................................................................5-9 5.2.1.6 PRESS ROLLER RIGIST................................................................................................5-10 5.2.1.7 SEPARATOR COVER ....................................................................................................5-11 5.2.1.8 PIECE SEPARATOR ......................................................................................................5-12 5.2.1.9 COVER CIS.....................................................................................................................5-13 5.2.1.10 SENSOR DS1 ...............................................................................................................5-14 5.2.1.11 SENSOR DSS...............................................................................................................5-15 5.2.1.12 SENSOR DRS...............................................................................................................5-16 5.2.1.13 CIS(CONTACT IMEGE SENSOR)................................................................................5-17 5.2.1.14 PCB CONNECT CIS .....................................................................................................5-17 5.2.1.15 COVER ADF FRONT ....................................................................................................5-18 5.2.1.16 COVER PLATEN...........................................................................................................5-20 5.2.1.17 COVER ADF BACK.......................................................................................................5-21 5.2.1.18 TRAY DOCUMENT .......................................................................................................5-22 5.2.1.19 COVERTRAY ................................................................................................................5-23 5.2.1.20 HOPPER SENSOR / DOCUMENT SIZE SENSOR......................................................5-24 5.2.1.21 SENSOR DIL.................................................................................................................5-25 5.2.1.22 SENSOR BIS.................................................................................................................5-26 5.2.1.23 PLATE PRESS DOCUMENT ........................................................................................5-27 5.2.1.24 COVER GUIDE INNER .................................................................................................5-28 5.2.1.25 SENSOR DS2 ...............................................................................................................5-29 5.2.1.26 SENSOR DS3 ...............................................................................................................5-30 5.2.1.27 PCB CONNECT ADF ....................................................................................................5-31 5.2.1.28 CLUTCHRegistration roller side ................................................................................5-32 5.2.1.29 FRAME MOTOR(ADF MOTOR) ...................................................................................5-33 5.2.1.30 CLUTCH (Separation roller side) ..................................................................................5-34 5.2.1.31 ADF frame drive gears ..................................................................................................5-35 5.2.1.32 FEED CLUTCH .............................................................................................................5-36 5.2.1.33 Ejection device GEAR ...................................................................................................5-37 5.2.1.34 FRAME TENSION.........................................................................................................5-38 5.2.1.35 HINGE L (Motor side)....................................................................................................5-39 5.2.1.36 Hinge R (BIS sensor side).............................................................................................5-39 5.2.1.37 FRAME DRIVE..............................................................................................................5-40 5.2.1.38 GUIDE INNER A ...........................................................................................................5-41 5.2.1.39 ROLLER REGIST..........................................................................................................5-42 5.2.1.40 ROLLER EXIT ...............................................................................................................5-43 5.2.1.41 ROLLER FEED A ..........................................................................................................5-44 5.2.1.42 ROLLER CIS .................................................................................................................5-45 5.2.1.43 GUIDE INNER B ...........................................................................................................5-46 5.2.1.44 GUIDE INNER C ...........................................................................................................5-47 5.2.1.45 ROLLER FEED B ..........................................................................................................5-48 5.2.1.46 ROLLER FEED C..........................................................................................................5-50 5.2.2 Panel.......................................................................................................................................5-52 5.2.2.1 COVER LEFT TOP .........................................................................................................5-52 5.2.2.2 COVER RIGHT TOP .......................................................................................................5-52 5.2.2.3 COVER FRONT TOP......................................................................................................5-53 5.2.2.4 COVER BACK TOP ........................................................................................................5-54 5.2.2.5 COVER PANEL A ...........................................................................................................5-55 5.2.2.6 PCB PANEL ....................................................................................................................5-56 5.2.2.7 PCB PANEL 2 .................................................................................................................5-57
5-1
5.2.2.8 LCD................................................................................................................................. 5-58 5.2.2.9 ONE-TOUCH PANEL ..................................................................................................... 5-59 5.2.3 FBS ........................................................................................................................................ 5-60 5.2.3.1 CONTACT GLASS ......................................................................................................... 5-60 5.2.3.2 PANE .............................................................................................................................. 5-61 5.2.3.3 SENSOR (HOME) .......................................................................................................... 5-62 5.2.3.4 SENSOR (BEAM) ........................................................................................................... 5-63 5.2.3.5 SENSOR (APS) .............................................................................................................. 5-64 5.2.3.6 INVERTER...................................................................................................................... 5-65 5.2.3.7 LAMP .............................................................................................................................. 5-67 5.2.3.8 MIRROR CARRIGE A .................................................................................................... 5-68 5.2.3.9 MIRROR A...................................................................................................................... 5-71 5.2.3.10 MIRROR CARRIAGE B................................................................................................ 5-72 5.2.3.11 MIRROR B and C ......................................................................................................... 5-74 5.2.3.12 Reassemble the MIRROR CARRIGE. ......................................................................... 5-75 5.2.3.13 CCD .............................................................................................................................. 5-77 5.2.3.14 FBS MOTOR ................................................................................................................ 5-78 5.2.3.15 PCB SCANNER............................................................................................................ 5-80 5.2.3.16 FRAME SCANNER ...................................................................................................... 5-81 5.2.4 PCB........................................................................................................................................ 5-83 5.2.4.1 PCB PSU ........................................................................................................................ 5-83 5.2.4.2 PCB NCU........................................................................................................................ 5-84 5.2.4.3 PCB MAIN ...................................................................................................................... 5-84 5.2.4.4 PCB printer control (PWB-A) .......................................................................................... 5-85 5.2.5 Printer section ........................................................................................................................ 5-86 5.2.5.1 COVER BACK A............................................................................................................. 5-86 5.2.5.2 COVER BACK B............................................................................................................. 5-86 5.2.5.3 SPEAKER....................................................................................................................... 5-87 5.2.5.4 COUNTER ...................................................................................................................... 5-89 5.2.5.5 DC Power Supply Assy .................................................................................................. 5-92 5.2.5.6 HV(High Voltage) TRANSFOMER ................................................................................. 5-94 5.2.5.7 PH UNIT ......................................................................................................................... 5-95 5.2.5.8 FUSING UNIT................................................................................................................. 5-98 5.2.5.9 TONER HOPPER UNIT ............................................................................................... 5-106 5.2.5.10 PWB-R2 (Pre-Transfer Plate Resistor Board Assy)................................................... 5-106 5.2.5.11 TRANSFER ROLLER................................................................................................. 5-107 5.2.5.12 OZONE FILTER.......................................................................................................... 5-107 5.2.5.13 SYNCHRONIZING ROLLER / GEAR......................................................................... 5-108 5.2.6 PAPER TAKE-UP / TRANSPORT SECTION...................................................................... 5-110 5.2.6.1 MANUALl BYPASS UNIT ............................................................................................. 5-110 5.2.6.2 MANUAL BYPASS PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER.......................................................... 5-111 5.2.6.3 SEPARATOR ROLL Assy ............................................................................................ 5-113 5.2.6.4 MANUAL PAPER SIZE DETECTION UNIT ................................................................. 5-114 5.2.6.5 1st PICKUP ROLLER. .................................................................................................. 5-116 5.2.6.6 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER.................................................................................... 5-118 5.2.6.7 1st SEPARATOR ROLL Assy ...................................................................................... 5-120 5.2.6.8 Paper Size Detecting Board Assy ................................................................................ 5-122 5.2.6.9 2nd PICKUP ROLLER.................................................................................................. 5-123 5.2.6.10 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy ....................................................................... 5-125 5.2.6.11 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL ............................................................................................ 5-127 5.2.6.12 PAPER SIZE DETECTING BOARD Assy.................................................................. 5-129 5.2.7 PAPER SUPPLY CABINET ................................................................................................. 5-130 5.2.7.1 Removal of the Pickup Roller/Take-Up Roller/Separator Roll Assy ............................ 5-130 5.2.8 2500 sheet paper supply cabinet......................................................................................... 5-133 5.2.1 Removal of the DRAWER ............................................................................................... 5-133 5.2.1.1 Removal of the Wire ..................................................................................................... 5-134 5.2.1.2 Removal of the PICKUP ROLLER/TAKE-UP ROLLER/SEPARATOR ROLL ASSY... 5-137
5-2
5.1 Maintenance schedule

The fuser unit and the area around it are extremely hot
Contact may cause burns, so be sure not to touch any area not mentioned in the procedure. If your hand or any other body part comes into contact with a hot part, immediately cool the affected area with cold water. If pain persists, seek medical attention.
Parts name Roller Separator*1 Separator cover*1 Roller Pickup*1 Roller Press B Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace 50,000 or 1,000 5 years 50,000 or 1,000 5 years 1,000 80,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 A A A A A A A A B C B A A A A Reference Page 5-6 5-11
caution
Section ADF, FBS
Roller feed A,B,C Roller CIS Roller exit Press roller regist Contact glass, Pane, CIS Plate press document
Lamp*2 Printer Paper Take-Up Manual Bypass / Transport Paper Take-Up Roller
5-6 5-9 5-44,5-48,5 50 5-45 5-43 5-10 5-60,5-61 5-27 1,000 hours 5-67 5-111 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 900,000 900,000 150,000 150,000 300,000 450,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 5-113 5-116 5-118 5-120 5-123 5-125 5-127 5-108
Manual Bypass Separator Roll Assy

1st Pickup Roller 1st Paper Take-Up Roller 1st Separator Roll Assy 2nd Pickup Roller 2nd Paper Take-up Roller 2nd Separator Roll Synchronizing Roller Bushing Synchronizing Roller Gear Paper Dust Removal Assy Transport Roller
Image Transfer Fusing

Paper supply cabinet 2500 sheet paper supply cabinet
Transfer roller Ozone filter

Charge Neutralizing Plate
5-107 5-107 5-98 5-130,5-137 5-130,5-137 5-130,5-137
Fusing Unit Pickup Roller Take-Up Roller Separator Roll Assy

Vertical Transport Roller
Note: Replace the parts marked with *1 at the same time. *2: It is not maintenance parts. However, please replace when it becomes not work. A: When a paper take-up or transport failure occurs. B: When a problem occurs. C: Upon each call.
5-3
5.2 Re/Disassemble
5.2.1 ADF
5.2.1.1 GUIDE OUTER A.
1. Open GUIDE OUTER A 2. Remove one screw to detach STOPPER GUIDE OUTER.
GUIDE OUTER A LOCK KNOB STOPPER GUIDE OUTER
3. Remove GUIDE OUTER A.
5-4
5.2.1.2 GUIDE OUTER B

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove one screw, and two tabs in the order described as bellow. 3. Life GUIDE OUTER B,and remove it.
GUIDE OUTER A
GUIDE OUTER B
FEELER DSS
5-5
5.2.1.3 ROLLER SEPARATOR / ROLLER PICKUP

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the GUIDE OUTER B. (See 5.2.1.2) 3. Remove four E-RINGS of the gear30. 4. Remove E-RING on the other side. 5. Remove gear30 and two bearing D6 (short) and bearing D6 (long).
E RING
E RING
BEARING D6( BEARING D6
GUIDE OUTER A GEAR 30 BEARING D6
6. Remove ROLLER SEPARATOR by sliding it to the side and lifing the STOPPER DOCUMENT.
STOPPER DOCUMENT ROLLER SEPARATOR
5-6
ROLLER SEPARATOR
NOTE: STOPPER DOCUMENT dangles its own weight.
5-7
5.2.1.4 Lock knob, Lock shaft knob

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the GUIDE OUTER B. (See 5.2.1.2) 3. Remove two springs. 4. Remove one screw and LOCK KNOB. 5. Rotate the lOCK SHAFT KNOB 90 upnard, and remove it.
LOCK KNOB
NOTE: Do not install the springs in the opposite direction when assembling it.
LOCK KNOB LOCK SHAFT KNOB
NOTE: Even if the Roller separator is not removed, the LOCK KNOB and the LOCK SHAFT KNOB can be taken out.
5-8
5.2.1.5 ROLLER PRESS B

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the GUIDE OUTER B. (See 5.2.1.2) 3. Remove one screw and HOLDER REGISTRATION. 4. Remove SHAFT PRESS REGISTRATION by pressing it downward. 5. Remove ROLLER PRESS B.
ROLLER PRESS B
SHAFT PRESS REGIST
HOLDER REGIST
NOTE:It will be pushed by SHAFT REGIST by Field spring. In case you remove, be careful to fly Field spring and not to lose. NOTE:In When you remove SHAFT PRESS RIGIST, be careful not to drop ROLL PRESS B and lose it.
5-9
5.2.1.6 PRESS ROLLER RIGIST

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the GUIDE OUTER B. (See 5.2.1.2) 3. Remove one screw and Holder registration. 4. Remove SHAFT PRESS REGISTRATION by pressing it downward. 5. Remove PRESS ROLLER RIGISTRATION.
PRESS ROLLER REGIST SHAFT PRESS REGIST HOLDER REGIST
NOTE:It will be pushed by SHAFT REGISTRATION by Field spring. In case you remove, be careful to fly Field spring and not to lose. NOTE:In When you remove SHAFT PRESS REGIST,be careful not to drop ROLL PRESS B and lose it.
5-10
5.2.1.7 SEPARATOR COVER

1. Open GUIDE OUTER and GUIDE INNER A. 2. Press two hook of SEPARATOR COVER inside from the back side of GUIDE INNER A,and remove it.
GUIDE INNER A
SEPARATOR COVER
5-11
5.2.1.8 PIECE SEPARATOR

1. Open GUIDE OUTER and GUIDE INNER A. 2. Remove SEPARATOR COVER cover. (See 5.2.1.7) 3. Remove PIECE SEPARATOR.
PIECE SEPARATOR
NOTE: When you remove PIECE SEPARATPR,becareful not to lose the spring attached inside it. NOTE: When you attach PLECE SEPATOR, check that the hook of SEPARATOR COVER is correctly inserted in GUIDE INNER A.
5-12
5.2.1.9 COVER CIS

1. Open GUIDE OUTER and GUIDE INNER A. 2. Remove SEPARATOR COVER. (See 5.2.1.7) 3. Release each two hooks at COVER CIS top and bottom,and remove it.
COVER CIS GUIDE INNER A
NOTE: When you remove COVER CIS, be careful hot to lose the spring equipped inside the GUIDE INNER A.
5-13
5.2.1.10 SENSOR DS1

1. Open GUIDE OUTER. 2. Remove COVER CIS. (See 5.2.1.9) 3. Remove SENSOR STOPPER. 4. Release each two hooks of the sensor,remove it by rotating it. 5. Disconnect connector and SENSOR DS1.
SENSOR STOPPER
SENSOR (DS1) P1220
NOTE: SENSOR is removed using a precision screwdriver.
5-14
5.2.1.11 SENSOR DSS

1. Open GUIDE OUTER. 2. Remove COVER CIS. (See 5.2.1.9) 3. Remove SENSOR STOPPER. 4. Disconnect the CONNECTOR. 5. Release the hook,and remove SENSOR DSS.
SENSOR (DSS)
P1220 P122
5-15
5.2.1.12 SENSOR DRS

1. Open GUIDE OUTER. 2. Remove COVER CIS. (See 5.2.1.9) 3. Remove SENSOR STOPPER. 4. Band the rid that is fixing the FEELER, and remove the sasor. 5. Disconnect the connector and remove the SENSOR DRS.
P1220
SENSOR STOPPER
FEELER
P122
SENSOR (DRS)
NOTE: Please attach as before not to lose Feeler.
5-16
5.2.1.13 CIS(CONTACT IMEGE SENSOR)

1. Open DUIDE OUTER and GUIDE INNER A. 2. Remove COVER CIS. (See 5.2.1.9) 3. Disconnect the CONNECTOR and remove the CIS.
CIS
5.2.1.14 PCB CONNECT CIS

1. Open GUIDE OUTER and GUIDE INNER A. 2. Remove COVER CIS. (See 5.2.1.9) 3. Disconnect two CONNECTORS. 4. Remove two screws and remove the F.G wire, and then remove the PCB CONNECT CIS.
P123 PCB CONNECT CIS
5-17
5.2.1.15 COVER ADF FRONT

1. Open the PLATEN COVER. 2. Remove two screws, then remove the COVER ADF FRONT.
COVER ADF FRONT
COVER PLATEN
3.Close the PLANTEN COVER . 4.Open the GUIDE OUTER, and remove two screws.
BRACKET HOPPER
NOTE : When you remove COVER FRONT ADF after GIDE OUTER A is removed, be careful that the COVER PLATEN may spring up.
5-18
5. Release two hooks, and remove COVER ADF FRONT.
COVER ADF FRONT
5-19
5.2.1.16 COVER PLATEN

1. Open the PLATEN COVER, then remove two screws. 2. Remove the HINGE OLATE from hinge R side. 3. Remove COVER PLATEN by moving COVER PLATEN back ward to where the hole of the hinges are Larger.
COVER PLATEN
HINGE PLATE
NOTE :When you remove the screws,hold the COVER PLATEN with your hand so that it does it not foll over. NOTE :When you remove the HINGE PLATE,write down the number to which it is fixed. When reattaching reattaching replace it to the same number.
5-20
5.2.1.17 COVER ADF BACK

1. Opening the TRAY DOCUMENT. 2.Remove two screws.
TRAY DOCUMENT
COVER ADF BACK
3.Loosen two screws of COVER ADF BACK. 4. Remove the COVER ADF BACK.
COVER ADF BACK
5-21
5.2.1.18 TRAY DOCUMENT

1.Open the GUIDE OUTER. 2. Remove the COVER ADF FRONT. (See 5.2.1.15) 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the BRACKET HOPPER.
BRACKET HOPPER
4.Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 5. Disconnect one connector from PCB CONNECT ADF. 5. Remove the TRAY DOCUMENT.
TRAY DOCUMENT
PCB CONNECT ADF
5-22
5.2.1.19 COVERTRAY
1.Open the GUIDE OUTER. 2.Open the TRAY DOCUMENT. 3. Remove three screws.
COVER TRAY
TRAY DOCUMENT
4.Remove two tabs in the order described as bellow then remove the COVER TRAY.
COVER TRAY
TRAY DOCUMENT
5-23
5.2.1.20 HOPPER SENSOR / DOCUMENT SIZE SENSOR

1.Open the GUIDE OUTER. 2.Open the TRAY DOCUMENT. 3.Remove the COVER TRAY. (See 5.2.1.19) 4.Remove the SENSOR STOPPER. 5.Release the sensors by rotating them. 6.Disconect the connector,and then remove the SENSOR.
SENSOR (ODB4) SENSOR (DADF3) SENSOR (ODA3)
P124
COVER TRAY
SENSOR STOPPER
You can replace the HOPPER SENSOR and DOCUMENT SIZE SENSOR without removing the TRAY DOCUMENT.(step3)
5-24
5.2.1.21 SENSOR DIL

1.Open the GUIDE OUTER. 2.Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17 ) 3.Remove the SENSOR STOPPER. 4.Release the sensars by rotating them. 5.Remove connector from PCB CONNECTS ADF,and then remove the SENSOR (DIL).
SENSOR (DIL)
SENSOR STOPPER
PCB CONNECT ADF
NOTE :Be careful not to rub the harness with the edge of the braket.
5-25
5.2.1.22 SENSOR BIS

1.Open the GUIDE OUTER. 2.Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17 ) 3.Remove the SENSOR STOPPER. 4.Disconnect the connector from PCB CONNECT ADF,and then remove the SENSOR(BIS).
SENSOR STOPPER
PCB CONNECT ADF
SENSOR (BIS)
5-26
5.2.1.23 PLATE PRESS DOCUMENT

1.Open the GUIDE OUTER. 2.Release one tab of the PLATE PRESS DOCUMENT. 3.Lift the PLATE PRESS DOCUMENT by using a precision screwdriver,and remove PLATE PRESS DOUMENT.
COVER PLATEN
PLATE PRESS DOCUMENT
NOTE :There are two springs on COVER INNER B. Be careful not lose them.
5-27
5.2.1.24 COVER GUIDE INNER

1.Open the COVER PLATEN. 2.Remove the PLATE PRESS DOCUMENT. (See 5.2.1.23) 3.Release two tabs, and then remove the cober GUIDE INNER.
COVER PLATEN
COVER GUIDE INNER
5-28
5.2.1.25 SENSOR DS2

1.Open the COVER PLATEN. 2.Remove the plate press document. (See 5.2.1.23) 3.Remove the COVER GUIDE INNER. (See 5.2.1.24) 4.Remove one screw. 5.Release two tab, remove PLATE DS2 by pressing its filler. 6.Disconnect connector.
PLATE DS2
7.Remove SENSOR STOPPER. 8.Release two tabsremove SENSOR DS2 by rotating it.
SENSOR (DS2)
SENSOR STOPPER
5-29
5.2.1.26 SENSOR DS3

1. Open the cover platen. 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the sheet A. 3. Pell the left side of DOCUMENT PRESS SHEET.
DOCUMENT PRESS SHEET
SHEET A
SENSOR (DS3)
4.Remove the SENSOR STOPPER from the out side of PLANTEN COVER.(use a flatblade drive) 5.Release the tab of the sensor out side of PLATEN COVER, and romove SENSOR DS2. 6.Disconrct the CONNECTOR
SENSOR STOPPER
P126
SENSOR (DS3)
NOTE :When you reasenble it, use a long plier to attach the SENSOR STOPPER.
5-30
5.2.1.27 PCB CONNECT ADF

1.Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2.Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3.Disconrect the all CONNECTORS. 4. Remove two screws, and then remove the PCB CONNECT ADF.
PCB CONNECT ADF
5-31
5.2.1.28 CLUTCHRegistration roller side

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove plastic E-ring, and then remove the CLUTCH. 4.Disconrect CONNECTOR.
CLTCH
NOTE :Be caretul not to lose the plastic E-ring.i is lost, you con use a normal E-ring. NOTE :This picture shows the machire from the bacside.
5-32
5.2.1.29 FRAME MOTOR(ADF MOTOR)

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 4. Disconrect connector from the MOTOR. 5.Remove two screws, and remove FRAME MOTOR and CLUTCH (Separation roller side).
P121
FRAME MOTOR
MOTOR
You shonld replace the MOTOR by the Assembly.
5-33
5.2.1.30 CLUTCH (Separation roller side)

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 4. Remove the FRAME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the CLUTCH and CONNECTOR. 6.Disconnect the connctor from the CLUCH Assy.
CLUTCH Assy
NOTE :Be careful not to lose two bearing D6, when you remove the CLUTCH.
5-34
5.2.1.31 ADF frame drive gears

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 4. Remove the FREAM MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the CLUTCH (Separation roller side). (See 5.2.1.30) 6. Remove gear21/14 [1]. 7. Remove E-ring of the roller feed A, and then remove GEAR32 [2]. 8. Loosen the screw of frame tension [3]. 9. Remove the spring tension [4]. 10. Remove GEAR50P/50 [5]. 11. Remove GEAR29P/35 [6]. 12. Remove the timing belt [7]. 13. Remove GEAR36/69 [8].
TIMING BELT GEAR 32
GEAR 50P/50
GEAR 29P/35
GEAR 21/14 GEAR 36P/69
NOTE :It is helpful to write the removing on the gears. You can easily reassemble them.
5-35
5.2.1.32 FEED CLUTCH

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 4. Remove the FRAME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Disconnect the CLUTCH (Separation roller side). (See 5.2.1.30) 6. Remove plastic E-ring of the roller feed C. 7. Loosen the FEED CLUTCH rotate it 10 clockwise, and remove the CLUTCH. 8. Disconnect connector of CLUTCH.
ROLLER FEED C
FEED CLUTCH
5-36
5.2.1.33 Ejection device GEAR

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 4. Remove the ADF FRAME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the CLUTCH (Separation roller side). (See 5.2.1.30) 6. Remove the ADF frame drive GEARS. (See 5.2.1.31) 7. Remove the FEED CLUTCH. (See 5.2.1.32). 8. Remove the timing belt [1]. 9. Remove GEAR18P/23P/46 [2]. 10. Remove GEAR27 [3]. 11. Remove GEAR25P/31 [4]. 12. Remove the timing belt [5]. 13. Remove GEAR27 [6].
TIMING BELT TIMING BELT
GEAR 18P/23P/46
GEAR 27 GEAR 27 GEAR 25P/31
5-37
5.2.1.34 FRAME TENSION

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 4. Remove the ADF FRAME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the CLUTCH (Separation roller side). (See 5.2.1.30) 6. Remove the ADF frame DRIVE GEARS. (See 5.2.1.31) 7. Remove the feed CLUTCH. (See 5.2.1.32). 8. Remove the ejection DEVICE GEAR. (See 5.2.1.33) 9. Remove screw of the FRAME TENSION. 10. Remove E-ring, and then remove BEARING D8. 11. Remove FRAME TENSION.
FRAME TENSION
BEARING D8
5-38
5.2.1.35 HINGE L (Motor side)

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 3. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 4. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the ADF FRAME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 6. Remove the CLUTCH (Separation roller side). (See 5.2.1.30) 7. Remove the FEED CLUTCH. (See 5.2.1.32) 8. Remove five screws and the F.G.wire, and then remove the supporter GUIDE INNER. 9. Remove four screws, and then remove the HINGE L.
SUPPORTER GUIDE INNER
HINGE L
5.2.1.36 Hinge R (BIS sensor side)

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove two screws and F.G wire. 3. Remove four screws and HINGE R.
HINGE R
5-39
5.2.1.37 FRAME DRIVE

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove TRAY DOCUMENT. (See 5.2.1.18) 4. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the ADF FREME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 6. Remove the CLUTCH (Separation roller side). (See 5.2.1.30) 7. Remove the ADF FRAME DRIVE GEAR. (See 5.2.1.31) 8. Remove the FEED CLUTCH. (See 5.2.1.32) 9. Remove the ejection DEVICE GEAR. (See 5.2.1.33) 10. Remove the FRAME TENSION. (See 5.2.1.34) 11. Remove the supporter GUIDE INNER. (See 5.2.1.35 8) 12. Remove the hinge L. (See 5.2.1.35) 13. Remove screw and F.G.wire. 14. Remove four screws. 15. Remove two bearings. 16. Litt the FERAME DRIVE, remove it, from where the hole for ROLLER FEED C becoms wider.
ROLLER FEED C
FRAME DRIVE
5-40
5.2.1.38 GUIDE INNER A

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF FRONT. (See 5.2.1.15) 3. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 4. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove E-ring and bearing D8. 6. Remove one screw and STOPPER GUIDE INNER. 7. Remove one screw of SUPPORT GUIDE INNER, and then remove F.G. wire. 8. Lit the GUIDE INNERA by 90 and rome it from GUIDE INNER B. 9. Disconnect from PCB CONNECT
GUIDE INNER A
P122
GUIDE INNER B
STOPPER GUIDE INNER
Note:Be careful the COVER PLATEN may spring up, when the COVER INNER A is remaved.
5-41
5.2.1.39 ROLLER REGIST.

1. Remove the GUIDER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF FRONT.(5.2.1.15) 3. Remove the COVER ADF BACK(5.2.1.17) 4. Remove the CLUTCH (Registration roller).(5.2.1.29) 5. Remove E-ring and bearing D8. 6. Remove GUIDE INNER A.(5.2.1.38) 7. Remove one E-ring and bearing D8, and remove ROLLER REGIST.
ROLLER REGIST
NOTE : Refer to 5.2.1.33 Ejection device GEAR and 5.2.1.34 FRAME TENSION and reassemble it in the reverse order.
5-42
5.2.1.40 ROLLER EXIT

1. Open COVER OUTER. 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Open GUID INNER A. 4. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove FRAME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 6. Remove the ejection DEVICE GEAR. (See 5.2.1.33) 7. Remove one E-ring. (You can not need to remove the E-ring at the front side of the machine.) 8. Remove the COVER STAMP. 10. Remove ROLLER EXIT by pressing it to backward.
COVER STAMP
ROLLER EXIT
5-43
5.2.1.41 ROLLER FEED A

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the FRAME DRIVE. (See 5.2.1.37) 4. Remove E-ring from the roller feed A (MOTOR ADF SIDE), and then remove gear32. (See 5.2.1.31 7) 5. Remove bearing D8, and then remove E-ring. (motor ADF inside) 6. Remove E-ring from the PANEL SIDE. 7. Remove ROLLER FEED A by sliding bearing D8 to the front side of the machine. 8. Life ROLLER FEED A to where its fixing whole is wider, slide it to the MOTOR ADF side and remove it.
GUIDE INNER B
ROLLER FEED A
5-44
5.2.1.42 ROLLER CIS

1. Open COVER OUTER. 2. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 3. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 4. Remove FRAME MOTOR. (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove gear27. (See 5.2.1.33 13) 6. Life GUIDE INNER A by holding A2 handle. 7. Remove one E-ring ,and slide a bealing to the left. 8. Slide the ROLLER CIS to side, and remove it.
GUIDE INNER A
ROLLER CIS
5-45
5.2.1.43 GUIDE INNER B

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF FRONT. (See 5.2.1.15) 3. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 4. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 5. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 6. Remove the the supporter GUIDE INNER and hinge L. (See 5.2.1.35) 7. Remove the FRAME DRIVE. (See 5.2.1.37) 8. Remove the GUIDE INNER A. (See 5.2.1.38) 9. Remove two screws from the panel side 10. Remove two screws from the FRAME DRIVE side, and then remove the GUIDE INNER B.
GUIDE INNER B
5-46
5.2.1.44 GUIDE INNER C

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF FRONT. (See 5.2.1.15) 3. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 4. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the FRAME DRIVE. (See 5.2.1.37) 6. Remove the GUIDE INNER A. (See 5.2.1.38) 7. Remove the ROLLER FEED A. (See 5.2.1.41) 8. Remove the GUIDE INNER B. (See 5.2.1.43) 9. Release two tabs, and remove the GUIDE INNER C by rotating it.
GUIDE INNER B
GUIDE INNER C
5-47
5.2.1.45 ROLLER FEED B

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF FRONT. (See 5.2.1.15) 3. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 4. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the FRAME DRIVE. (See 5.2.1.37) 6. Remove the GUIDE INNER A. (See 5.2.1.38) 4. Remove the GUIDE INNER B. (See 5.2.1.43) 8. Remove the GUIDE INNER C. (See 5.2.1.44) 9. Remove the SPURING TENSION. 10. Remove one screw and the timing belt. 11. Remove one E-ring and PULLEY18.
GUIDE INNER B
FRAME TENSION F
KNOB RELEASE SPRING TENSION
BELT PULLEY 18
NOTE:When you remove the E-ring becareful not to hurt the PALLEY.
5-48
12. Turn the GUIDE INNER B upside down. 13. Remove two E-rings from the roller feed B inside. 14. Side two bearing D8 inside. 15. Lift ROLLER FEED to where the hole wider, and rome it.
GUIDE INNER B
ROLLER FEED B
5-49
5.2.1.46 ROLLER FEED C

1. Remove the GUIDE OUTER A. (See 5.2.1.1) 2. Remove the COVER ADF FRONT. (See 5.2.1.15) 3. Remove the COVER ADF BACK. (See 5.2.1.17) 4. Remove the CLUTCH(Registration roller side). (See 5.2.1.29) 5. Remove the FRAME DRIVE. (See 5.2.1.37) 6. Remove the GUIDE INNER A. (See 5.2.1.38) 7. Remove the GUIDE INNER B. (See 5.2.1.43) 8. Remove the GUIDE INNER C. (See 5.2.1.44) 9. Remove one E-ring and GEAR18P/45.
GUIDE INNER B
GEAR 18P/45
Note:When you remove the E-ring, be careful not to hurt the PULLEY.
5-50
10. 11. 12. 13.
Turn the GUIDE INNER B upside down. Remove two E-rings from the ROLLER FEED C inside. Side two bearing D8 inside. Lift ROLLER FEED to where the hole wider, and rome it.
ROLLER FEED C
5-51
5.2.2 Panel
5.2.2.1 COVER LEFT TOP
1. Opening the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove two screws. 3. Lift the COVER LEFT TOP to release two tab, and then remove the COVER LEFT TOP.
COVER PLATEN
COVER LEFT TOP
5.2.2.2 COVER RIGHT TOP

1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove two screws. 3. Lift the COVER RIGHT TOP to release two tab, and then remove the COVER RIGHT TOP.
COVER PLATEN
COVER RIGHT TOP
5-52
5.2.2.3 COVER FRONT TOP

1. Opening the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove three screws. 5. Release four tabs, by lifting the front side as a fulcrum.
COVER FRONT TOP
COVER PANEL A
6. Remove five screws from COVER PANEL A backside, and then remove the COVER FRONT TOP.
COVER PANEL A
COVER FRONT TOP
5-53
5.2.2.4 COVER BACK TOP

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove three screws and cover size H. 5. Remove COVER BACK TOP by extending its right side.
COVER SIZE H
COVER BACK TOP
5-54
5.2.2.5 COVER PANEL A

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the coverCOVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Disconnet two CONNECTORS. 6. Remove five screws from backside, and then remove the OVER PANEL A.
COVER PANEL A
COVER FRONT TOP
NOTE :When you reasemmble it, be careful of the harnss orientation. The film side comes to the inner side of the machine. The electrode side comes to the panel.
5-55
5.2.2.6 PCB PANEL

1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Disconnect five CONNECTORS. 6. Remove fourteen screws and PCB PANEL.
COVER PANEL
PCB PANEL
NOTE :When you resemmble it, screw the screws in the order as the number printed on the PCB PANEL.
5-56
5.2.2.7 PCB PANEL 2

1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Disconnect one CONNECTOR. 6. Remove six screws and the PCB PANEL 2. 7. Remove one Film harness from PCB PANEL 2 backside.
PCB PANEL2
5-57
5.2.2.8 LCD
1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the PCB PANEL. (See 5.2.2.6) 6. Remove the PCB PANEL2. (See 5.2.2.7) 7. Remove four screws and LCD. 8. Disconnect CONNECTOR.
LCD
Note:Tighten the screws first temparariy, to locate the LCD.
5-58
5.2.2.9 ONE-TOUCH PANEL

1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the PCB PANEL. (See 5.2.2.6) 6. Remove the Panel hinge pin and ONE-TOUCH PANEL.
SENSOR PIN
PIN PANEL HINGE
COVER ONE-TOUCH A
COVER ONE-TOUCH B
Note:Becareful not to lose SENSOR PIN.
5-59
5.2.3 FBS
5.2.3.1 CONTACT GLASS
1. Open the COVER PLANTEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the CONTACT GLASS.
CONTACT GLASS
NOTE:When you resemble, be sure the film attacly side come left and front. NOTE:Becareful not to break the CONTACT GLASS.
5-60
5.2.3.2 PANE
1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H and the COVER SIZE V. 6. Remove PANE.
COVER SIZE V
PANE
NOTE:Be caueful not to break the PNAEL. When you resemble the PANEL, get the boss of the COVER SIZE V be in the hole in the frome.
5-61
5.2.3.3 SENSOR (HOME)

1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (5.2.3.2) 8. Disconnect one CONNECTOR from HOME SENSOR. 9. Remove the SENSOR STOPPER and HOME SENSOR.
CARRIAGE A
SENSOR STOPPER
SENSOR (HOME)
NOTE:When you remove the SENSOR(HOME), move CARRIAGE A to midde the hole.
5-62
5.2.3.4 SENSOR (BEAM)

1. Opening the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (5.2.3.2) 8. Rmove one screw, CONNECTOR and SENSOR (Beam) .
SENSOR (BEAM)
5-63
5.2.3.5 SENSOR (APS)

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 5. Remove the COVER BACK TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 6. Remove four screws, then remove the BRANCKET HINGE L. 7. Remove CONNECTOR and SENSOR STOPPER. 8. Release two tabs, and remove SENSOR(APS).
SENSOR STOPPER
BRACKET HINGE L
SENSOR (APS)
NOTE:When you resemble the BRAKET HINGE L, get the marks on the HINGE meet.
5-64
5.2.3.6 INVERTER
1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (5.2.3.2) 8. Rmove three screws and COVER SCANNER.
COVER SCANNER
5-65
9. Disconnect one CONNECTOR. 10. Remove one screw and BRACKET INVERTER.
BRACKET INVERTER
11. Remove two screws from BRANCKET INVERTER ,then remove the INVERTER.
BRACKET INVERTER
INVERTER
5-66
5.2.3.7 LAMP
1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (5.2.3.2) 8. Remove the BLIND SHEET. 9. Move the MIRROR CARRIAGE A assembly to the center, and then remove two screws. 10. Remove connector and LAMP.
BLIND SHEET
LAMP
HOLDER LAMP B
NOTE:When you resemble, get the harness to be located umder the HOLDER LANP B.
5-67
5.2.3.8 MIRROR CARRIGE A

1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (5.2.3.2) 8. Disconnect the connector between FPS HARNESS and INVERTER. 9. Remove one screw, then remove the FPC HARNESS.
INVERTER
FPC HARNESS
10. Remove the COVER BACK TOP. (See 5.2.2.4) 11. Move the MIRROR CARRIAGE A assembly to the center. 12. Life the GIDE FPC by setting the center tab inside it. 13. Pull out the FPC HARNESS from the hole in CARRIDGE B.
GUIDE FPC
FPC HARNESS
NOTE:When you pullout the harress from the hole, be caretub not to hurt it.
5-68
14. Insert a driver from the right side of the replacing point, and remove the center screw of HOLDER BELT AB.
HOLDER BELT AB
HOLDER BELT AF
15. Remove the center screw from HOLDER BELT AF. 16. Release the BELT from both sides HOLDER BELT tab.
HOLDER BELT AB
HOLDER BELT AF
BELT
BELT
5-69
17. Slant the MIRROR CARRIDGE A and remove it.
MIRROR CARRIAGE A
NOTE:Both sides of MIRROR CARRIDGE a are iquipted with magnets.
5-70
5.2.3.9 MIRROR A
1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (See 5.2.3.2) 8. Remove the LAMP. (See 5.2.3.7) 9. Remove the MIRROR CARRIAGE A. (See 5.2.3.8) 10. Remove the clamp MIRROR AB and AF. 11. Remove the MIRROR A.
MIRROR A
CLAMP MIRROR AB
CLAMP MIRROR AF
NOTE:Remove the CLAMP MIRROR by pressing the spring to the mirror side. NOTE:When you resemble MIRROR, be careful so that the MIRROR SIDE comes upward and face C comes downward.
5-71
5.2.3.10 MIRROR CARRIAGE B

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the COVER BACK TOP. (See 5.2.2.4) 7. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 8. Remove the PANE. (See 5.2.3.2) 9. Remove the MIRROR CARRIAGE A. (See 5.2.3.8) 10. Remove two screws from HOLDER BEL B.
HOLDER BELT B
HOLDER BELT B
11. Release the BELT from the HOLDER BELT tab.
HOLDER BELT B
HOLDER BELT B
BELT
BELT
5-72
12. Slant the MIRROR CARIDGE B and remove it.
MIRROR CARRIAGE B
5-73
5.2.3.11 MIRROR B and C

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (See 5.2.3.2) 8. Remove the MIRROR CARRIAGE B. (See 5.2.3.10 9. Remove the CLAMP MIRROR B, and then remove the MIRROR B and C.
MIRROR B
CLAMP MIRROR B
MIRROR C
LOT NUMBER
CLAMP MIRROR B
LOT NUMBER
NOTE:When you reassemble the MIRROR, be careful that the fase with LOT NLMBER comes to the backside. NOTE:Be careful of the reassembling position. MIRROR B comes upward,MIRROR B comes downward. MIRROR C is thicker for 2mm them B, Reassemble the mirror so that they are facing like the illustration above.
5-74
5.2.3.12 Reassemble the MIRROR CARRIGE.

1. Insert MIRROR CARIDGE A by slamting it, and place it to the center where the frame has holes for inserting a driver. 2. Fasten HOLDER BELT AF and HOLDER BELT AB loosely to the belt.
HOLDER BELT AB
HOLDER BELT AF
FRAME SCANNER
3. Move CARIDGE A so that their tab on both sides touch the right evd. 4. Insert MIRROR GARIDGE B by slanting it.
HOLDER BELT B
HOLDER BELT B
FRAME SCANNER
5-75
5. Place CARIDGE B on the rauls before screw HOLDER BELT B. 6. Screw MIRROR CARIDGE A by inserting a driver from the right hole in the flame to HOLDER BELT AF and AB. 7. Fasten HOLDER BELT B at CARIDGE B.
5-76
5.2.3.13 CCD
1. Opening the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 6. Remove the CONTACT GLASS. (See 5.2.3.1) 7. Remove the PANE. (5.2.3.2) 8. Rmove three screws and COVER SCANNER. 9. Disconnect one HAMESS. 10. Write down the scale of the LENS Assembly location before removing the CCD. 11. Remove two screws and CCD.
CCD
NOTE:When you reassemble, becareful that the harness has its contact side upward and the blue film downward.
5-77
5.2.3.14 FBS MOTOR

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 5. Remove the COVER BACK TOP. (See 5.2.2.4) 6. Rmove four screws and BRANCKET HINGE R. 7. Disconnect harness from BRANCET HINGE R clamp, then remove CONNECTOR.
BRACKET HINGE R
NOTE: When you reassemble, get the marked position on BRACKET HINGE meet.
5-78
8. Remove one spring. 9. Remove three screws and the BRACKET MOTOR ASSY. 10. Remove two screws and a MOTOR.
MOTOR BRACKET MOTOR
P13
NOTE: When you reassemble, first screw the BRACKET MOTER loosely and replace the spring. Then screw it tightly. NOTE: When you reassemblet, becareful of the harness position,and direction of the spring.
5-79
5.2.3.15 PCB SCANNER

1. Remove the COVER PLATEN. (See 5.2.1.16) 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER SIZE H. 5. Remove the COVER BACK TOP. (See 5.2.2.4) 6. Disconnect all connectors and remove four screws, then remove the PCB SCANNER.
PCB SCANNER
5-80
5.2.3.16 FRAME SCANNER

1. Open the COVER PLATEN. 2. Remove the COVER LEFT TOP. (See 5.2.2.1) 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT TOP. (See 5.2.2.2) 4. Remove the COVER FRONT TOP. (See 5.2.2.3) 5. Remove two screws from the FRAME FBS A.
FRAME FBS A
6. Remove two screws and the COVER HARNESS. 7. Remove four screws and the PLATE PRINTER B. 8. Disconnect harness from the PCB SCANNER.
COVER HARNESS P10B PLATE PRINTER B P10A
5-81
9. Remove two screws from the FRAME SCANNER backside, then remove the FRAME SCANNER.
FRAME SCANNER
5-82
5.2.4 PCB
5.2.4.1 PCB PSU
1. Remove four screws and the PLATE PRINTER B. (See 5.2.3.16 7) 2. Remove four screws and release two tabs,then remove the PLATE PRINTER A.
PLATE PRINTER A
3. Discnnect three connectors. 4. Remove four screws and the PCB PSU from the BRACKET PS.
BRACKET PS
PCB PSU
5-83
5.2.4.2 PCB NCU

1. Remove four screws and the PLATE PRINTER B. (See 5.2.3.16 7) 2. Disconnect connector and remove threee screws, then remove the PCB NCU.
PCB NCU
5.2.4.3 PCB MAIN

1. Remove four screws and the PLATE PRINTER B. (See 5.2.3.16 7) 2. Disconnect all connectors of PCB MAIN 3. Remove two screws and release two tabs, then remove the PCB USB. 4. Remove four screws and the PCB MAIN.
SPACER PCB USB PCB MAIN
5-84
5.2.4.4 PCB printer control (PWB-A)

1. Remove four screws and the PLATE PRINTER B. (See 5.2.3.16 7) 2. Remove the PCB NCU. (See 5.2.4.2) 3. Remove two screws of PCB USB. 4. Remove four screws and BRACKET PCB.
PCB MAIN
PCB USB
BRACKET PCB
PCB NCU
5. Disconnect all connectors and remove five screws, then remove the PWB-A.
PWB-A
5-85
5.2.5 Printer section

5.2.5.1 COVER BACK A
1. Remove three screws. 2. Remove the COVER BACK A.
COVER BACK A
5.2.5.2 COVER BACK B

1. Open the SIDE COVER. 2. Remove three screws and the COVER BACK B.
COVER BACK B
5-86
5.2.5.3 SPEAKER
1. Open the SIDE COVER. 2. Remove one screw and the COVER INNER B.
COVER INNER B
3. Remove one screw from the BRACKET COVER A, then remove the COVER FRONT D.
COVER FRONT D
BRACKET COVER A
5-87
4. Remove CONNECTOR, four screws and the SPEAKER
SPEAKER
NOTE: The SPEAKER is located on the COVER FRONT D side.
5-88
5.2.5.4 COUNTER
1. Remove the COVER FRONT D. (See 5.2.5.3 3) 2. Open the FRONT COVER. 3. Remove three screw and the TRAY.
TRAY
4. Remove one plastic clamp from the FRONT COVER. 5. Remove one screw and the BAND. 6.Remove the FRONT COVER by sliding it to the right.
BAND
FRONT COVER
5-89
7. Open the upper cassette, and then remove two screws and the COVER.
COVER
8. Remove six screws and the FRONT COVER.
FRONT COVER
5-90
9. Remove five screws and the COVER.
COVER
STOPPER RING
NOTE: A long screw is used for STOPPER RING. 10. Pull out the tonner cartridge. 11. Remove the COVER. 12. Disconnect the connector from the COUNTER, then release the HARUNESS from the clamp. 13. Remove connector of the COVER SENSOR. 14. Remove three screws and the BRACKET. 15. Remove screw and the COUNTER.
BRACKET
COUNTER
SENSOR
5-91
5.2.5.5 DC Power Supply Assy

Paform step 1 to 10 for desembling the counter.See 5.2.5.4 1. Remove four screws and the harness protective METAL BRACKET.
2. Remove the PLATE PRINTER A. (See 5.2.4.1 2) 3. Remove two screws and the Power Supply FAN MOTOR.
4. Remove the COVER BACK A. (See 5.2.5.1) 5. Remove the LEFT COVER. 6. Remove the REINFORCE PLATE.
5-92
7. Remove five connectors and remove two screws and the DC Power Supply Assy.
5-93
5.2.5.6 HV(High Voltage) TRANSFOMER

1. Open the RIGHT COVER. 2. Pull out the tonner cartridge. 3. Remove two screws and the COVER.
4. Remove two screws and all CONNECTORS, then remove the HV TRANSFOMER.
5-94
5.2.5.7 PH UNIT
1. Remove the TRAY. (See 5.2.5.4 1 to 3) 2. Remove nine screws and the PH protective METAL BRACKET.
3. Remove nine screws and the harness protective METAL BRACKET.
4. Opne the FRONT COVER, then remove one screw and the STOPPER.
5-95
5. Remove three screws and the COVER.
6. Remove two screws and the PAPER OUTPUT TRAY REAR COVER.
7. Remove five screws and three harness protective METAL BRACKET.
8. Remove the harness from the CORD HOLDER.
5-96
9. Remove the plate printer B, then remove CONNECTOR from PCB MAIN. 10. Remove the PCB NCU and bracket PCB, then remove two CONNECTORS from PCB PSU.
11. Remove three screws and the PH UNIT.
Precaution for PH Reinstallation When replacing the PH, install spacers according to the color of the labels affixed to the PH. Screw Position No spacer 0.1 mm spacer 0.1 mm spacer
PH label color Green label Blue label Yellow label Spacers Used 0.1 mm spacer 0.2 mm spacer
A No spacer No spacer 0.2 mm spacer
No spacer 0.2 mm spacer No spacer
Part No. 4030-2053-01 4030-2054-01
Spacer Colo Black White
Should be screw installation position
[A] [B]
[C]
4040F2C659DA
5-97
5.2.5.8 FUSING UNIT

A.When the switchbock unit is not in stalled. 1. Open the RIGHT COVER. 2. Remove the COVER BACK B.
3. Remove one screw and the FRONT RIGHT COVER.
4. Unplug three connectors. 5. Remove the harness from the CORD CLAMP.
5-98
6. Remove two screws and unplug one connector, then remove the FUSING UNIT.
7. Remove two screws and unplug one CONNECTOR.
8. Remove two screws, and the GUIDE PLATE. 9. Remove the FUSING COVER.
5-99
B.when a switch bock ounut is installed. 1. Open the RIGHT COVER. 2. Remove three screws, then remove the COVER BACK B.
3. Remove one screw and the Front RIGHT COVER.
4. Unplug two connectors of the SWITCH BACK UNIT.
5. Remove two screws in FRONT. 6. Loosen the two screws in the BACK.
5-100
7. Remove the SWITCH BACK UNIT.
8. Remove two screws and unplug three connec tors. Then, remove the FUSING UNIT.
5-101
C. Disassembly of the FUSING UNIT. NOTE: Do not confuse the screws with others, when are disassembling covers and other electrical UNITS 1. Remove one C clip and the Fusing Entrance GUIDE PLATE.
2. Remove the wiring from the CORD HOLDER. 3. Remove one screw and the harness protective METAL BRACKET.
4. Unplug four CINNECTORS. 5. Remove three screws and two SIDE COVERS.
6. Remove two screws and two heat LAMP MOUNTING PLATES.
5-102
7. Remove the HEAT LAMP.
8. Unplug the connector and remove the wiring from the CORD HOLDER. 9. Remove four screws and the FUSING EXIT Assy.
10. Remove one screw and the FUSING ROLLER THER MISTOR.
11. Remove one screw and the FUSING ROLLER SUB THERMISTOR.
5-103
12. Remove two screws and the FUSING ROLLER THER MOSTAT Assy.
13. Remove two screws and the FUSING THERMOSTAT.
14. Remove three screws, one E-RING, and the DRIVE GEAR.
15. Remove the pressure spring.
5-104
16. Remove two bearings, two bushings, one gear, and the FUSING ROLLER.
17. Remove one screw and the FUSING PRESSURE ROLLER Assy.
18. Remove two bearings, two pressure levers, and the FUSING PRESSURE ROLLER.
5-105
5.2.5.9 TONER HOPPER UNIT

1. Open the FRONT COVER. 2. Remove one screw and the TONER HOPPER UNIT.
5.2.5.10 PWB-R2 (Pre-Transfer Plate Resistor Board Assy)

1. Open the RIGHT COVER. 2. Pull out the drum cartridge. 3. Remove one screw and the HOLDER.
4. Remove two screws and the Pre-Transfer PlateResistor BOARD Assy.
5-106
5.2.5.11 TRANSFER ROLLER

1. Open the RIGHT DOOR. 2. Pull down the knobs forward and remove the TRANSFER ROLLER.
5.2.5.12 OZONE FILTER

1. Remove four screws and the PLATE PRINTER A. 2. Remove the OZONE FILTER.
5-107
5.2.5.13 SYNCHRONIZING ROLLER / GEAR

1. Open the RIGHT DOOR.
2. Remove two E-rings and two SYNCHRONIZING ROLLER GEARS.
3. Remove one screw and the GROUND PLATE.
NOTE: When reinstalling the GROUND PLATE, make sure that the GROUND PLATE is in contact with the side faces of he bushings.
4. Remove one spring and two Synchronizing ROLLER BUSHINGS.
5-108
NOTE: When reinstalling the bushings, make sure that the flanges of the bushings are on the outside. 5. Remove one E ring and unplug one connector. Then, remove the Synchronizing ROLLER CLUTCH. 6. Remove one washer and two wave washers.
7. Remove one spring, two E rings, and two Synchronizing ROLLER GEARS. NOTE: When reinstalling the bushings, make sure that the langes of the bushings are on the outside.
5-109
5.2.6 PAPER TAKE-UP / TRANSPORT SECTION

5.2.6.1 MANUALl BYPASS UNIT
1. Remove the Rear RIGHT COVER. 2. Remove the Lower RIGHT REAR COVER. 3. Remove the Front MANUALSS COVER. 4. Remove the Rear MANUALSS COVER. 5. Remove five screws and unplug three connectors. Then, remove the MANUALl BYPASS UNIT.
NOTE: When the MANUALl BYPASS UNIT has been mounted, be sure to perform the MANUALl BYPASS UNIT Instalation Check procedures. Manual Bypass Unit Installation Check 1. Remove the Rear RIGHT COVER. 2. Remove the Rear Lower RIGHT COVER. 3. Remove the Manual BYPASS FRONT COVER. 4. Remove the Manual BYPASS REAR COVER. 5. Check the 2nd Drawer PAPER TAKE-UP GUIDE and MANUAL BYPASS GUIDE for correct operation. NOTES Pull open the 2nd Drawer Paper Take-up Door in the direction of the arrow and check that it opens smoothly without binding. If the door binds, perform the installation procedures again for the 2nd Drawer Paper Take-up Roll Assy and MANUAL BYPASS UNIT. 2nd Drawer Paper Take-up G id
Manual Bypass Guide
5-110
5.2.6.2 MANUAL BYPASS PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER

1. Remove the REAR RIGHT COVER. 2. Remove the Lower RIGHT REAR COVER. 3. Remove the Front MANUAL BYPASS COVER. 4. Remove the Rear MANUAL BYPASS COVER. 5. Remove five screws and unplug three connectors. Then, remove the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT.
NOTE When the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT has been mounted, be sure to perform the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT Installation Check procedures. 6. Remove the wiring from the CORD HOLDER. 7. Remove two screws and the FRAME.
8. Remove five screws and the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT LOWER FRAME.
5-111
9. Remove one C clip and the MANUAL BYPASS PAPER TAKE-UP CLUTCH. 10. Snap off one C-clip of the PAPER TAKE-UP ROLL and one bushing.
11. Remove one C clips and the MANUAL BYPASS PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER.
5-112
5.2.6.3 SEPARATOR ROLL Assy

1. Remove the Rear RIGHT COVER. 2. Remove the Lower RIGHT REAR COVER. 3. Remove the Front MANUAL BYPASS COVER. 4. Remove the Rear MANUAL BYPASS COVER. 5. Remove five screws and unplug three connec tors. Then, remove the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT.
NOTE: When the Manual Bypass Unit has been mounted, be sure to perform the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT Installation Check procedures. 6. Remove two screws and the MANUAL BYPASS TRANSPORT COVER. 7. Remove two screws and the MANUAL BYPASS SEPARATOR FIXING BRACKET Assy.
NOTE: Install the MANUAL BYPASS SEPARATOR FIXING BRACKETwhile pressing down so that it coheres to the metal bracket of the copier. 8. Remove the C clip, spring, and GUIDE PLATE. Then, remove the SEPARATOR Roll Assy.
5-113
5.2.6.4 MANUAL PAPER SIZE DETECTION UNIT

1. Remove the Rear RIGHT COVER. 2. Remove the Rear LOWER RIGHT COVER. 3. Remove the MANUAL BYPASS FRONT COVER. 4. Remove the MANUAL BYPASS REAR COVER. 5. Remove five screws, unplug three connectors, and then remove the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT.
6. Remove six screws and the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT COVER.
7. Remove three connectors and the MANUAL PAPER SIZE DETECTION UNIT.
NOTE: When you reassemble it, be sure to performAdiustment of the MANUAL PAPER SIZE DETECTION UNIT described on the next page.
5-114
5.2.6.4.1Adjustment of the MANUALl PAPER SIZE DETECTION UNIT 1. Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear and the mark on the MANUAL BYPASS GUIDE RACK GEAR are aligned in a straight line.
2. Install the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT COVER so that part A (edge) of the Rack Gear for the MANUAL PAPER SIZE DETECTION UNIT and part B of the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT COVER are aligned in a straight line.
A B
3. Plug three conectors, and attach the by pass tray unit to the machie. 4. Reattach all the removed COVERS. 5. Press Setting, *, 4, 9.
6. Spread the bypass tray guide to its maximum, and select [Set]. 7. Narrow the bypass tray guide to its minimum, and select [Set]. The machine adjust its sensor and returns to standby mode.
5-115
5.2.6.5 1st PICKUP ROLLER.

1. Remove the 1st Drawer.
2. Remove two screws and the CONNECTOR COVER.
3. Remove the CONNECTOR. 4. Remove two screws and the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER.
5. Remove four screws and the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy COVER and the 1st SEPARATOR ROLL Assy.
5-116
6. Remove two C clips and two bushings. Then, remove the PICKUP ROLLER Assy.
7. Remove one C clip and the 1st PICKUP ROLLER.
5-117
5.2.6.6 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER

2. Remove two screws and the CONNECTOE COVER.
3. Remove the CONNECTOR. 4. Remove two screws and the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER.
5. Remove four screws and the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy COVER and the 1st SEPARATOR ROLL Assy.
5-118
6. Remove one C-clip and one bushing.
7. Remove two C rings, one bushing, and one spring. Then, remove the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy.
8. Remove one C clip and the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER.
5-119
5.2.6.7 1st SEPARATOR ROLL Assy

2. Remove two screws and the CONNECTOR COVER.
3. Remove the CONNECTOR. 4. Remove two screws and the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy.
5. Remove four screws and the 1st PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER ASSY COVER and the 1st SEPARATOR ROLL Assy.
5-120
6. Remove two screws and the 1st SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET Assy.
7. Remove two E rings and the 1st SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET.
8. Remove one C clip and the 1st SEPARATOR ROLL Assy.
*Precaution for Reinstallation of the Separator Roll Assy Install the 1st SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET Assy while pressing the holder up so that it coheres to the metal bracket of the copier.
5-121
5.2.6.8 Paper Size Detecting Board Assy

2. Unplug two connectors from the master board. 3. Remove two screws and the Lift-Up Assy.
4. Remove four screws and the PAPER SIZE DETECTING BOARD Assy.
5-122
5.2.6.9 2nd PICKUP ROLLER

1. Remove the MANUAL BYPASS UNIT. 2. Slide out the 2nd Drawer. 3. Unhook two tabs and remove the LOWER RIGHT DOOR.
4. Remove two screws and the TRANSPORT ROLLER COVER.
5. Remove two screws and the MISFEED CLEARING COVER.
6. Unplug three CONNECTORS. 7. Remove three screws and the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy.
5-123
8. Remove four screws and one C clip. Then, remove the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER COVER, the 2nd SEPARTOR Roll Assy, and the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER CLUTCH.
9. Remove two C clips and two bushings. Then, remove the 2nd PICKUP ROLLER Assy.
10. Remove one C clip and the 2nd PICKUP ROLLER .
5-124
5.2.6.10 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy

5. Remove two screws and the MISFED CLEARING COVER.
5-125
8. Remove four screws and one C clip. Then, remove the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER COVER, the 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL ASSY, and the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER CLUTCH.
9. Remove two C-clips and one bushing.
10. Remove two C clips and one bushing. Then, remove the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy.
11. Remove one C clip and the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER Assy.
5-126
5.2.6.11 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL

5. Remove two screws and the MISFEED CLEARING COVER.
5-127
8. Remove four screws and one C clip. Then, remove the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER COVER, the 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL Assy, and the 2nd PAPER TAKE-UP ROLLER CLUTCH.
9. Remove two screws and the 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET Assy.
10. Remove two E rings and the 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET.
11. Remove one C clip and the 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL.
*Precaution for Reinstallation of the Separator Roll Assy Install the 2nd SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET ASSY while pressing the holder down so that it coheres to the metal bracket of the copier.
5-128
5.2.6.12 PAPER SIZE DETECTING BOARD Assy

1. Remove one screw.
2. Release the stopper and slide out the 2nd drawer.
3. Unplug two connectors from the master board. 4. Remove two screws and the Lift-Up Assy.
5. Remove four screws and the PAPER SIZE DETECTING BOARD Assy.
5-129
5.2.7 PAPER SUPPLY CABINET 5.2.7.1 Removal of the Pickup Roller/Take-Up Roller/Separator Roll Assy
1. Remove tow screws and the rear RIGHT COVER. 2. Opne the RIGHT DOOR, then remove the RIGHT DOOR. REAR RIGHT COVER.
RIGHTLOWER DOOR
3. Remove two screws, and the GUIDE PLATE.
4. Remove two screws and the PAPER SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET Assy.
5. Remove three C rings and the PAPER SEPARATOR ROLL Assy.
5-130
6. Remove four screws and the PAPER TAKE-UP UNIT.
7. Remove two screws and the COVER. 8. Remove one C-ring and remove the GEAR.
9. Remove two C-rings and remove the bushing. 10. Remove the ROLL Assy.
5-131
13. Remove one C-clip and remove the PAPER TAKE-UP ROLL.
14. Remove two C-rings and remove the bushing.
15. Remove one C-clip and remove the PICKUP ROLLER.
*Precaution for Reinstallation of the SEPARATOR ROLL Assy Install the SEPARATOR ROLL Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the copier.
5-132
5.2.8 2500 sheet paper supply cabinet

5.2.1 Removal of the DRAWER
1. Press the Drawer Eject Button and slide out the DRAWER. 2. Remove the paper. 3. Remove four screws and slide out the DRAWER.
4. Remove the CONNECTOR. 5. Remove two screws and the CONNECTOR BOARD. 6. Remove the DRAWER.
NOTE When removing the CONNECTOR BOARD, use care not to drop the drawer from the GUIDE RAIL. To prevent injuries, press the GUIDE RAIL inside the machine.
5-133
5.2.1.1 Removal of the Wire

1. Remove the DRAWER. 2. Remove four screws and the FRONT COVER Assy. 3. Unplug one CONNECTOR.
4. Remove two screws and the INNER COVER Assy.
5. Remove two screws and the DRIVER COVER.
6. Remove three screws and the DRIVER MOUNTING PLATE Assy.
5-134
NOTE When reinstalling, use caution in the engagement of the GEARS.
7. Remove three screws and the REINFORCEMENT BRACKET Assy.
8. Remove four PULLEY COVERS. 9. Unhook four pulleys.
10. Remove one GROUND PLATE. 11. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs and the MAIN DRAWER. NOTE Use care not to bend the wires.
5-135
12. Remove four screws and the REAR TRAILING EDGE Assy.
13. Remove four screws and the FRONT TRAILING EDGE Assy.
14. Remove three C-rings, two bushings, and two GEARS. 15. Remove the TAKE-UP DRUM Assy.
16. Remove two C-rings, two fixing pins, and the TAKE-UP DRUM Assy.
NOTE When reinstalling the TAKE-UP DRUM, check that the direction of the wire coming from both TAKE-UP DRUMS are the same.
5-136
5.2.1.2 Removal of the PICKUP ROLLER/TAKE-UP ROLLER/SEPARATOR ROLL ASSY

1. Remove tow screws and the rear RIGHT COVER. 2. Opne the right door, then remove the RIGHT DOOR. REAR RIGHT COVER
RIGHT DOOR
3. Remove two screws and the PAPER SEPARATOR ROLL MOUNTING BRACKET Asssy.
4. Remove three C rings and the PAPER SEPARTOR ROLL Assy.
5. Remove four screws and the PAPER TAKE-UP UNIT.
5-137
6. Remove two screws and the COVER. 7. Remove one C-ring and remove the GEAR.
12. Remove one C-clip and remove the PAPER TAKE-UP ROLL.
5-138
14. Remove one C-clip and remove the PICKUP ROLLER.
Precaution for Reinstallation of the SEPARATOR ROLL Assy Install the SEPARATOR ROLL Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the copier.
5-139
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette. 2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS. 3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.
5.3.2 Printer registration mode

This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source. 1. Press SETTING,*,4,3
2. Select the paper source you want to adjust.
3. Select Vertical registration or Horizontal registration.
4. Adjust the printer registration: Toggle + and . Numeric keypad Enter the value. You can enter 000 to 127. For example: When you set +123 for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set 123, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward. When you set +123 for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you set 123, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between 12.7 mm and +12.7 mm.
5-140
5. Press [Enter] to save the settings. If you do not enter the setting, press [Cancel]. 6. To return to the standby, press RESET. Note: If you adjust the printer registration using this mode, the value entered by the machine parameter will also be overwritten.
5-141
5.3.3 Printer registration (top)
Test pattern n
Checkered
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range. Specification Adjustment Tool Setting Range Machine parameter: 180, 200, 220, 240 12.8 to 12.7 (mm) 10 1.5 (mm) Machine parameter: 190, 210, 230, 250 (0.1 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 052 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (Press SETTING, *, 0,4.) 3. Printout the test pattern Checkered with the 1117 size paper. (Press SETTING, *,0, 9, Test Pattern Print.) 4. Check that width A on the test pattern Checkered meets the specifications. If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment. 5. To use the Printer registration mode, press SETTING, *, 4,3, and then Select Cassette. 6. Select [Vertical Registration], and then adjust the Vertical Registration. If the width A is shorter than specification, increase value. If the width A is longer than specification, decrease value. 7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 052, you changed in step 2. Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following Machine parameters. Cassette1 : Machine parameter 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250 Cassette2 : Machine parameter 181, 191, 201, 211, 221, 231, 241, 251 Cassette3 : Machine parameter 182, 192, 202, 212, 222, 232, 242, 252 Cassette4 : Machine parameter 183, 193, 203, 213, 223, 233, 243, 253 LCC : Machine parameter 185, 195, 205, 215, 225, 235, 245, 255 Bypass Tray : Machine parameter 187, 197, 207, 217, 227, 237, 247, 257 Duplex Unit : Machine parameter 188, 198, 208, 218, 228, 238, 248, 258 y Machine Parameter 180 to 188 Adjust the start point to printing. (Vertical) y Machine Parameter 200 to 208 Adjust the end point to printing. (Vertical) y Machine Parameter 190 to 198 Adjust the start point to rotate printing. (Vertical) y Machine Parameter 210 to 218 Adjust the end point to rotate printing. (Vertical) y Machine Parameter 220 to 228 Adjust the top margin. y Machine Parameter 230 to 238 Adjust the bottom margin y Machine Parameter 240 to 248 Adjust the top margin for rotate printing. y Machine Parameter 250 to 257 Adjust the bottom margin for rotate printing.
5-142
5.3.4 Printer registration (side)
A
A
Test pattern
Checkered
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range. Specification Adjustment Tool Setting Range Machine parameter: 100, 120, 140, 160 12.8 to 12.7 (mm) 10 2.0 (mm) Machine parameter: 110, 130, 150, 170 (0.1 mm step)
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 052 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (Press SETTING, *, 0,4.) 3. Printout the test pattern Checkered with the 1117 size paper. (Press SETTING, *,0, 9, Test Pattern Print.) 4. Check that width A on the test pattern Checkered meets the specifications. If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment. 5. To use the Printer registration mode, press SETTING, *, 4,3, and then Select Cassette. 6. Select [Horizon Registration], and then adjust the Horizontal Registration. If the width A is shorter than specification, increase value. If the width A is longer than specification, decrease value. 7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must re-enter the setting of Unique Switch 052, you changed in step 2. Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following Machine parameters. Cassette1 : Machine parameter 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170 Cassette2 : Machine parameter 101, 111, 121, 131, 141, 151, 161, 171 Cassette3 : Machine parameter 102, 112, 122, 132, 142, 152, 162, 172 Cassette4 : Machine parameter 103, 113, 123, 133, 143, 153, 163, 173 LCC : Machine parameter 105, 115, 125, 135, 145, 155, 165, 175 Bypass Tray : Machine parameter 107, 117, 127, 137, 147, 157, 167, 177 Duplex Unit : Machine parameter 108, 118, 128, 138, 148, 158, 168, 170 y Machine Parameter 100 to 108 Adjust the start point to printing. (Horizontal) y Machine Parameter 120 to 128 Adjust the end point to printing. (Horizontal) y Machine Parameter 110 to 118 Adjust the start point to rotate printing. (Horizontal) y Machine Parameter 130 to 138 Adjust the end point to rotate printing. (Horizontal) y Machine Parameter 140 to 148 Adjust the left margin. y Machine Parameter 160 to 168 Adjust the right margin y Machine Parameter 150 to 158 Adjust the left margin for rotate printing. y Machine Parameter 170 to 177 Adjust the right margin for rotate printing.
5-143
5.3.5 FBS registration (top)
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1stcassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. Specification 5 0.7 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:018 Setting Range 4.36 4.36 (mm) (0.14 mm step)
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 052 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (Press SETTING, *, 0,4.) 3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS glass. 4. Make a copy of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check to see if width A on the copy meets the specifications. If width A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Entry the Machine Parameter 018. (Press SETTING, *, 0, 0.) 7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification. If the width A is shorter than specification, decrease value. If the width A is longer than specification, increase value. 8. After you have finished the adjustment, you must re-enter the setting of Unique Switch 052, you changed in step 2.
5-144
5.3.6 FBS registration (side)
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. Adjust so that width A on the copy falls within the following range. Specification 10 0.7 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:015 Setting Range 5.29 5.29 (mm) (0.21 mm step)
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 052 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (Press SETTING, *, 0,4.) 3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS glass. 4. Make a copy of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check to see if width A on the copy meets the specifications. If width A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Entry the Machine Parameter 015. (Press SETTING, *, 0, 0.) 7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification. If the width A is shorter than specification, increase value. If the width A is longer than specification, decrease value. 8. After you have finished the adjustment, you must re-enter the setting of Unique Switch 052, you changed in step 2.
5-145
5.3.7 ADF registration (top)
A
Test Chart No.2000-15 A3
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1stcassette and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. Adjust so that width A on the copy falls within the following range. Specification 20 1.3 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:013, Back side: Machine parameter: 323 Setting Range 10.6710.67 (mm) (0.17 mm step)
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 052 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (Press SETTING, *, 0,4.) 3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 in the ADF. 4. Make a copy of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check to see if width A on the copy meets the specifications. If width A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Entry the Machine Parameter 013 or 323. (Press SETTING, *, 0, 0.) 7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 013 or 323 to meet the specification. If the width A is shorter than specification, decrease value. If the width A is longer than specification, increase value. 8. After you have finished the adjustment, you must re-enter the setting of Unique Switch 052, you changed in step 2.
5-146
5.3.8 ADF registration (bottom)
99-2(B) 2000.1
Test Chart No.99-2
A
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1stcassette and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. Adjust so that width A on the copy falls within the following range. Specification 20 1.3 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:014, Back side: Machine parameter: 324 Setting Range 10.6710.67 (mm) (0.17 mm step)
5-147
5.3.9 ADF registration (side)
A
Test Chart No.2000-15A3
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1stcassette and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. Adjust so that width A on the copy falls within the following range. Specification 20 1.3 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:010, Back side: Machine parameter: 320 Setting Range 5.29 to 5.29 (mm) (0.21 mm step)
5-148
5.3.10 FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)
ABCDEFGHIJKLM abcdefghijklm
A A A A A
A A A A A
DATE MODEL SERIAL TOL.COPY
A
L-1
A A A A A
L-2
L-3
L-4
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made. The difference should be within 0.4% (1.6 mm) of the actual length of A on the test chart No.2000-02. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A (400 mm) on the test chart No.2000-02. Zoom ratio 100 % Specification 400 1.6 (mm) (400 0.4%) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:017 Setting Range 6.0 to 6.0 (mm) ( 1.5 to 1.5 %) (0.1 % (0.4 mm) step)
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS. 3. Make two copies of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference. If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Entry the Machine Parameter 017. (Press SETTING, *, 0, 0.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 017 to meet the specification. If the length A is shorter than specification, increase value. If the length A is longer than specification, decrease value..
5-149
5.3.11 FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
A A A A A
A A A A A
DATE MODEL SERIAL TOL.COPY
A
L-1 L-2 L-3
A A A A A
L-4
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made. The difference should be within 0.4% (1.1 mm) of the actual length of A on the test chart No.2000-02. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A (277 mm) on the test chart No.2000-02. Zoom ratio 100 % Specification 277 1.1 (mm) (277 0.4%) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:016 Setting Range 4.155 to 4.155 (mm) ( 1.5 to 1.5 %) (0.1 % (0.277 mm) step)
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS. 3. Make two copies of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference. If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Entry the Machine Parameter 016. (Press SETTING, *, 0, 0.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification. If the length A is shorter than specification, increase value. If the length A is longer than specification, decrease value.
5-150
5.3.12 ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)
Note: Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made. The difference should be within 0.6% (2.0 mm) of the actual length of A on the test chart No.2000-15. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A (330 mm) on the test chart No.2000-15. Zoom ratio 100 % Specification 330 2.0 (mm) (330 0.6%) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:012 Setting Range 4.95 to 4.95 (mm) ( 1.5 to 1.5 %) (0.1 % (0.33 mm) step)
1. Load the 11 17 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 on the ADF. 3. Make two copies of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference. If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Entry the Machine Parameter 012. (Press SETTING, *, 0, 0.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 012 to meet the specification. If the length A is shorter than specification, increase value. If the length A is longer than specification, decrease value.
5-151
5.3.13 ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made. The difference should be within 0.6% (1.5 mm) of the actual length of A on the test chart No.2000-15. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A (240 mm) on the test chart No.2000-15. Zoom ratio 100 % Specification 240 1.5 (mm) (240 0.6%) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:011, Back side: Machine parameter: 321 Setting Range 3.6 to 3.6 (mm) ( 1.5 to 1.5 %) (0.1 % (0.24 mm) step)
1. Load the 1117 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 in the ADF. 3. Make two copies of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference. If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Entry the Machine Parameter mode. (Press MENU, *, 0.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 011 or 321 to meet the specification. If the length A is shorter than specification, increase value. If the length A is longer than specification, decrease value.
5-152
5.4 Adjusting the image deformation caused by Mirror carriage A and B at the incorrect position
5.4.1 When the copy using the FBS is deformation as shown below, adjust the Mirror carriage position
1. Load the 1117 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 052 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (Press MENU, *,0, 4.) Important: After adjustment, you must re-enter the setting of Unique Switch 052. 3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS. 4. Make a copy of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Measure the length of A and B on the copy to find the difference. 6. Subtract B from A. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. Specification: The difference of A and B should be within 1.1 mm.
If A is longer than B, move the front side of Mirror carriage A to the leftward. If A is shorter than B, move the front side of Mirror carriage A to the rightward. Ex) If the difference is 2mm, move the front side of Mirror carriage A 2mm to the rightward. To move the front side of the mirror carriage: Ex.) If measured vertical length A is 10 mm, and B is 6 mm. Subtract B from A. (10-6= 4 mm) 1. Loosen the front side retainer screw of the Mirror carriage A. 2. Move the front side of the Mirror carriage A 4 mm leftward.
5-153
3. Secure the Mirror carriage A.
5.4.2 When the copy using the FBS is deformation as shown below, adjust the Mirror carriage position
1. Load the 1117 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 052 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (Press MENU, *, 0, 4.) Important: After adjustment, you must re-enter the setting of Unique Switch 052. 3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS. 4. Make a copy of it on the 1117 size paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Measure the width of A and B on the copy to find the difference. 6. Subtract B from A. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. Specification: The difference of A and B should be within 1.5 mm. If is A longer than B, move the front side of Mirror carriage B to the rightward. If A is shorter than B, move the front side of Mirror carriage B to the leftward. Ex) If the difference is 2mm, move the front side of Mirror carriage B 2mm to the leftward. To move the front side of the mirror carriage: Ex.) If measured vertical length a is 10 mm, and B is 6 mm. Subtract B from a. (10-6= 4 mm) 1. Loosen the front side retainer screw of the Mirror carriage B. 2. Move the front side of the Mirror carriage B 4 mm rightward. 3. Secure the Mirror carriage B.
5-154
5.4.3 Adjusting the position of Mirror carriage A and B

1) Temporarily loosen the screw of the belt retainer to move the mirror carriages. 2) Move the Mirror carriage A and B to the right end until they stop. 3) Secure the carriages at this position. Tighten the screw of the belt retainer. Note: After this adjustment, confirm the copy image quality and adjust the image deformation, if necessary.
5-155
5.5 ADF Adjustments

5.5.1 Height adjustment
1. Check that the Document press side document table stopper comes into contact with contact glass both on its front and back when the ADF is closed.
2. Remove the COVER BACK TOP. (See 5.2.3.4) 3. Loosen the nut on the HINGE and adjust the height of ADF and the inclination of the PAD by screwing hexagon socket set screw. Screw the screw in direction A makes lifting the front side and sinking the rear side. Screw the screw in direction B makes sinking the front side and lifting the rear side.
Note : After adjusting, tighten the nut firmly.
5-156
If the ADF doesnt have enough height, skew or deformation may occur.
5-157
5.5.2 Squareness adjustment

5.5.2.1 Outline
You can adjust original skew by adjusting the position of ROLLER REGIST. The position of ROLLER REGIST will be adjusted through changing the mounting position of HOLDER REGIST.
5.5.2.2 Adjustment
1. Remove the HOLDER REGIST.
2. Turn the HOLDER REGIST upside down and reattach it.
Screw mounting position for adjustment.
A
Original screw mounting position Standard position
When you move the mounting position to direction A, the printout will turn clockwise on the recording paper.
When you move the mounting position to direction B, the printout will turn counterclockwise on the recording paper.
5-158
5.5.3 Platen cover adjustment

You can adjust the document feeding condition by changing the Platen cover position.
5.5.3.1 Outline
Check the height between the Platen cover and Top left cover at front and rear side.
5.5.3.2 Adjustment
Turn the Hinge plate, and adjust the Platen cover mounting position. When the front side of the Platen cover is outer than the Top left cover Assemble the Platen cover with the larger number on the Hinge plate coming to the front side. When the front side of the Platen cover is inner than the Top left cover Assemble the Platen cover with the smaller number on the Hinge plate coming to the front side.
Note: Refer to COVER PTATEN (section 5, page 5-20) for reassembling the Platen cover.
5-159
-1
0
1
5.5.4 Piece separator pressure adjustment

When the document feeding or document separation is bad even if the rollers are not wearing or cleaned, adjust the Piece separator pressure.
Remove Piece separator. (See 5.2.2.8) Insert the precision screwdriver as illustrated above. Then turn the separation pressure adjustment screw with referring the following table. Rotate direction Counterclockwise Clockwise Retard roller pressure Up Down Document Feeding To be bad To be good Document Separation To be good To be bad
5-160
Section6 Options
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Expansion Memory ................................................6-2 Telephone Handset................................................6-4 Paper feed unit (500 sheets)..................................6-7 Large capacity cassette (2500 sheets).................6-21 Duplex / Switchback / 2-Bin tray unit....................6-48 AL-500 .................................................................6-64 OP-500 ................................................................6-69 NP-500.................................................................6-72 OB-500 ................................................................6-75 Finisher / Punch unit ...........................................6-80
6-1
Options
Memory Upgrade
6.1 Memory Upgrade
6-2
Memory Upgrade
Options
6.1.1 Memory Upgrade

An optional 32 MB document memory upgrade is available for the MFX-2830. To install the memory upgrade PCB: 1. Turn the machine off and remove the power cord and line cord. 2. Remove the plate printer E. 3. Holding the memory module only by the edges, gently but firmly set the memory module to the memory slot (P6 connector), then push it until it snaps.
Plug the power cord and turn the machine on. 5. Clear the DRAM. (Press Setting, *, 1, 6, and select [Yes].) Important: The DRAM clear setting will erase all documents in memory. 7. Perform a DRAM test whenever an optional memory upgrade is added to the unit. 1) Press setting, *, 1, 1, and select [DRAM check]. 2) Use the numeric keypad and one-touch keys to select Hex code (00 to FF), and press start. 3) Enter DRAM check area by number. (See table below) Number 0 1 2 3 4 Check area All DRAM The first half of DRAM (16MB) installed on the main PCB The second half of DRAM (16MB) installed on the main PCB The first half of the upgraded DRAM (16MB) The second half of the upgraded DRAM (16MB)
8. Print the Fax Setting (In Fax mode, press List, select [Settings List], [Fax Settings]).Check the memory amount printed below the Name and confirm the amount. The memory amount of the upgraded memory (64 MB) is 65536 KB.S"). Built-in Connector P6 Total memory Storage capacity 32 MB 32 MB (8192 KB) 2533 pages Standard Spec. 32 MB + 32 MB 64 MB (65536 KB) 5263 pages 9. Re-attach the plate printer E.
6-3
6.2 Telephone Handset

6.2.1 Attaching the optional handset ......................................................................................................6-5 6.2.2 Adjusting handset ..........................................................................................................................6-6
6-4
Telephone handset
Options
6.2.1 Attaching the optional handset

Here is how to attach the handset.
Without a finisher
1. Remove the two screw caps. 2. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, attach the cord holder and the handset cradle to the left side of your machine, with the screws included with the cradle.
3. Plug one end of the handset cord (its curled) into the PHONE1 jack on the rear of your machine. 4. Plug the other end of the handset cord into the jack on the handset. If connected to a phone line, your machine is now off-hook. 5. Place the telephone handset onto the handset cradle. The cradle will press the handsets flash button, hanging up the handset. Note: Make the curled cord to be held with the cord holder as shown at right.
With a finisher
1. Screw the handset cradle to the handset bracket. (two screws)
6-5
Options 2. Remove a screw from the back top side of the finisher. (Do not remove the cover. )
Telephone handset
3. Peel off the seal from the handset bracket, and put the bracket with cradle on the finisher. 4. Press the bracket toward the finisher strongly and screw it. (Do not reused the screw removed at step 2. Use the new prepared one.)
5. Plug the handset into the PHONE1 jack on the left of your machine. 6. Plug the other side of the handset cord into the jack on the handset.
6.2.2 Adjusting handset

The small switches on the side of your machines handset adjust the ringer volume and the receiver volume.
Ringer Volume Hearing Volume
Ringer Volume Control Adjust the ringer volume to one of three settings: High, Medium, or Low. Hearing Volume Control If you are hard to hear the remote persons voice, adjust the receiver volume to one of three settings; High, Medium, or Low.
6-6
6.3 PAPER FEED UNIT

6.3.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ....................................................................................6-8 6.3.1.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................6-8 6.3.1.2 PARTS IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................................6-8 6.3.1.3 DRIVE SYSTEM .....................................................................................................................6-9 6.3.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-9 6.3.1.5 MECHANICAL OPERATIONS..............................................................................................6-10 6.3.2 DIS/REASSEMBLE, CLEANING.................................................................................................6-11 6.3.2.1 Disassembly .........................................................................................................................6-11 6.3.2.2 Cleaning................................................................................................................................6-14 6.3.3 MISFEED DETECTION...............................................................................................................6-16 6.4.3.1 Initial Check ..........................................................................................................................6-16 6.3.3.2 Misfeed detection..................................................................................................................6-16 6.3.4 Service call error .........................................................................................................................6-19 6.3.4.1 Printer error code..................................................................................................................6-19
6-7
Options
Paper Feed Unit
6.3.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL

6.3.1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Type Installation Type of Copy Paper Paper Sizes Paper Weight Registration Capacity Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions : Add-on paper source unit : Mounted beneath Upper Drawer of copier : Plain paper, recycled paper : Letter(SEF/LEF), Legal(SEF), Ledger(SEF), Half-letter(SEF/LEF), A3(SEF), B4(SEF), A4(SEF/LEF), B5(SEF/LEF), A5(SEF/LEF) : Plain paper 60 to 100 g/m2, Recycled paper 60 to 90 g/m2. : Center : 500 sheets : DC24 V 10 %, DC5 V 5 % (supplied from copier) : 15 W or less : Width ... 570 mm or 22-1/2 in Depth ... 548 mm or 21-1/2 in Height ... 263 mm or 10-1/4 in : 27 kg or 57-1/4 lbs.
Weight
6.3.1.2 PARTS IDENTIFICATION

1 2
1. Right Door 2. Rear Right Cover 3. Lower Right Cover 4. Front Right Cover 5. Rear Cover 6. Left Cover
6-8
Paper Feed Unit
Options
6.3.1.3 DRIVE SYSTEM

Paper Take-Up/Transport Revolving Section
6.3.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LAYOUT

M122-PF M124-PF PC113-PF PC112-PF PC119-PF PC118-PF PWB-I PF M121-PF M123-PF M125-PF M120-PF PC111-PF PC114-PF PC117-PF PC116-PF PC126-PF PC115-PF
PC121-PF
PWB-C2 PF PC125-PF PWB-I PF PC127-PF PC128-PF PC122-PF PC123-PF
PC124-PF
Symbol
PWB-C2 PF PWB-I PF M120-PF M121-PF M122-PF M123-PF M124-PF M125-PF PC111-PF PC112-PF PC113-PF PC114-PF PC115-PF
Name
Control Board 3rd/4th Drawer FD Paper Size Detection Board 3rd Drawer Transport Roller Motor 4th Drawer Transport Roller Motor 3rd Drawer Paper Feed Motor 4th Drawer Paper Feed Motor 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor r 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor Door Set Sensor 3rd Drawer Set Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Near-Empty Sensor 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor
Symbol
PC116-PF PC117-PF PC118-PF PC119-PF PC121-PF PC122-PF PC123-PF PC124-PF PC125-PF PC126-PF PC127-PF PC128-PF
Name
3rd Drawer Paper Take Sensor 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor 3rd Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 3rd Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 2 4th Drawer Set Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Near-Empty Sensor 4th Drawer Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Empty Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor 4th Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 1 4th Drawer CD Paper Size Detecting Sensor 2
6-9
Options
Paper Feed Unit
6.3.1.5 MECHANICAL OPERATIONS

6.3.1.5.1 Paper Take-Up Mechanism
The same paper take-up mechanism is used for both the copier and cabinets. The Paper Feed Motor drives the Pickup Roller and Paper Take-up Roller to take up and feed a sheet of paper into the copier. Then, the Transport Motor transports the paper through the vertical transport section.
Paper Lift-up Sensor Pickup Roller Lever Feed Roller
Polyethylene sheet
6-10
Paper Feed Unit
Options
6.3.2 DIS/REASSEMBLE, CLEANING

6.3.2.1 Disassembly
6.3.2.1.1 Removal of Pickup Roller/Take-Up Roller/Separator Roll Assy
1. Remove two screws and the Rear Right Cover. 2. Open the Right Door, and remove it.
3. Remove two screws, and the guide plate.
4. Remove two screws and the Paper Separator Roll Mounting Bracket Assy.
5. Remove three C rings and the Paper Separator Roll Assy.
6-11
Options
Paper Feed Unit
6. Remove four screws and the Paper Take-Up Unit.
7. Remove two screws and the cover. 8. Remove one C-ring and remove the gear.
9. Remove two C-rings and remove the bushing. 10. Remove the Roll Assy.
11. Remove two C-rings and remove the bushing. 6-12
Paper Feed Unit 12. Remove the Roll Assy.
Options
13. Remove one C-clip and remove the Paper Take-Up Roll.
15. Remove one C-clip and remove the Pickup Roller.
16. Repeat steps 3 to 15 similarly for the 4th Drawer.
6-13
Options
Paper Feed Unit
6.3.2.2 Cleaning
6.3.2.2.1 Cleaning of the Pickup Roller/Paper Take-Up Roller/Separator Roll
1. Remove two screws and the Rear Right Cover. 2. Open the Right Door, and remove it.
3. Remove two screws, and the guide plate.
4. Remove two screws and the Paper Separator Roll Mounting Bracket Assy.
5. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separator Roll clean of dirt.
6-14
Paper Feed Unit
Options
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe he Pickup Roller and Paper Take-Up Roller clean of drift.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 7 similarly for the 4th Drawer.
6.3.2.2.2 Cleaning of the Vertical Transport Roller

1. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a soft cloth damped with alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport Roller clean of dirt.
3. Dampen a soft cloth with alcohol and wipe the surface of the Separator Roll clean of dirt.
6-15
Options
Paper Feed Unit
6.3.3 MISFEED DETECTION

6.4.3.1 Initial Check
When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial checks. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the paper path deformed or worn? Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Action Replace paper. Replace paper. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. Clean the paper path and replace if necessary. Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. Set as necessary. Correct or replace the defective actuator.
6.3.3.2 Misfeed detection

6.3.3.2.1 Location of Misfeed Detecting Sensors
The explanation given hereunder is based on a cassette configuration, as illustrated below, of the 3rd drawer and 4th drawer.
3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) 6-16
Paper Feed Unit
Options
6.3.3.2.2 Misfeed Detection Timing

(1) Paper take-up misfeed <3rd Drawer> <Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 3rd Drawer Paper Feed Motor has been energized.
Detection of The 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the paper remaining in Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed the Paper Takeor malfunction is reset. Up The 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the section Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. <Action> Relevant Electrical Components 3rd Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Control Board PWB-C2 PF 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) 3rd Drawer Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
Step
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-8 page 6-16 F-3 page 6-20 F-3 page 6-20 E-3 page 6-20 page 6-20
1 2 3 4 5
6-17
Options (2) 4th Drawer Take-Up Section Misfeed (Option) <Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection
Paper Feed Unit
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 4th Drawer Paper Feed Motor has been energized.
Detection of The 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the paper remaining in Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed the Paper Takeor malfunction is reset. Up The 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the section Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. <Action> Relevant Electrical Components 4th Drawer Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Control Board PWB-C2 PF 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) 4th Drawer Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF)
Step
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2 PF-2 PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-8 page 6-16 E-8 page 6-20 E-8 page 6-20 D-8 page 6-20 page 6-20
1 2 3 4 5
6-18
Paper Feed Unit
Options
6.3.4 Service call error

6.3.4.1 Printer error code
When certain machine problems occur these messages will appear in the LCD. Code 15 16 Description 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure Detection Timing The Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer has begun.
(1) 15: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure 16: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor Failure Trouble Code 06 07 15 16 Description The Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer has begun.
Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Lift-Up Motor 2 (M125-PF) Lift-Up Sensor 1 (PC114-PF) Lift-Up Sensor 2 (PC123-PF)
Relevant Electrical Parts Master Board PWB-A Power Supply Unit (PU1) Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
Step
Operations Check the connectors of each motor and sensor for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the connector of each motor for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. Check the PU1 connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC114-PFsensor check PC123-PF sensor check M124-PF operation check. M125-PF operation check. Replace the PWB-C2 PF Control Board. Replace PWB-A. Replace PU1.
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-3 PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-3 PWB-C2 PF PJ4C2 PF-5,4 PWB-C2 PFPJ8C2 PF-12,13 G-3 page 6-20 F-8 page 6-20 D-3 page 6-20 G-3 page 6-20 page 6-20
6-19
. 6-20
6.4 Large Capacity Cassette

6.4.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ..................................................................................6-22 6.4.1.1 Specifications........................................................................................................................6-22 6.4.1.2 PARTS IDENTIFICATION ....................................................................................................6-22 6.4.1.3 Drive System ........................................................................................................................6-23 6.4.1.4 Electrical Components Layout..............................................................................................6-24 6.4.1.5 Mechanical Operations .........................................................................................................6-25 6.4.2 DIS/REASSEMBLY, CLEANING.................................................................................................6-27 6.4.2.1 Disassembly .........................................................................................................................6-27 6.4.2.2 Cleaning................................................................................................................................6-35 6.4.3 MISFEED/MALFUNCTION DETECTION ...................................................................................6-37 6.4.3.1 Initial Check ..........................................................................................................................6-37 6.4.3.2 Misfeed Detection .................................................................................................................6-37 6.4.4 Service call error .........................................................................................................................6-39 6.4.4.1 Printer error code..................................................................................................................6-39
6-21
Options
Large Capacity Cassette

6.4.1.1 Specifications
Type Installation Type of Copy Paper Paper Sizes Capacity Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions : Front loading type LCC : Desk type : Plain paper (56 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ) Recycled paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ) : Letter(LEF), A4(LEF) : 2500 sheets : DC24 V 10 %, DC5 V 5 % (supplied from copier) : 45 W or less : Width ... 570 mm or 22-1/2 in Depth ... 564 mm or 22-1/2 in Height ... 263 mm or 10-1/4 in : 26 kg or 53-1/4 lbs.
Weight
6.4.1.2 PARTS IDENTIFICATION

1 2
4 3
1. Front Right Cover 2. Rear Right Cover 3. Right Door 4. Lower Right Cover 5. Left cover 6. Rear Cover
6-22
Options
6.4.1.3 Drive System

Paper Take-Up/Transport Revolving Section
Main Tray Paper Lift-Up Drive
Shift Gate Drive
Shifter Drive
6-23
Options
6.4.1.4 Electrical Components Layout

SL1 -LCC PWBC1 LCC M1LCC PC 2-LCC M 2-LCC PC5LCC PC 6-LCC PWB -E LCC PC 1-LCC PC3LCC
PC4-LCC PC1 3-LCC PC10 -LCC M5LCC M 4-LCC PC8 -LCC UN1 -LCC M3-L CC PC12 -LCC PC1 1-LCC PC9 -LCC PC 7-LCC
PW B-H LCC PC 14-LCC
Symbol PWB-C1 LCC PWB-E LCC PWB-H LCC UN1-LCC M1-LCC M2-LCC M3-LCC M4-LCC M5-LCC SL1-LCC PC1-LCC PC2-LCC PC3-LCC
Name Control Board Paper Empty Board Connector Interface Board Paper Descent Key LCC Take-Up Motor Vertical Transport Drive Motor Shift Gate Motor Shift Motor Elevator Motor Tray Lock Solenoid LCC Paper Take-Up Sensor LCC Vertical Transport Sensor Upper Paper Empty Sensor
Symbol PC4-LCC PC5-LCC PC6-LCC PC7-LCC PC8-LCC PC9-LCC PC10-LCC PC11-LCC PC12-LCC PC13-LCC PC14-LCC
Name Tray Upper Limit Sensor Right Lower Door Sensor Tray Set Sensor Lower Limit Sensor Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Shifter Stop Position Sensor Lift-Up Sensor 1 Shifter Home Position Sensor Elevator Lower Position Sensor Shift Gate Home Position Sensor
6-24
Options
6.4.1.5 Mechanical Operations

6.4.1.5.1 Paper Take-Up Mechanism
The same paper take-up mechanism is used for both the copier and cabinets. The Paper Feed Motor drives the Pickup Roller and Paper Take-up Roller to take up and feed a sheet of paper into the copier. Then, the Transport Motor transports the paper through the vertical transport section.
Paper Lift-up Sensor Pickup Roller Lever Feed Roller
Polyethylene sheet
6-25
Options
6.4.1.5.2 Paper supply from the sub-tray

If the LCC Main Tray runs out of paper, while the Sub Tray is loaded with paper, the paper stack on the Sub Tray is moved to the Main Tray. At this time, the Shift Gate Motor is energized to retract the front and rear Shift Gates. Then, the Shift Motor is energized to move the Shifter so that the paper stack on the Sub Tray is moved onto the Main Tray.
(1) Shift Gate
Sub Tray
Main Tray
Ltr
The Shifter continues moving at this time until the Shifter Return Position Sensor is activated. When the sensor is activated, the Shift Motor is turned backward and the Shifter is brought to a stop when the Shifter Home Position Sensor is activated.
6-26
Options
6.4.2 DIS/REASSEMBLY, CLEANING

6.4.2.1 Disassembly
6.4.2.1.1 Removal of Exterior Parts
1 2
4 3
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Part Name Front Right Cover Rear Right Cover Right Door Lower Right Cover Left Cover Rear Cover
Removal Steps Remove two screws and the drawer. Remove two screws and the drawer. Open the Right Door. Remove the Right Door. Remove two screws and the drawer. Remove four screws and the cover. Remove four screws and the cover.
6-27
Options
6.4.2.1.2 Removal of the Drawer

1. Press the Drawer Eject Button and slide out the drawer. 2. Remove the paper. 3. Remove four screw and slide out the drawer.
4. Remove the connector. 5. Remove two screws and the Connector Board. 6. Remove the Drawer.
NOTE When removing the Connector Board, use care not o drop the drawer from the guide rail..
6-28
Options
6.4.2.1.3 Removal of the Wire

1. Remove the Drawer. 2. Remove four screws and the Front Cover Assy. 3. Unplug one connector.
4. Remove two screws and the Inner Cover Assy.
5. Remove two screws and the Driver Cover.
6. Remove three screws and the Driver Mounting Plate Assy.
6-29
Options NOTE When reinstalling, use caution in the engagement of the gears.
7. Remove three screws and the Reinforcement
8. Remove four Pulley Covers. 9. Unhook four pulleys.
10. Remove one Ground Plate. 11. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs and the Main Drawer.
NOTE Use care not to bend the wires. 12. Remove four screws and the Rear Trailing Edge Assy. 6-30
Options
13. Remove four screws and the Front Trailing Edge Assy.
14. Remove three C-rings, two bushings, and two gears. 15. Remove the Take-Up Drum Assy.
16. Remove two C-rings, two fixing pins, and the Take-Up Drum Assy. NOTE When reinstalling the Take-Up Drum, check that the direction of the wire coming from both Take-Up Drums are the same.
6-31
Options
6.4.2.1.4 Removal of the Pickup Roller/Take-Up Roller/Separator Roller

1. Remove the Rear Right Cover. 2. Remove the Right Door. 3. Remove two screws and the Paper Separator Roll Mounting Bracket Assy.
4. Remove three C rings and the Paper Separator Roll Assy.
5. Remove four screws and the Paper Take-Up Unit.
6-32
Large Capacity Cassette 6. Remove two screws and the cover. 7. Remove one C-ring and remove the gear.
Options
12. Remove one C-clip and remove the Paper Take- Up Roll.
6-33
Options 13. Remove two C-rings and remove the bushing.
14. Remove one C-clip and remove the Pickup Roller.
Precaution for Reinstallation of the Separator Roll Assy Install the Separator Roll Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the copier.
6-34
Options
6.4.2.2 Cleaning
6.4.2.2.1 Cleaning of the Pickup Roller/Paper Take-Up Roller/Separator Roller
1. Remove two screws and the Rear Right Cover. 2. Open the Right Door, and remove it. 3. Remove two screws and the Paper Separator Roll Mounting Bracket Assy.
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separator Roll clean of dirt.
5. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe he Pickup Roller and Paper Take-Up Roller clean of drift.
6-35
Options
6.4.2.2.1 Cleaning of the Vertical Transport Roller

1. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a soft cloth damped with alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport Roller clean of dirt.
6-36
Options
6.4.3 MISFEED/MALFUNCTION DETECTION

6.4.3.2 Misfeed Detection

6.5.3.2.1 Location of Misfeed Detecting Sensors
The explanation given hereunder is based on an optional paper source configuration, as illustrated below of the LCC.
LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC-LCC) LCC Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1-LCC)
6-37
Options

Paper take-up misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Paper Take-Up Section misfeed detection
Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCC) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the LCC Paper Feed Motor is energized.
Detection of The LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCC) is blocked when the Power paper remaining in Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or the Paper Takemalfunction is reset. Up The LCC Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1-LCC) is blocked when the Power section Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.. <Action> Relevant Electrical Components LCC Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) LCC Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC1-LCC) LCC Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCC)
Step
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ5C1 LCC-5 PWB-C1 LCC PJ5C1 LCC-2 page 6-37 C-6 page 6-47 C-6 page 6-47 P-6 page 6-47
1 2 3 4 5
Initial checks PC2-LCC sensor check PC1-LCC sensor check M1-LCC operation check PWB-C1 LCC replacement
6-38
Options

Malfunction Code 21 Description LCC Elevator Motor Failure Detection Timing The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCC) is turning backward/for-ward (raise/lower). The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-down operation began. The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began. The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCC) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCC) began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCC) set to L. Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCC) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
23
LCC Lift Failure
24
LCC Shift Gate Operation Failure
25
LCC communication error
26
LCC Shift Motor Failure
6-39
Options Malfunction Code 27
Description LCC Shift Failure
Detection Timing The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8LCC) after the return operation began (shift to the left). The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCC) is energized after the lowering operation is finished.
LCC Lock Release Failure
6-40
Large Capacity Cassette (1) 21: LCC Elevator Motor Failure Trouble Code 21 Description The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCC) is turning backward/for-ward (raise/lower).
Options
Relevant Electrical Parts Elevator Motor (M5-LCC) Interface Board (PWB-H LCC) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-5 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-7,6 F-2 page6-47 H-2 page6-47 F-6 page6-47 E-8 page6-47
Step
Operations Check the motor connectors for connection, and correct as necessary. PC10-LCC sensor check M5-LCC operation check PWB-H LCC replacement PWB-C1 LCC replacement proper
1 2 3 4 5
6-41
Options (2) 23: LCC Lift Failure Trouble Code
21
Description The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began. The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) after the paper lift-down operation began. The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began.
Relevant Electrical Parts Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCC) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCC) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ5C1 LCC-12 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-9 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-5 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-2 B-6 page 6-47 D-2 page 6-47 F-2 page 6-47 H-2 page 6-47 E-8 page 6-47
Step
Operations Check the sensor connectors for connection, and correct as necessary. PC4-LCC sensor check PC13-LCC sensor check PC10-LCC sensor check PC7-LCC sensor check PWB-C1 LCC replacement proper
1 2 3 4 5 6
6-42
Large Capacity Cassette (3) 24: LCC Shift Gate Operation Failure Trouble Code 24 Description The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCC) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCC) began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14LCC) set to L.
Options
Relevant Electrical Parts Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) LCC) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-1 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-3,4 I-2 page6-47 I-2 page6-47 E-8 page6-47
Step
Operations Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. PC14-LCC sensor check M3-LCC operation check PWB-C1 LCC replacement
1 2 3 4
(4) 25: LCC communication error Trouble Code 25 Description Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) E-8 page6-47
Step
Operations
1 2
Turn the copier off, then on again PWB-C1 LCC replacement
6-43
Options (5) 26: LCC Shift Motor Failure Trouble Code 26
Description The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCC) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
Relevant Electrical Parts Shift Motor (M4-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-3 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-5,4 G-2 page6-47 H-2 page6-47 E-8 page6-47
Step
Operations Check the motor connectors for connection, and correct as necessary. PC8-LCC sensor check M4-LCC operation check PWB-C1 LCC replacement proper
1 2 3 4
6-44
Large Capacity Cassette (6) 27: LCC Shift Failure Trouble Code Description The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the return operation began (shift to the left). The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) after the return operation began (shift to the left).
Options
26
Relevant Electrical Parts Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCC) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCC) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-3 PWB-C1 LCC PJ3C1 LCC-7 PWB-C1 LCC PJ4C1 LCC-8 G-2 page6-47 E-2 page6-47 D-2 page6-47 E-8 page6-47
Step
Operations Check each sensor connectors for connection, and correct as necessary. PC8-LCC sensor check PC11-LCC sensor check PC12-LCC sensor check PWB-C1 LCC replacement proper
1 2 3 3 4
6-45
Options (7) LCC Lock Release Failure e
Trouble Code
Description The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCC) is energized after the lowering operation is finished. Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-C1 LCC) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-C1 LCC PJ7C1 LCC-4 E-6 page6-47 E-8 page6-47
Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCC)
Step
Operations Check the SL1-LCC connector for connection, and correct as necessary. SL1-LCC operation check PWB-C1 LCC replacement proper
1 2 3
6-46
6-47
6.5 Duplex/Swichback/2-Bin Tray Unit

6.5.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ..................................................................................6-49 6.5.1.1 Specifications........................................................................................................................6-49 6.5.1.2 DRIVE SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................6-51 6.5.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LAYOUT .............................................................................6-52 6.5.1.4 Operation Of Each Mechanism ............................................................................................6-53 6.5.2 DIS/REASSEMBLY, CLEANING.................................................................................................6-54 6.5.2.1 Disassembly .........................................................................................................................6-54 6.5.2.2 Cleaning................................................................................................................................6-56 6.5.3 MISFEED DETECTION...............................................................................................................6-58 6.5.3.1 Initial Check ..........................................................................................................................6-58 6.5.3.2 Misfeed Detection .................................................................................................................6-59
6-48
Duplex/Switchback/2-Bin tray unit
Options

<Duplex Unit> Name Type Installation Paper Size Paper Type Document Alignment Power Requirements : Duplex Unit : Sheet duplex paper take-up section : Installed to the right side door : A5L (5-1/2 x 8-1/2L) to A3L (11 x 17L) : Plain paper (56 g/m 2 to 90 g/m 2 ), recycled paper (60 g/m 2 to 90 g/m 2 ) : Center baseline : DC 24 V (supplied from the copier) DC 5 V Max. Power Consumption : 10 W or less : 89(W) x 358 (H) x 419(D) mm 3-1/4 x 14 x 16-1/2 : 2.2 kg (4-3/4 lbs) : Conforms to the operating environment of the copier.
Dimensions Weight Operating Environment <SwitchbackUnit> Name Type Installation Paper size Paper Type Document Alignment Power Requirements
Dimensions Weight Operating Environment
: Switchback Unit : Switch back circulation section : Installed to the right side : A5L (5-1/2 x 8-1/2L) to A3L (11 x 17L) : 56 g/m 2 to 210 g/m 2 : Center baseline : DC 24 V (supplied from the copier) DC 5 V Max. Power Consumption : 15 W or less : 338(W) x 148(H) x 481(D) mm 13-1/4 x 5-3/4 x 19 : Approx. 1.7 kg (3-3/4 lbs) : Conforms to the operating environment of the copier.
6-49
Options <2-Bin Tray> Name Type Installation Number of drawers
Paper Paper Output Tray
1st Drawer
2nd Drawer
: Job Separator : Expansion drawer : Installed in the copier : 2 bins 1st Drawer (shared with the copier drawer) 2nd Drawer : See the table below. Paper size Paper Type Plain paper (56 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ) Recycled paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ) B6L to A3L OHP transparencies 8-1/2 C to 11 x 17 Thick paper (91 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 ) Width: 90 mm to 297 mm Envelope 3-1/2 to 11-3/4 Label Special Length: Translucent paper 139.7 mm to 432 mm Letterhead 5-1/2 to 17 Government-standard postcards Plain paper (56 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ) A5 to A3L 5-1/2 to 8-1/2 Maximum 297 mm x 432 mm 11-3/4 x 17 Recycled paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ) Minimum 139.7 mm x 140 mm 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 : Center baseline : DC 5.1 V 5 % (supplied from the copier) : 0.2 W or less : 450(W) x 75(H) x 443(D) mm 17-3/4(W) x 3(H) x 17-1/2(D) : 1.7 kg (3-3/4) : Conforms to the operating environment of the copier.
Capacity 250 sheets
20 sheets
100 sheets
Document Alignment Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight Operating Environment
6-50
Options

Switch back/output revolving section
Switchback Unit
Duplex Unit
Transport revolving section
6-51
Options

Duplex and Switchback Unit
Switch Back
M3
SL4
M10
PC26 CL6
PC23
PC24
CL7
PC25
Duplex Unit
Symbol
M3 M10 SL24 PC23 PC24
Name
Switch Back Motor Fusing Ventilation Fan Motor Switch Back Solenoid Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor
Symbol
PC25 PC26 CL6 CL7
Name
Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor Switch Back Unit Sensor Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Roller Clutch1 Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Roller Clutch2
2-Bin Tray
PC1-JOB PC2-JOB
Symbol
PC1-JOB
Name
Paper Full Detecting Sensor
Symbol
PC2-JOB
Name
Paper Empty Detecting Sensor
6-52
Options
6.5.1.4 Operation Of Each Mechanism

6.5.1.4.1 Switchback Mechanism
(1) Switchback and Duplex unit The Switchback Solenoid drives the Exit/Switchback Selecting Gate to select the paper path either toward the exit section or the switchback section. The Switchback Motor turns forward to feed the paper toward the switchback section. The Switchback Unit Sensor is deactivated as the trailing edge of the paper moves past it. After a given period of time, the paper is brought to a temporary stop. As the Switchback Motor turns backward, the paper undergoes a switchback operation and is fed to the Duplex Unit with its trailing edge first.
Switchback Roller
Switchback Exit/Switchback Selecting Gate
Exit
To Duplex Unit
(2) Switchback and 2-Bin tray

Job Tray
Copier Tray
Exit/Switchback Selecting Gate
The tray is provided with a paper handle. Sliding the paper handle to the front moves the paper fed into the tray to an easily removed position.
6-53
Options

Precautions for Disassembly, Reassembly, and Adjustment Before attempting to disassemble the unit, always make sure that no power is being supplied from the copier (by unplugging the power connector from the copier). While power is being supplied to the unit, do not attempt to remove/install the print jacks from/to the PWBs or unplug/plug in the connectors. If the unit is run with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts. The basic rule is do not run the unit with any of its parts removed. A toothed washer is used with the screw that secures the ground wire to ensure positive conduction. Do not forget to include this washer at reassembly. To reassemble the unit, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified. Do not attempt to remove or loosen the screws to which red paint has been applied.
6.5.2.1 Disassembly
6.5.2.1.1 Removal of the Outer Covers
<Duplex Unit>
No. 1 <Switchback Unit>
Name Right Cover
Removal Procedure Remove two screws
2 1
No. 1 2
Name Fan Motor Cover Right Cover
Removal Procedure Remove two screws. Remove two screws
6-54
Duplex/Switchback/2-Bin tray unit <2-Bin Tray>

2 1
Options
No. 1 2
Name Fan Motor Cover Right Cover
Removal Procedure Remove two screws. Remove two screws
6-55
Options
6.5.2.2 Cleaning
6.5.2.1.2 Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 1 and 2
1. Open the Duplex Unit Door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 1 and 2 clean of dirt.
6.5.2.1.3 Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 3
1. Remove the Duplex Unit. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 1 3 clean of dirt.
6-56
Options
6.5.2.1.3 Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Ventilation Section

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the outside of the Duplex Unit Ventilation Section clean of dirt.
A 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the inside of the Duplex Unit Ventilation Section clean of dirt.
6.5.2.1.4 Cleaning of the Switch Back Unit Transport Roller/Roll

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe Switch Back Unit Transport Roller/Roll clean of dirt.
6-57
Options

6-58
Options

6.5.3.2.1 Location of Misfeed detection
Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) Exit Sensor (PC4)
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC26)
6-59
Options

(1) Duplex Unit Take-up Section <Detection Timing> Type Duplex Unit TakeUp Section misfeed detection Detection of paper remaining in the Duplex Unit TakeUp Section
Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) is blocked by the paper. The Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
<Action> Relevant Electrical Components Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Copier Master Board (PWB-A) Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC26)
Step
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A-5 PWB-A PJ20A-8 page 6-58 B-3 page 6-63
1 2 3 4
Initial checks PC1 sensor check PC25 sensor check Replace PWB-A
6-60
Duplex/Switchback/2-Bin tray unit (2) Switchback Unit/Duplex Unit Transport Section <Detection Timing> Type Turnover Unit/Duplex Unit Transport Section misfeed detection
Options
Detection of paper remaining in the Duplex Unit TakeUp Section
Description The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Sensor (PC4) is unblocked by the paper. The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is blocked by the paper. The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is blocked by the paper. The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
<Action> Relevant Electrical Components Exit Sensor (PC4) Copier Master Board (PWB-A) Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24)
Step
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ18A-11 WB-A PJ27A-9 PWB-A PJ20A-5 page 6-58 D-8 page 6-63 B-3 page 6-63
1 2 3 4 5
6-61
Options (3) Paper Exit Section <Detection Timing> Type Paper Exit Section misfeed detection
Detection of paper remaining at Paper Exit Section <Action>
Description The Exit Sensor (PC4) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is blocked by the paper. The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Sensor (PC4) is unblocked by the paper. The Exit Sensor (PC4) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Relevant Electrical Components Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) Copier Master Board (PWB-A) Exit Sensor (PC4) Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
Step
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ11A-5 PWB-A PJ18A-11 PWB-A PJ27A-9 page 6-58 D-8 page 6-63
1 2 3 4 5
6-62
6-63
6.6 Second phone line

6.6.1 Attaching the second phone line..................................................................................................6-65 6.6.1.1 Unpacking .............................................................................................................................6-65 6.6.1.2 Installing the Second phone line module ..............................................................................6-65 6.6.2 Adjustment...................................................................................................................................6-67 6.6.2.1 Multi Line Settings.................................................................................................................6-67
6-64
Second phone line
Options
6.6.1 Attaching the second phone line

6.6.1.1 Unpacking
Included in the second phone line kits carton box: (1) Modem PCB ............................................ 1 (2) NCU PCB ................................................ 1 (3) Telephone line cable ............................... 1 (4) Label ........................................................ 1 (5) Spacers ................................................... 2 (6) Screw A ................................................... 6 (7) Screw B ................................................... 4 (8) Operating manual ..................................... 1 Note: For this machine, screw B iare not needed.
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
Line2
(5)
(6)
(7)
6.6.1.2 Installing the Second phone line module

1. Reassemble the NCU PCB and Modem PCB by removing each four screws from the brackets. (The brackets are not needed.)
2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord and telephone line cord. 3. Remove the Plate printer B. (four screws) 4. Remove the Plate printer A. (four screws)
Plate Printer B
Plate Printer A
6-65
Options 5. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB bottom.
Second phone line
6. Attach the Modem PCB to the spacer and screw the bottom to the machine. (two screws) 7. Attach the NCU PCB.(four screws) 8. Connect the PCBs by the connection cable. 9. Clamp the cable.
Spacers Connection cable NCU PCB
Modem PCB
10. Reattach the Plate printer A and B which you detached in step 2 and 3. 11. Use cutting pliers to gently punch out the lower part of cover back B. 12. Label there as Line2.
Phone1 Phone2 Line

>PS<
Line2
Plug the power cord and telephone line. 13. Turn the machine on.
6-66
Second phone line
Options
6.6.2 Adjustment
6.6.2.1 Multi Line Settings
This setting makes it possible to set the following menu for the optional second line: Memory Switches Unique Switches ECM mode Dialing Pause Number of Rings Note: To set the second line, it is necessary that the Unique Switch 096 bit 6 is set to On (1) in advance. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 8.
2. Select [Memory Switch].
Make the desired settings for the second line. See 3.3 Memory Switch adjustment, if necessary. 3. Press [Enter] till you come back to the menu in Step1. 4. Select [UniSwitch].
Make the desired settings for the second line. See 3.4 Unique Switch adjustment, if necessary. 5. Press [Enter] till you come back to the menu in Step1. 6. Select [ECM Mode].
6-67
Options
Second phone line
Make the desired settings for the second line. 7. Press [Enter] 8. Select [Dialing Pause].
Make the desired settings for the second line using numeric keypad, or or , 9. Press [Enter]. 10. Select [# of Rings].
Make the desired settings for the second line using numeric keypad, or 11. Select [Enter].
or
Important: These memory switches and unique switches are only for AL-500 are shown in this section.
About the symbol by the table

The at left side of the memory switch and unique switch table indicates that you can set the switch respectively for the second phone line.
6-68
6.7 Printer controller

6.7.1 Attaching the printer controller board...........................................................................................6-70 6.7.1.1 Unpacking .............................................................................................................................6-70 6.7.1.2 Installing the Printer controller kit ..........................................................................................6-70 6.7.2 Display of the Software Version...................................................................................................6-72
6-69
Options
PCL Printer controller
6.7.1 Attaching the printer controller board

6.7.1.1 Unpacking
Included in the printer controller kits carton box: ! PCL printer board .............................................................. 1 ! Spacers ............................................................................. 2 ! Screws .............................................................................. 2 ! CD ..................................................................................... 1 ! Operating instructions ....................................................... 1 ! Installation Instructions ...................................................... 1
6.7.1.2 Installing the Printer controller kit

1. Reassemble the PCL printer board by removing four screws from the bracket. (The bracket is not needed for this machine.)
2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord and telephone line cord. 3. Remove the Plate printer B. (four screws)
PLATE PRINTER B
4. Attach the spacers to the upper left of the Main PCB. (two spacers) 5. Attach the Network controller PCB to the spacers. (two screws)
6-70
PCL Printer controller 6. Screw the PCB to the machine. (two screws)
Options
Spacer
Printer controller PCB
7. Reattach the Plate printer B. (four screws) 8. Plug the power cord, and turn the machine on. 9. See the CD how to install the driver to your machine.
6-71
Options
PCL Printer controller
6.7.2 Display of the Software Version

You can see the current software version using the life monitor.
1. From standby mode, press Setting, *, 0, 9.
2. Select [Life Monitor]. The software version, total number of scanned pages, printed pages, and transmitted pages will be shown on the LCD.
ROM Ver. 0 1 2 P
Item The software version for the machine The software version for OP-500 The software version for OB-500 or NP-500 The printer engine firmware version
6-72
6.8 Printer Network Interface

6.8.1 Attaching the printer network board ............................................................................................6-74 6.8.1.1 Unpacking .............................................................................................................................6-74 6.8.1.2 Installing the Network board .................................................................................................6-74 6.8.2 Display of the Software Version ..................................................................................................6-76
6-73
Options
Printer network board
6.8.1 Attaching the printer network board

6.8.1.1 Unpacking
Included in the network interface card kits carton box: Printer network PCB ....................................................... 1 Spacers ............................................................................ 2 Screws ............................................................................. 2 CD .................................................................................... 1 Label ................................................................................ 1 Operating instructions ...................................................... 1 Installation Instructions .................................................... 1
6.8.1.2 Installing the Network board

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the Plate printer B. (four screws)
PLATE PRINTER B
3. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB lower left. 4. Attach the Printer network PCB to the spacer and screw the left side of the board to the machine.
Spacer Printer network PUB
5. Reattach the Plate printer B which you detached in step 2. 6. Use cutting pliers to gently punch out the lower part of cover back B.
6-74
Printer network board 7. Label there as NETWORK.
Options
Network
>PS<
Phone1 Phone2 Line

>PS<
8. Plug the power cord, and turn the machine on. 9. Press SETTING, and select [Management]. 10. Use the arrow key and select [Network Setting].
11. Select [IP Address], and enter IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
12. Turn the machine off, and then on. 13. Plug the network cable. 14. See the CD furnished with the printer network kit how to use your machine as a network printer and scanner.
6-75
Options
Printer network board

You can see the current software version using the life monitor.
1. From standby mode, press Setting, *, 0, 9.
2. Select [Life Monitor]. The software version, total number of scanned pages, printed pages, and transmitted pages will be shown on the LCD.
ROM Ver. 0 1 2 P
6-76
6.9 Information Server kit

6.9.1 Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................6-78 6.9.1.1 Packaging contents:..............................................................................................................6-78 6.9.1.2 Installation .............................................................................................................................6-78 6.9.2 Display of the Software Version...................................................................................................6-81 6.9.3 Internet fax service mode ............................................................................................................6-82
6-77
Options
Information server kit
6.9.1 Installation Instructions

6.9.1.1 Packaging contents:
Heres what should be in the Information server kit (IS-100) package: ! ! ! ! ! ! Information server PCB ..................................................... 1 Spacers ............................................................................. 2 Screws .............................................................................. 2 CD ..................................................................................... 1 Label ................................................................................. 1 Operating instructions ....................................................... 1
6.9.1.2 Installation
Note: Do not connect the network cable to until all the machine settings are done. 1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord and telephone line cord. 2. Remove the Plate printer B. (four screws)
PLATE PRINTER B
3. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB lower left. 4. Attach the Information server PCB to the spacer and screw the left side of the board to the machine.
SPACER Information server PCB
6-78
Information server kit 5. Reattach the Plate printer B which you detached in step 2. 6. Use cutting pliers to gently punch out the lower part of cover back B. 7 Label there as NETWORK.
Options
Network Phone1 Phone2 Line

>PS<
>PS<
8 Turn the machine off, and on. 9 Press SETTING,*, 0, 9, and select [Life Monitor]. If the PCB is installed properly, you will see the ROM version of the PCB at Ver.2. (The value may differ from this sample.) If the PCB is not identified, check that the information server PCB is installed properly.
10 .Press SETTING, , 2, 4, and select [Clear Server Data].
11.
The machine asks you whether you clear the server data, so select [Yes]. Note: All the document stored in document will disappear.
12. Turn the power off, and then on.
6-79
Options 13. Press SETTING, and select [Management]. 14. Use the arrow key and select [Network Setting].
15. Select [IP Address], and enter IP address, subnet mask and gateway. Press [Enter] to save this setting.
16. Press RESET to go back to the standby mode.
17. Press SETTING, and select [OB Pro Shutdown].
18 . The machine asks you whether you shutdown the machine, so select [Yes]. 19 . When the machine is ready, the touch panel shows Power can be turned off. So, tun the power off and on.
6-80
Options

You can see the current software version using the life monitor. 1. From standby mode, press Setting, *, 0, 9.
2. Select [Life Monitor]. The software version, total number of scanned pages, printed pages, transmitted pages will be shown on the LCD.
ROM Ver. 0 1 2 P
6-81
Options
6.9.3 Internet fax service mode

This mode is available only when the optional Internet fax kit has been installed. This mode provides the following three items: Display the sum-check of internet fax board Clear the Administrators information All clear the registered parameters of the optional Internet fax board
6.9.3.1 Display the sum check

This mode displays the ROM version and sum check of the Internet fax board. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 4.
2. Select [Show Server Sumcheck].
3. Select [Enter]. The machine returns the network service mode.
6.9.3.2 Clear the Administrators information

This mode clears the registered information of the Administrator. You can clear the data for the Administrator using this mode. It is useful when the Administrators password is lost and unable to modify. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 4.
6-82
Information server kit 2. Select [Delete Manager].
Options
3. Select [Yes]. The Administrators information will be deleted and the machine will return to standby. Note: To finish the operation without deleting the Administrators information, select [No].
6.9.3.3 All clear the registered parameters of the Internet fax board
You can clear all the data for the Internet fax kit. 1. Press Setting, *, 2, 4.
2. Select [Clear Server Data].
3. Select [Yes]. The server data will be deleted and the machine will return to standby. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the server data, select [No].
6-83
6.10 Finisher/Punch kit

6.10.1 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ................................................................................6-85 6.10.1.1 Specifications......................................................................................................................6-85 6.10.1.2 DRIVE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................6-87 6.10.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LAYOUT ...........................................................................6-88 6.10.1.4 Operation Of Each Mechanism ..........................................................................................6-89 6.10.2 DIS/REASSEMBLY, CLEANING...............................................................................................6-96 6.10.2.1 Disassembly .......................................................................................................................6-96 6.10.2.2 Cleaning............................................................................................................................6-105 6.10.3 MISFEED DETECTION...........................................................................................................6-108 6.10.3.1 Initial Check ......................................................................................................................6-108 6.10.3.2 Misfeed Detection .............................................................................................................6-108 6.10.4 Service call error .....................................................................................................................6-112 6.10.4.1 Printer error code..............................................................................................................6-112
6-84
Finisher/Punch unit
Options

<Finisher> Name Type Installation Mode Number of Bins Paper Mode Paper size : Finisher : Multi staple finisher built into the copier : Installed in the machine : Non sort, sort, group, sort stable, and punch (when punch kit is installed) : 2 bins : See the table below Capacity Paper Type 1st Tray 2nd Tray A4L (8-1/2 x 11L) or less 1000 sheets (up Plain paper 200 sheets to a height of 132 2 2 (56 g/m to 90 g/m ) (up to a height of mm (5-1/4)) Recycled paper 32 mm (1-1/4) B4L (8-1/2 x 14L) or 2 2 (60 g/m to 90 g/m ) greater 500 sheets 64.5 mm (2-1/4)) OHP transparencies Thin Paper (50 to 59 g/m2) A4L (8-1/2 x 11L) or Thick paper less 20 sheets (up to (91 to 210 g/m2) a height of 132 mm 20 sheets (up to a (5-1/4)) Envelope Special height of 32 mm (1B4L (8-1/2 x 14L) or Label 1/4)) greater 20 sheets Letterhead (up to a height of Translucent paper 64.5 mm (2-1/4)) Governmentstandard postcards A4L (8-1/2 x 11L) or less 1000 sheets (up to a height of 132 mm (5-1/4)) B4L (8-1/2 x 14L) or greater 500 sheets (up to a height of 64.5 mm (2-1/4)) A4L (8-1/2 x 11L) or less 1000 sheets or 10 copies (up to a height of 132 mm (51/4)) B4L (8-1/2 x 14L) or greater 500 sheets or 50 copies (up to a height of 64.5 mm (2-1/4))
Non sort
A6L to A3L 5-1/2 to 11 x17L Maximum: 297 mm x 431.8 mm 11-3/4 x 17 Minimum: 100 mm x A.139.7 mm 4 x 5-1/2
Sort/Grou p
Sort Staple
A5C to A3L 5-1/2 x 81/2L Maximum: 297 mm x 431.8 mm 11-3/4 x 17 Minimum: 182 mm x 139W.7 mm 7-1/4 x 51/2
200 sheets (up to a height of 32 mm (1-1/4)) Plain paper (56 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Recycled paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) 200 sheets or 20 copies (up to a height of 32 mm (1-1/4))
Document Alignment Staple Function Shift Length Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions
: Center baseline : Number of Bound Sheets: 2 to 50 : 30 mm (1-1/4) : DC 24 V 10 %, DC 5 V 5 % (supplied from the copier) : 66 W or less : 435 (W) x 573 (H) x 558 (D) mm 6-85
Options Weight Operating Environment Consumables <Punch kit> Name Installation Paper size Paper Type Punch Hole Number of Stored Punch Wastes 17-1/4 x 22-1/2 x 22 : 21.4 kg (including the Horizontal Transport Section) 47-1/2 lbs : Conforms to the operating environment of the copier. : Staples 5000 (MS-5D)
Finisher/Punch unit
Document Alignment Power Requirements Dimensions Weight Operating Environment
: Punch kit : Built into the Finisher : B5L to A3L (8-1/2 to 11 x 17L) : Plain paper (56 to 163 g/m2), recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m2) : 4 holes (for Europe and 3rd Area) 2, 3 holes (for USA and CANADA) : 2 holes : For 2,500 sheets of paper (64 g/m2) 2, 3 holes For 1,000 sheets of paper (64 g/m2) : Center baseline : Supplied by the Finisher : 114(W) x 136(H) x 461(D) mm 4-1/2 x 5-1/4 x 18-1/4 : Approx. 1.9 kg (4-1/4 lbs) or less : Conforms to the operating environment of the copier.
6-86
Finisher/Punch unit
Options

<Finisher>
Output Aperture Drive Section Elevate Motor Section Transport/Alignment Drive Section
Entrance Drive Section
Stapler Drive Section Elevator Motor Section
Exit Drive Section
<Punch kit>
Punch Drive Section
6-87
Options
Finisher/Punch unit

Duplex and Switchback Unit
PC11-FN PC12-FN S3-FN PC6-FN S2-FN M6-FN M3-FN M4-FN
PC4-FN PC16-FN M2-FN PC15-FN M12-FN PC5PC8-
S4-FN CL1-FN
PC14-FN S1-FN
SL1-FN
M11-FN PWB-FN SL2-FN PC3-FN PWB-B FN M5-FN PC7-FN M7-FN M1-FN
PC10-FN
Symbol
PWB-A FN PWB-B FN M1-FN M2-FN M3-FN M4-FN M5-FN M6-FN M7-FN M11-FN M12-FN S1-FN S2-FN S3-FN 4-FN
Name
Control Board Elevator Board Exit Motor Transport Motor Entrance Motor Alignment Motor 1 Alignment Motor 2 Exit Open/Close Motor Stapling Unit Moving Motor Elevator Motor Shutter Opening Motor Front Cover Open/Close Detection SW Shutter Detection SW Elevate Tray Upper/Lower Limit SW Transport Jam Detection SW Control Board
Symbol
PC3-FN PC4-FN PC5-FN PC6-FN PC7-FN PC8-FN PC10-FN PC11-FN PC12-FN PC14-FN PC15-FN PC16-FN SL1-FN SL2-FN PC4-FN
Name
Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor Entrance Sensor Transport Sensor Alignment Home Position Sensor1 Alignment Home Position Sensor2 Storage Tray Detecting Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor Top Face Detection Sensor Shutter Home Position Sensor Storage Paddle Solenoid Exit Paddle Solenoid Registration Clutch
2-Bin Tray
PC1-PK
Symbol
PC1-PK
Name
Punch Traxh Full
Symbol
Name
6-88
Finisher/Punch unit
Options
6.10.1.4 Operation Of Each Mechanism

6.5.1.4.1 Switchback Mechanism
(1) Elevator Tray Ascent/Descent The Elevator Tray is moved up or down by the Elevator Motor that turns forward or backward to drive the front and rear belts. The Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor detects the Elevator Tray at its lower limit position. The Elevator Tray Upper/Lower Limit Switch is provided for protection when a malfunction occurs in the finisher. (2) Tray Position Detection Mechanism The tray moves up or down according to the amount of paper fed onto it. If the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor is activated when a sheet of paper is fed onto the tray, the Elevator Tray is temporarily lowered until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor is deactivated and then the tray is raised to a level, at which the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor is activated again. This is done when each time a sheet of paper is fed onto the tray to keep the same height at all times for the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor of the paper on the tray.
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor
The position sensor is used to detect the position of each tray. Each of the trays moves to its lower limit position during initial operations. It then goes up as necessary. The tray goes up to the required position as controlled through the number of times the position sensor is activated during the ascent motion. When the position sensor is activated once, as counted from the lower limit position, the 1st Tray is at the exit port. When the position sensor is activated twice, the 2nd Tray is at the exit port. As long as the power is ON, the finisher stores in memory which tray is located at the exit port at all times. Drive is stopped when the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor is activated with the position sensor of the target tray in the activated position. When paper is loaded in the tray and the position sensor is finally deactivated with the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor in the activated state, a paper full condition is detected for the tray and tray is stopped. The corresponding message is given on the control panel after 50 pages are printed out from a paper full condition.
1st Tray Position sensor
2nd Tray
6-89
Options (3) Shutter Open/Close Mechanism
Finisher/Punch unit
There is a shutter provided at the exit area of the finisher. The Shutter is normally in the raised position and the exit port is open. When the trays are moving, however, the Shutter is closed to ensure operator safety. The Shutter is opened or closed by the Shutter Opening Motor that turns a gear train for raising or lowering the Shutter. The Shutter Home Position Sensor detects the position of the gear, thereby determining the position of the Shutter. The Shutter Detection Switch detects that the Shutter is in the closed position. From the safety viewpoint, the Shutter Detection Switch detects any foreign object (e.g. hand) located at the exit port. When the switch detects any object, the Elevator Tray will be prevented from moving. Shutter Home Position Sensor
Shutte
Shutter Detection
6-90
Finisher/Punch unit (4) Entrance/Transport Mechanism
Options
Paper is fed into the finisher by the drive provided by the Entrance Motor. The paper is fed by the Entrance Roller, Registration Roller, and then the Transport Roller. As the Registration Clutch is energized, a loop is formed in the paper at the Registration Roller in Punch and Center Crease mode only, thereby correcting any skew in the paper. The Registration Clutch is energized to allow the Registration Roller to start turning after a given period of time after the Entrance Sensor has detected the leading edge of the paper. The Transport Motor then transports paper from the Transport Roller to the exit section.
Entrance Motor Transport Roller Entrance Roller Storage Exit Roller Registration Roller
Entrance Sensor Registration Clutch Transport Motor Transport Sensor
(5) Paper Aligning Mechanism (FD Direction) In the Sort, Group Copy, Staple, or Center Crease/Center Staple mode, each copy set is stored in the Storage Tray with the Upper Exit Roller separated from the Lower Exit Roller. The paper is held downward by the drop lever and dropped down into the Storage Tray by the stepped roller. Drop Lever Storage Exit Roller
Stepped Roller Paddle
Paper Stopper
6-91
Options
Finisher/Punch unit
The paper dropped into the Storage Tray is pressed against the stopper by the paddle and aligning belt so that it is aligned properly in the FD direction. The paddle turns one complete turn for each sheet of paper fed in. The paddle turns two turns in the Center Crease/Center Staple mode. The Storage Tray Detecting Sensor detects paper in the Storage Tray. Paddle Aligning Belt
Storage Tray Detecting Sensor
Aligning Belt Paddle
Stack/Set Exit Motor (6) Paper Aligning Mechanism (CD Direction) The paper in the Storage Tray is aligned in the CD direction by two Alignment Motors and aligning plates. The aligning plates are provided with stoppers. The aligning plates are moved to the front or rear in accordance with the paper size. The Alignment Home Position Sensor controls the position of each aligning plate. Aligning Plate
Paper Stoppers Alignment Home Position Sensor Alignment Motors Alignment Home Position Sensor 6-92 Aligning Plate
Finisher/Punch unit
Options
In normal copy and staple mode, the paper is fed into the tray at its center position. If no stapling is involved in the Sort or Group Copy mode, the aligning plate shifts 15 mm to the front or rear from the center. This stacks copy sets/stacks in a saw tooth manner, each being offset by about 30 mm with respect to the others. The alignment tray is capable of holding 2 to 50 sheets of paper.
Approx. 30 mm Center
Normal/Staple
Shift (Sort/Group Copy)
(7) Exit Mechanism There is a paper holding paddle provided at the Exit Roller for preventing the copy set/stack on the exit tray from being pushed by a new copy set/stack that is being fed out. The subsequent copy set/stack is fed out with the copy sets/stacks previously resident on the tray being held down by the paper holding paddle. The home sensor, spring clutch, and solenoid control the retracted position and paper holding position of the paper holding paddle.
Paper Holding Paddle
(8) Upper Exit Roller Up/Down Motion Mechanism The Exit Open/Close Motor moves the Upper Exit Roller away from the Lower Exit Roller or presses the Upper Exit Roller up against the Lower Exit Roller. When one copy set/stack is stored in the Storage Tray, the Upper Exit Roller is moved downward to be pressed up against the Lower Exit Roller and the two rollers feed the copy set/stack out onto the exit tray. The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor detects the position of the Upper Exit Roller, whether it is in the raised or lowered position.
6-93
Options (9) Stapling Mechanism
Finisher/Punch unit
A copy set/stack that is properly aligned in the Storage Tray is stapled together. For all stapling operations, there is only one Stapling Unit used. It is moved via a belt by the Stapling Unit Moving Motor to the required stapling position. The stapling position is controlled by the period of time during which the Stapling Unit Moving Motor is kept energized, as counted from the Staple Home Position Sensor.
Stapling Unit
Staple Home Position Sensor
Stapling Unit Moving Motor When the number of staples available nears about 20, the staple empty detection sensor detects a staple empty condition. When the empty condition is detected, the corresponding empty indication is given on the control panel. At the same time, the Stapling Unit moves to the front to allow the user to replace the staple cartridge. When a new staple cartridge is loaded, the stapling motor is energized until the self-priming sensor detects a staple, which results in the staple to be fed up to the stapling position.
Staple Empty Detection Sensor
Self-Priming Sensor
6-94
Finisher/Punch unit (10) Punching Mechanism
Options
For punch and center crease operations, a loop is formed in the paper at the Registration Roller to correct skew. The Registration Clutch is then energized after a given period of time after the Entrance Sensor is activated by the leading edge of the paper, this causes the Registration Roller to start turning. After a given period of time after the Entrance Sensor has detected the trailing edge of the paper, the motor is deenergized and a punch hole operation is made at the trailing edge portion in each sheet of paper. Punch holes are made when the slide cam makes a reciprocating motion, as driven by the drive cam which is rotated by the Punch Motor provided in the punch unit. Registration Roller
Entrance Sensor
Punch Motor The punch status is detected by using the Punch Positioning Sensors and the Punch Motor Pulse Sensor.
Punch Motor Pulse Sensor Punch Positioning Sensors
6-95
Options
Finisher/Punch unit

Precautions for Disassembly, Reassembly, and Adjustment Before attempting to disassemble the unit, always make sure that no power is being supplied from the machine (by unplugging the power connector from the machine). While power is being supplied to the unit, do not attempt to remove/install the print jacks from/to the PWBs or unplug/plug in the connectors. If the unit is run with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts. The basic rule is do not run the unit with any of its parts removed. A toothed washer is used with the screw that secures the ground wire to ensure positive conduction. Do not forget to include this washer at reassembly. To reassemble the unit, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified. Do not attempt to remove or loosen the screws to which red paint has been applied.
6.10.2.1 Disassembly
6.10.2.1.1 Identification of Fuses
<
Control Board PWB-S FN F1:AC 250 V 4 A
No. 1
Name Right Cover
Removal Procedure Remove two screws
6-96
Finisher/Punch unit
Options
6.10.2.1.2 Removal of the Outer Covers

1 7 2
6 3 4 5 13 12 11 10 9
No.
1 2 3 4
Name
Horizontal Transport Upper Front Cover Horizontal Transport Upper Cover Horizontal Transport Front Right Cover Horizontal Transport Front Middle Cover Front Door
Removal Procedure
Unhook the tab and remove Remove four screws and the cover Remove two screws and the cover Remove two screws and the cover.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Horizontal Transport Lower Front Cover Horizontal Transport Left Front Cover Paper Exit Front Cover 2nd Drawer Additional Bin 1st Drawer Connector Cover Paper Exit Rear Cover
Remote two screws and the dummy cover. Remove one screw and the stopper. Close the Front Door. Remove one Cring and remove the cover. Remove two screws and the cover. Remove three screws and the cover Remove two screws and the cover. Remove two screws and the drawer Remove two screws and the bin. Remove two screws and the drawer Remove one screw and the cover Remove two screws, loosen one screw, and remove the cover.
6-97
Options
Finisher/Punch unit
6.101.2.1.3 Removal of the Sorted Copy Tray

NOTES When removing the Sorted Copy Tray, set the Sorted Copy Tray to its home position. 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Remove one screw and the Front Door Stopper.
3. Remove three screws and the Left Front Cover.
4. Unplug three connectors. 5. Remove two screws, and the ground wire.
6. Remove six screws and lift the Sorted Copy Tray upward and off the copier.
6-98
Finisher/Punch unit
Options
6.10.2.1.4 Removal of the Horizontal Transport Unit

1. Remove the Sorted Copy Tray. 2. Remove the Front Right Door. 3. While holding down the lock release button, remove the Horizontal Transport Unit.
6.10.2.1.5 Removal of the Stapler Unit

1. Open the Front Door. 2. Turn the dial and move the stapler forward. 3. Remove the Staple Cartridge. 4. Remove one screw and the cover.
5. Unplug two connectors.
6-99
Options 6. Remove two screws and the Stapler Unit Assy.
Finisher/Punch unit
7. Remove two screws and the Stapler Unit.
6.10.2.1.6 Removal of the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch

1. Remove the Sorted Copy Tray. 2. Remove the Horizontal Transport Unit. 3. Remove the Horizontal Transport Top Cover. 4. Remove one C ring.
6-100
Finisher/Punch unit 5. Loosen two hexagonal socket head screws and remove the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy.
Options
Hexagonal socket head screw

Precaution for Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Reinstallation
1. Check that the 2-mm hole of the storage paddle drive shaft and the cutout of the frame are aligned and install the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy. 2. Refer to the figure below and check the paddle position. 3. Hook the Solenoid Flapper to the tab of the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy.
Storage paddle drive shaft Frame cutout Frame cutout
Paddle
2-mm hole
Frame
Solenoid Flapper
Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
Tab
4. Attach one C ring and reinstall the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy. 5. Adjust the spacing between the C ring and the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy to 0.2mm and tighten two hexagonal socket head screws.
6-101
Options
Finisher/Punch unit
6.10.2.1.7 Removal of the Storage Exit Paddle Drive Clutch

1. Remove the Sorted Copy Tray. 2. Remove the Horizontal Transport Unit. 3. Remove the Horizontal Transport Top Cover. 4. Remove one C ring. 5. Remove one gear.
6. Loosen two hexagonal socket head screws and remove the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy.
Hexagonal socket head screw

<Reinstallation Procedure> 1. Reinstall the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy.
6-102
Finisher/Punch unit
Options
Precaution for Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Reinstallation

Exit paddle Shading plate Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy Exit paddle
90
170 mm + 3 mm
Bushing
Shading plate
Gear Sensor
Solenoid flapper
2. Install one gear.
3. Hook the Solenoid Flapper to the tab of the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy. NOTE Install the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy with the side having a wider spacing between the tabs facing upward.
Gear Clutch Assy
Shading plate Tab Solenoid Flapper
6-103
Options
Finisher/Punch unit
4. Attach one C ring and press the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy to the bushing. 5. Adjust the spacing between the bushing and the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy to 0.2 mm and tighten two hexagonal socket head screws.
Bushing
Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
0.2 mm
6.10.2.1.8 Removal of the Punch Unit

1. Remove the Sorted Copy Tray. 2. Remove the Horizontal Transport Unit. 3. Remove four screws and the Upper Cover.
4. Remove two screws and the Reinforcement Bracket.
5. Unplug two connectors.
6-104
Finisher/Punch unit 6. Remove two screws, and the Punch Kit.
Options
7. Remove eight screws, and the Punch Unit.
6.10.2.2 Cleaning
6.10.2.2.1 Cleaning of the Roller and Roll
1. Remove the Sorted Copy Tray. 2. Remove the Horizontal Transport Unit. 3. Remove the Horizontal Transport Top Cover. 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller and roll.
6-105
Options 5. Lower Processing Guide FN1. 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll.
Finisher/Punch unit
7. Remove Punch Waste Storage Box FN3.1. (only when Punch kit is installed)
8. Lower Processing Guide FN-3. 9. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll.
10. Lower Processing Guide FN-4. 11. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll.
6-106
Finisher/Punch unit 12. While turning Processing Knob FN-5, wipe the roll using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.
Options
13. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller.
6-107
Options
Finisher/Punch unit


6.10.3.2.1 Location of Misfeed detection
Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN)
Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN)
6-108
Finisher/Punch unit
Options

(1) Transport Section Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher Transport Section misfeed detection
Finisher Paper Exit Section misfeed detection Detection of paper remaining in the Transport Section <Action>
Description The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the copiers Exit Sensor (PC4) is blocked by the paper. The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the copiers Exit Sensor (PC4) is unblocked by the paper. The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is blocked by the paper. The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is unblocked by the paper. The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Copier Exit Sensor (PC4) Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) Transport Sensor (PC5-FN)
Relevant Electrical Components Control Board (PWB-A FN) Copier Master Board (PWB-A)
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A PJ18A-11 PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-4 PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-9 B-7 page6-120 A-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
1 2 3 4 5 6
PC4 sensor check PC4-FN sensor check PC5-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement PWB-A replacement
6-109
Options (2) Finisher Staple Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher staple misfeed detection
Finisher/Punch unit
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) D-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
1 2 3 4 5
Drive Coupling Section check I/O CHECK Staple Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
(3) Finisher Punch Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher punch misfeed detection
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) F-2 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
1 2 3 4 5
Drive Coupling Section check I/O CHECK Punch Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
6-110
Finisher/Punch unit (4) Finisher Bundle Exit Misfeed <Detection Timing> Type Finisher Bundle Exit misfeed detection <Action> Relevant Electrical Components Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Exit Motor (M1-FN)
Options
Description The Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Motor (M1-FN) is energized.
Step Initial checks
Operations
WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-8 F-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
1 2 3
PC8-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
6-111
Options
Finisher/Punch unit

Malfunction Code Description Detection Timing The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3-FN) and Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) are not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized. The Elevator Tray does not stop at the position for the specified tray after the Elevator Motor (M11FN) is energized (beginning of descent operation) and the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14FN) is blocked. The Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of ascent operation) when paper is being fed out. The Lock signal is detected after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11FN) is energized. The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-opening operation). The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-closing operation). The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 1 (M4-FN) is energized The Home Position Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor is energized (beginning of staple operation). The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 2 (M5-FN) is energized.
33
Elevator Motor Ascent/Descent Drive Failure
35
Shutter Drive Failure
36
37
Staple Drive Failure
38
6-112
Finisher/Punch unit Malfunction Code
Options
Description
Detection Timing The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7FN) is energized (beginning of return operation to predetermined position). The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of pressure operation). The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6FN) is energized (beginning of retraction operation). The Punch Motor Pulse Sensor cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Punch Drive Motor is energized. The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) is activated (beginning of paddle retraction operation). The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2FN) is activated (beginning of paddle paperholding operation).
39
Staple Unit CD Drive Failure
3A
Exit Roller Pressure/ Retraction Failure
3C
Punch Cam Motor Unit Failure
3F
Paper Holding Drive Failure
6-113
Options (1) 33: Elevator Motor Ascent/Descent Drive Failure Trouble Code
Finisher/Punch unit
33
Description The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3-FN) and Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) are not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized. The Elevator Tray does not stop at the position for the specified tray after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of descent operation) and the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is blocked. The Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of ascent operation) when paper is being fed out. The Lock signal is detected after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized.
<Action> Relevant Electrical Parts Elevator Motor (M11-FN) Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC15-FN) Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3Elevator Board (PWB-B FN) FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC14FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ7A FN-1,2 PWB-B FN PJ9A FN-7 PWB-B FN PJ9A FN-3 PWB-B FN PJ9A FN-4 G-7 page6-120 I-7 page6-120 H-7 page6-120 I-7 page6-120 I-6 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
Step
Operations Check the M11-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary Check M11-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary If AK-1 is connected, check the connector for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the installation position of the AD-1 tray, and correct as necessary M11-FN operation check PC3-FN sensor check PC14-FN sensor check PC15-FN sensor check PWB-B FN replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6-114
Finisher/Punch unit (2) 35: Shutter Drive Failure Trouble Code Description The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-opening operation). The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-closing operation).
Options
35
Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) Elevator Board (PWB-B FN) Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-1,2 PWB-B FN PJ2B FN-9 B-7 page6-120 H-7 page6-120 I-6 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
Step
Operations Check the M6-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M6-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M6-FN operation check PC16-FN sensor check PWB-B FN replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6
6-115
Options (3) 36: Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure 38 Aligning Plate 2 Drive Failure Trouble Code
Finisher/Punch unit
36
38
Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 1 (M4FN) is energized. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Power Switch is set to ON. The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Alignment Motor 2 (M5FN) is energized.
Relevant Electrical Parts Alignment Motor 1 (M4-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Alignment Motor 2 (M5-FN) Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7FN)) 36: Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure Step Operations Check the M4-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M4-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M4-FN operation check PC6-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 38 Aligning Plate 2 Drive Failure Step Operations Check the M5-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M5-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M5-FN operation check PC7-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-6 G-7 page6-120 F-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-3 G-7 page6-120 F-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
6-116
Finisher/Punch unit (4) 37: Staple Drive Failure Trouble Code 37 Description The Home Position Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor is energized (beginning of staple operation). Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-A FN)) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) D-7 page6-120 D-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
Options
Staple Unit
Step
Operations Check the Staple unit connector for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the Staple Unit for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. Staple Unit operation check Staple Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5
(5) 39: Staple Unit CD Drive Failure Trouble Code 39 Description The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN) is energized (beginning of return operation to predetermined position).
Relevant Electrical Parts Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ17A FN-3 E-7 page6-120 D-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
Step
Operations Check for interference with the Shutter and Exit Roller, and correct as necessary. Check the M7-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M7-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M7-FN operation check PC10-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6
6-117
Options (6) 3A: Exit Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure
Finisher/Punch unit
Trouble Code
3A
Description The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of pressure operation). The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of retraction operation).
Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-1,2 PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-7 B-7 page6-120 A-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
Step
Operations Check the M6-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M6-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary M6-FN operation check PC12-FN sensor check PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5
(7) 3C: Punch Cam Motor Unit Failure Trouble Code 3C Description The Punch Motor Pulse Sensor cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Punch Drive Motor is energized. Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) F 2 page6-120 C 5 page6-120
Punch Unit
Step
Operations Check the Punch Unit connectors for proper connection, and correct as necessary. Check the Punch Unit for proper drive coupling, and correct as necessary. Punch Unit sensor check Punch Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4 5
6-118
Finisher/Punch unit (8) 3F: Paper Holding Drive Failure Trouble Code Description The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2FN) is activated (beginning of paddle retraction operation). The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2FN) is activated (beginning of paddle paper-holding operation).
Options
3F
Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal (Electrical Components) PWB-A FN PJ17A FN-7 PWB-A FN PJ18A FN-6 D-7 page6-120 C-7 page6-120 C-5 page6-120
Step
Operations Check the SL2-FN connector for proper connection and correct as necessary PC11-FN sensor check SL2-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement
1 2 3 4
6-119
6-120

Muratec MFX2830 Field Engineer Manual (Field Service)

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Muratec MFX2830 Field Engineer Manual (Field Service)

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

MFX-2830

FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL

U.S. version 2.0

MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

Section2 Machine Composition.............................................. 2-1

Section3 Software adjustment................................................ 3-1

Section4 Troubleshooting Procedures .................................. 4-1

Section 5 Maintenance & Adjustment .................................... 5-1

Section6 Options...................................................................... 6-1

Section 1 General Description

1.2 General specifications

Telephone network Compatibility Coding method Communication method Modem

Muratec MFX-2830 Item Acceptable recording paper size

Acceptable recording paper type

General Description Item Specifications / Comments

Dimensions (W D H) : 678 mm(26.7) 658 mm(25.9) 856 mm(33.7)

Weight Keypad layout

84.7 Kg (186.7 lb) Weight does not include :

Toner bottle, Drum

Muratec light gray (91-242)

1.3 Scanning specifications

Document feeding direction Document size autodetection

Scanning width Scanning resolution

1.4 Printer specifications

Acceptable recording paper type Recording paper capacity

Output paper tray capacity

Receive paper feeding direction Warm up time

1.5 Memory specifications

Memory usage indication Option memory upgrade Built-in Connector P6 32 MB 32 MB + 32 MB

Total memory 32 MB (32768 KB) 64 MB (65536 KB)

1.6 G3 modem section

Synchronism Automatic adaptive equalizer

1.7 V.34 HDX modem section

None None None Carrier frequency (Hz)

2400 None None None None

Carrier frequency (Hz)

Detection method Automatic equalizer

1.8 Features and Functions

1.8.2 Fax Transmitting

1.8.3 Fax Receiving

1.8.6 Other features

1.9 Supply Yields

Section2 Machine Composition

PCB CCD D9109320-50A

CLUTCH 1 (2.5K) CLUTCH 2 (2.5K) CLUTCH 3 (2.5K) CLUTCH 4

DS3 ASSY TXIL BIS

APS HPR SENSOR HPR SENSOR HPR SENSOR2 HPR SENSOR2

PCB CONN CIS

PCB ASSY DSS

PCB CONNECT ADF

LINE PCB NCU TEL

PRT MECHA CON 511F

2.2 Interconnect Block Diagram (Printer)

Block diagram (Printer_2of2)

2.3 Scanning Section

DS2 DS1 DSS

Scanning position (Front side)

Scanning position (Front side)

2.3.1.1 Original Detection

the try or not

DIL DS1 DSS DRS DS3

ODB4 ODA3 DS2